SECTION I - CLASS DEFINITION
This is the generic class for an apparatus wherein a user of
the apparatus causes an intelligible character* to be imprinted
on a record-medium* by a type-member* that is
impressed on the record-medium, said type-member being selected
from a plurality of different type-members, and the selected type-members
being impressed serially to form a sequence of characters that record intelligible
information.
This class includes a method of using the apparatus described
above.
| | (1)
Note. The definition as written above is intended to emphasize
the major difference between this class (400) and the class of printing.
The difference is that as a general rule in this class each character* is imprinted
serially by a type-member* that is selected from an assortment
of type-members, the assortment containing only one of each type-member
to be impressed, and the selection being made in sequence to imprint
one character after another to form a word, and one word after another
to form the text to be read. In the printing class, on the other
hand, a plurality of type-members are arranged to be printed simultaneously
to form a print-line* or a page* or a plurality of
pages of printed text. |
| | (2)
Note. The word "intelligible" in the definition
of this class does not limit the character to a visible character.
A character that is invisible to the human eye can be intelligible
to a "scanner" that "reads",
for example, infrared light emanations, and thus be intelligible
within the definition stated above. |
| | (3)
Note. Explanatory note regarding placement of patents within
the class. A typewriter includes many elements, often numbering
in the hundreds and even thousands of elements. Because of this,
many patents in the typewriter art include claims that recite elements
of a typewriter that are named in a claim for the purpose of setting forth
the environment of the inventive structure. In such patents, the
mere naming of various elements in a claim will not necessarily
be the basis of placing a patent having such a claim into the schedule
as an original patent. Original placement will be based upon the
inventive concept emphasized in a patent claim rather than on the basis
of all the elements that are merely named in a claim. |
SECTION II - LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES AND WITHIN THIS CLASS
The relationship of this class (400) to classes which warrant
specific mention is as follows:
Class 101, Printing, involves the imprinting on a record-medium* of
a multitude of character symbols simultaneously to form a print-line* or
a page* or a plurality of pages of printed text. The significant
difference between this class (400) and Class 101 lies in the term "simultaneously".
In Class 101 plurality of type-face* elements are assembled.
If a plurality of occurrences of a particular character are to
be printed, a corresponding number of type-faces representing that
character are included in the assemblage. When the entire assemblage
of type-faces is inked and impressed against a record-medium, all
the type-faces will be imprinted simultaneously. In this class
(400) only one type-face element is provided for each character
to be imprinted, and the type-faces are impressed in sequence to
form the text. Two exceptions should be noted. In a stenographic typewriter,
the typist may select two or more characters to be imprinted to
form a syllable of a word, and may then select two or more characters
to form another syllable of a word. One or more of the characters
selected for one syllable may be selected again to form another syllable,
but only one type-face for each character to be imprinted is provided
in the stenographic typewriter. In a logotype typewriter a plurality
of type-face elements may be preassembled to form a word or symbol,
but the logotype type-face is one of the type-face elements of the
typewriter, and the logotype type-face element is selected as one
of the type-face elements in the sequence of characters to be imprinted
serially. Various subcombinations of elements are usable either
in a Class 101 printing press or in a typewriter of this class (400).
Among such subcombinations are a ribbon-feeding or ribbon-inking
mechanism, a record-medium feeding mechanism, etc., but the placement
of a patent to such subcombination will be governed by the environment
of the machine.
Class 178, Telegraphy, includes in subclasses 4 and 23 disclosures
of printing telegraph systems that are similar in some aspects to
a typewriter. In general, Class 178 involves a telegraphic system
including one or more signal-sending units, one or more signal-receiving
units, and electrical circuitry, the system being capable of (a) transmitting
a signal over great distances, or (b) boosting or amplifying the
signal, or (c) mixing signals that have been generated in a plurality
of sending units, transmitting the mixed signals over a single line
and unmixing the signals at a plurality of receiving units so that
each receiver will transcribe only its own signal from the single
line, or (d) selecting the receiving units that will be controlled
by the sending units. Class 178 also provides, in various subclasses,
for subcombinations including key-board*, key* element,
type wheel, and other elements that are peculiar to printing telegraph systems.
This class (400) as related to Class 178, involves a typewriter
that is (a) directly coupled to a second typewriter by electrical
or mechanical linkage over a short distance (e.g., "master-slave" relationship), or
(b) coupled by way of a "storage" or "memory" circuit
to itself or to a second typewriter (e.g., "input-output" relationship),
or (c) controlled to modify the typing signals generated by a typist
to create a text different from that which would be produced by
the unmodified generated signals (e.g., by "justification" (see
subclass 1). This class (400) will also accept subcombinational aspects
of a telegraphic printer that embody typewriter subcombinations
not provided for in Class 178. Examples of such subcombinations
include: ribbon* feed, carriage* feed, record-medium
feed, type-head* structure, key-board mechanism, type-bar* action,
tabulator structure, etc.
Class 234, Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), the relationship
of this class (400) to Class 234 is fully set forth in the class
definition of Class 234, in section V, paragraph E. Reference is
made to the relationship between Class 234 and Class 400, Typewriting
Machines, in that note.
Class 235, Registers, the relationship of this class (400) to
Class 235 is set forth in the "SEARCH CLASS" 400, Typewriting
Machines, that appears under the definition of Class 235, subclass
60.
Class 346, Recorders, provides for an ink* jet means for
recording intelligence. This class (400) provides for a typewriter
structure in which the usual type-face* element that impresses
a character symbol against a record-medium is replaced by an ink
jet for imprinting a character symbol on a record-medium. To be
placed as an original into this class, a patent should clearly recite
the typewriter structure that controls the ink jet to form characters
successively.
Class 358, Facsimile and Static Presentation Processing, includes
in subclasses 1.1-1.18 disclosures involving a data-processing system
that generates a printout of the results produced by the processing
system. The significant subject matter of such a system is proper
for Class 358.
OTHER CLASSES INCLUDING MATERIAL HANDLING OR MATERIAL FEEDING
See References to Other Classes for subcombinations that may
be included in a typewriter to feed a record-medium* or
a ribbon* or other sheetlike or weblike material. For
a patent to be placed as an original into this class (400) the claimed
subject matter of such patent should be clearly related to a typewriter
(e.g., be directed to one or more ink*-ribbon spools in
a typewriter, sheet, or web feeding involving line-space* distances
or format control in a typewriter, etc.).
SEARCH NOTES TO OTHER CLASSES INCLUDING SUBCOMBINATIONS USABLE
IN A TYPEWRITER
See References to Other Classes for subcombinations that
may be included in a typewriter for various purposes needed during
the operation of a typewriter. For a patent to be placed as an
original into this class (400) the claimed subject matter of such
patent should be clearly related to a typewriter (e.g., be directed
to a device for cleaning a type-face* of a typewriter,
a bell for indicating the occurrence of the end of a print-line* in
a typewriter, etc.).
SECTION III - REFERENCES TO OTHER CLASSES
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 15, | Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning,
subclass 246 include an attachment for cleaning. (Other Classes
Including Subcombinations Usable In A Typewriter) |
| 40, | Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting,
subclass 341 for a copyholder that is not part of a typewriter, but
which may be used in conjunction with a typewriter for advancing
material that may be copied from during typing. (Class Including Material
Handling Or Material Feeding) |
| 74, | Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for a linkage that is usable
as an actuating mechanism of a typewriter. (Other Classes Including
Subcombinations Usable In A Typewriter) |
| 108, | Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, appropriate subclasses for a support for sheet or
web material. (Class Including Material Handling Or Material Feeding) |
| 116, | Signals and Indicators,
subclass 148 and 200 for an indicator or a bell. (Other Classes Including
Subcombinations Usable In A Typewriter) |
| 118, | Coating Apparatus,
subclass 200 for coating apparatus applicable to a typewriter
to re-ink a ribbon*. (Other Classes Including Subcombinations
Usable In A Typewriter) |
| 221, | Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses and especially
subclass 33 for dispensing of a sheetlike article. (Class Including
Material Handling Or Material Feeding) |
| 222, | Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for dispensing of liquid.
(Other Classes Including Subcombinations Usable In A Typewriter) |
| 226, | Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses for feeding of web material.
(Class Including Material Handling Or Material Feeding) |
| 242, | Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding appropriate subclasses for the winding
of web material onto a roll or the unwinding of web material from
a roll. (Class Including Material Handling Or Material Feeding) |
| 248, | Supports,
subclass 442.2 for a support for a copyholder. (Class Including
Material Handling Or Material Feeding) |
| 271, | Sheet Feeding or Delivering,
subclass 8 for appropriate sheet-feeding structure. (Class Including
Material Handling Or Material Feeding) |
| 276, | Typesetting,
subclass 28 for justification in a type setting machine. (Other
Classes Including Subcombinations Usable In A Typewriter) |
| 281, | Books, Strips, and Leaves,
subclass 45 for a book or leaf holder. (Class Including Material Handling
Or Material Feeding) |
| 359, | Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and
Elements,
subclasses 838+ for a reflector usable in a typewriter. (Other
Classes Including Subcombinations Usable In A Typewriter) |
| 384, | Bearings, appropriate subclasses for guide structure usable
in a typewriter. (Other Classes Including Subcombinations Usable
In A Typewriter) |
| 434, | Education and Demonstration,
subclass 176 , 202, and 227 for a key-board* for teaching
or learning purposes. (Other Classes Including Subcombinations Usable
In A Typewriter) |
| 462, | Books, Strips, and Leaves for Manifolding, appropriate subclasses and especially
subclass 73 for the holding and formation of books, strips
and leaves for manifolding. (Class Including Material Handling Or
Material Feeding) |
| 493, | Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or
Other Manufacturing From a Sheet or Web,
subclass 411 , 413, 430, 433, and 451 for the folding of zigzag
or fan folded material. (Class Including Material Handling Or Material
Feeding) |
| 492, | Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, especially
subclasses 49+ for concentric layered annular roll structure and subclasses
57+ for single annular member roll structure. (Other Classes
Including Subcombinations Usable In A Typewriter) |
SECTION IV - GLOSSARY
In the typewriter art certain words and terms have acquired
distinct and specialized meanings. The following Glossary will
define and explain the terms so as to facilitate understanding of,
and simplify, the definitions of the subclasses to follow. Throughout
the class definition and the subclass definitions, an asterisk (*)
following a word or term will indicate that it has been defined in
this section. For a term that is defined in this Glossary and used
in the title or definition of a subclass, the individual words of
the term are separated by a hyphen (-) to indicate that the term
is alphabetized in this Glossary as if it were a single word.
APRON
A member closely adjacent to the cylindrical platen* of a
typewriter that serves to guide a record-medium* into close
contact with the platen. It is usually a thin sheet of relatively
rigid material having a length dimension approximating the length
of the platen and is arcuately shaped to approximately the radius
of the platen whereby it conforms to part of the periphery of the platen.
It is usually located underneath the platen and closely adjacent
thereto so that the record-medium is guided between the apron and
the platen to be partially wrapped around the platen. The apron
may also serve as a mounting for feed-rollers* that cooperate
with the platen to move the record-medium in a line-space* direction.
AUXILIARY-RECORD-PROGRAM
A set of instructions used in a programmed-control-system* of
a typewriter, which set of instructions may be readily removed from
the typewriter so that another set of instructions may be inserted
into the typewriter to perform a different or a modified sequence
of typing functions.
CARRIAGE
A mechanism for supporting a record-medium* or
for supporting a type-head-carrier*, which mechanism is provided
with means to effect relative movement between the record-medium
and a type-head-carrier that is at the print-point*, the
movement occurring along a line that is parallel to the print-line*.
A "carriage-feed" means effects carriage movement
in the direction that causes character* symbols to be imprinted
in succession, thus "carriage feed" also effects
character-space* and word-space* distances. In
most typewriters used for typing a European language said direction
is from left to right, but there are some typewriters capable of imprinting
successive characters from right to left even though the words will
be read from left to right, and there are other typewriters intended
to imprint successive characters from right to left because the
words will be read from right to left. In any event, the carriage-feed
direction is always the direction that causes characters to be imprinted
in succession. In some typewriters the record-medium is held to
a platen that is mounted on a carriage, and the "platen
carriage" (together with the record-medium) is moved relative
to the main frame of the typewriter. Each successively actuated
type-member* is impressed at a print-point that is stationary
relative to the main frame. The platen-carriage (e.g., right to
left) is opposite to the direction in which successive characters
are imprinted and read (e.g., left to right). (The directions mentioned
apply except as noted above.) In some typewriters the record-medium
is held to a platen that does not move during the imprinting of
a print-line. The type-member is on a type-head* that
is on a type-head-carrier that is mounted on a carriage, and the
type-head carriage is moved relative to the main frame of the typewriter.
Each successively actuated type-member is impressed at a print-point
that is moved relative to the main frame. The "type-head
carriage" movement (e.g., left to right) is in the direction
in which successive characters are imprinted and read (e.g., left
to right). In both forms of typewriter noted above, the term carriage
feed is applied to movement of the carriage in the direction that
effects imprinting of successive characters and words*.
Thus, for a platen-carriage typewriter, carriage feed is usually
from right to left (but note the exception above), whereas for a
type-head-carriage typewriter, carriage feed is usually from left
to right. Either typewriter is also capable of carriage reversal,
which is in the direction opposite to carriage feed, and is used
for "carriage return" (e.g., to start a new print-line)
or is used for carriage backspace (e.g., to move a carriage a distance
equivalent of one or more character-spaces in a reverse direction).
CARRIAGE-RACK
A bar having teeth or notches along one of its sides, which
bar is affixed to a carriage*, and which teeth or notches
cooperate with a pawl* or a pinion gear to enable or cause
movement of the bar and the carriage to which it is affixed. There
may be provision for adjustment of the bar relative to the carriage,
but the adjustment is usually made at the time of manufacture of
the typewriter, or may be made subsequently during a period of time
when the typewriter is not being used for typing. When a carriage-rack
cooperates with a pawl, it acts as a ratchet*, and for
a discussion of how a pawl and ratchet operates as a carriage-feed
mechanism, see the definition of pawl in this Glossary,
CASE-SHIFT
Case-shift is the relative movement between a record-medium* and
a type-face* or a type-die* that is at the print-point*,
which movement is effected by pressing a case-shift key* concurrently
with the pressing of a character* key. In most typewriters,
selection of which character is to be imprinted in sequence is made
by selection of the character keys. In a typewriter with a case-shift,
a choice of upper-case* (i.e., "CAPITAL" letter)
or lower-case* (i.e., "small" letter)
form of the selected letter is possible by concurrently pressing
or not pressing the case-shift key. Analogous choice of other characters that
appear on the various character keys is also possible with the case-shift
key. In some typewriters case-shift is effected by moving into
one of two positions (or in other typewriters one of three positions)
any of (a) a type-bar-segment*, or (b) a platen, or (c)
a type-head* that carries at least two fixedly related
type-face elements; in all of these the movement occurs in a plane
substantially parallel to the plane occupied by the type-face at
the print-point. In some typewriters a type-head is on a type-head-carrier* and
includes a type-set-assemblage* thereon, and in such typewriters
case-shift is effected by moving the type-head so that the chosen
type-face (i.e., upper-case or lower-case) will be impacted against
the record-medium. In some typewriters, case-shift may also be
used to imprint a character in a different font* or a character
in a different language for specialized uses.
CHARACTER
A single symbol imprinted on a record-medium* by
a type-member* and intended to be read by the human eye,
or intended to be "read" by a mechanical or electrical
scanner, for the purpose of conveying intelligence to the reader
(i.e., human reader or mechanical "reader"). It
forms one of the elements needed to form a word*. In most
typewriters a character is formed by impressing a single type-member
against a record-medium, usually via an inking means. However,
a single character may also be formed by impressing a plurality
of different type-members either simultaneously or successively
in the same zone or area of the record-medium. A character may
be (a) one of the letters in an alphabet, either upper-case* (i.e., "CAPITAL" letter),
or lower-case* (i.e., "small" letter),
or (b) one of the numeral digits (i.e., "0" through "9"),
or (c) a punctuation mark [e.g., comma (,), colon (:),
etc.], or (d) one of a variety of signs and symbols incorporated
into a typewriter intended for general usage [e.g., dollar
sign ($), ampersand symbol (&), etc.].
The number or variety of characters that a particular typewriter
may imprint is limited only by the size of the typewriter and the
area allotted to the key-board* and the type-members of
that typewriter.
CHARACTER-SPACE
Character-space is the distance that the carriage* or
the record-medium* is moved to effect the separation of
one imprinted character* from a subsequently imprinted character
of the same word*. In most alphabets the width of one
character (i.e., the distance that it extends along the print-line*)
differs from the width of another character. In many typewriters
the character-space distances are in equal increments of carriage
feed. Due to the fact that successively imprinted characters have
different widths, the spaces between the successive characters are
unequal. To compensate for different widths, some typewriters are
provided with mechanism to vary the carriage feed. This mechanism
causes the carriage feed to be proportional to the width of the
character imprinted by a type-face*. The unequal increments
of carriage feed produced by this mechanism results in equal spaces
between successively imprinted characters, thereby improving the
uniformity and appearance of the typing.
COLLATING-TABLE
A platform or support used while a plurality of sheets
or webs are arranged or assembled according to an orderly system.
The sheets or webs may include record-medium* pieces or
transfer-medium* pieces in any desired order or sequence
and the assemblage of pieces comprises that which is to be typed
on. The term "collating" as used in this class
(400) is used to describe a simple structure that is used for collating,
usually manually. It differs somewhat from the term collating as applied
to a machine that accomplishes a similar result of arranging or
assembling plural sheets or webs.
CONDENSED-BILLING
A term used in the typewriter industry for the production
of a condensed or summary record of a succession of typed documents
(e.g., bills or numerical data). The operation includes the typing
of plural copies (e.g., an "original copy" and
one or more "carbon copies", or duplicate "original
copies") simultaneously on plural record-medium* pieces.
At least one of the pieces is intended to be complete as to heading,
address, and other information that is to be sent to one user.
At least another piece is to be retained by the typist, and is not required
to be complete; that is, it may omit much of the information, but
may be a composite or summary or condensed record of the information
that is to be sent. The record-medium on which the condensed-billing
is typed is therefore moved in line-space* distances that differ
from the line-space distances of the complete record medium.
DENOMINATIONAL-STOP
A component of the carriage* mechanism that
causes stopping of the carriage in any of selected denominational
column positions. In a denominational column a sequence of numerical
digits is imprinted on one print-line* and further sequences
of numeral digits are imprinted in successive print-lines, one print-line
below the previous print-line. The distinguishing characteristic
of a denominational column is that the decimal point of successive
print-lines of numeral digits is in vertical array, or in the instance
where the decimal point of successive numbers is not actually imprinted,
the "units" digit of the successive numbers is
in vertical array. Thus the position where the carriage will be
stopped to imprint each of a succession of numbers will depend on whether
the first digit of a sequence of numeral digits is to be a "hundreds" digit,
or a "tens" digit, etc. A denominational-stop
is usually a "counter stop" (see the discussion
under the definition of tab-rack* in this Glossary).
FEED-ROLLER
A rotatable element having a cylindrical or cylindroidal periphery
that contacts a surface of a sheet or web of record-medium* material
or transfer-medium* material and enables or causes movement
of the sheet or web. Usually a feed-roller cooperates with a second
element and the sheet or web lies between the feed-roller and the second
element, the opposite surfaces of the sheet or web being closely
adjacent to the corresponding surfaces of the feed-roller and the
second element and in nonsliding contact therewith. When the second
element is a platen* the feed-roller serves as a "pressure
roller" to urge the sheet or web toward the platen, and
the platen is rotated to cause feed movement of the sheet or web.
When the second element is another feed-roller either or both of
the feed-rollers may be driven for rotation, the rollers being rotated
in opposite rotational directions to cause feed movement, and the
two feed-rollers cooperate to form a feed-roller couple.
FONT
A complete assortment of type in the same style and size to
imprint character* symbols having a substantially uniform
appearance. Examples of font include elite and pica (both refer
to size of type), italic (i.e., having slope to the right), and
cursive (i.e., having flowing lines connecting individual characters
in a style resembling handwriting), these being only a few of the
fonts used in various typewriters.
FUNCTION
In general, an operation performed on or by a typewriter during
use of the typewriter for typing. As used by the typewriter industry,
however, the term "function" is limited to an
operation other than (a) impressing a type-member* against
a record-medium* to imprint a character* (which
thereby concurrently effects a character-space*), or (b)
effecting a word-space*. Examples of typewriter operations
considered by the industry to be functions are: backspace, carriage
return, case-shift*, tabular stopping, line-space* (i.e.,
for record-medium feed), ribbon feed, and similar typewriter movements.
INK
A substance (usually fluid, may be viscous or solid)
that is applied to the surface of a record-medium* in the
configuration of a typed character* symbol to make the character
visible to a reader of the typed text. An important property of
ink is its ability to form a "permanent" symbol,
that is, a symbol that is not easily erased (or erased only with
great difficulty), and it is this property that aids the production
of an original copy of the typed text. (See the definition of transfer-medium* in
this Glossary, section III, for a discussion of the difference between
original copy and carbon copy.) A fluid ink may be applied directly
to a type-face*, from which type-face the ink is directly
imprinted onto a record-medium. A viscous ink may be applied to
the record-medium via an ink-impregnated ribbon*, and the
ink therein will "flow" by capillary action from
unused portions of the ribbon into the used portions of the ribbon.
A solid ink may be applied via a so-called "carbon-ink" ribbon,
which is often a single-use or one-use ribbon because all or most
of the coating of the ribbon is imprinted onto the record-medium
when a type-face is impacted thereagainst. A "hecto-graphic" ink
is a particular form of ink that is soluble and is used to form
a "master" plate used in a "spirit duplicating" copying process.
KEY
An element on a typewriter, located on a key-board*, which
element is pressed to cause either (a) the actuation of a type-member* to
imprint a character* that corresponds to the selected key,
or (b) the actuation of a selected function* of the typewriter.
In a manual typewriter a key is usually pressed by a finger of
a user, and the movement of the selected key is transmitted via
a system of levers and links into movement of a corresponding type-member
actuator or function actuator. In some typewriters and external
power source assists the actuation. In other typewriters keys are
pressed successively in response to signals to the typewriter by
a human or mechanical operator. The key referred to in (a) above
(i.e., a character key) also causes a character-space* movement
of the carriage* as well as actuation of the type-member.
KEY-BOARD
That portion of a typewriter which is located so as to face
and be adjacent to the user of a typewriter, and containing the
key* elements that are to be pressed in succession to produce
a text that is being typed, or pressed as needed to actuate a particular
function* of the typewriter.
LINE-SPACE
The distance caused by relative movement between a record-medium* and
a print-point* of a type-member* against the record-medium,
which movement effects separation of one print-line* of
typed text from a subsequently imprinted line of typed text on the
same page* of text. It is effected by incremental relative
movement that occurs in a direction perpendicular to the direction in
which a print-line is formed. In most typewriters the type- member
is impressed in substantially the same area of the typewriter and
the record-medium is effectively held to a platen* which
moves incrementally between successive print-lines, but in some
typewriters the type-member and its actuating mechanism moves in a
corresponding direction in incremental movements between successive
print-lines. Thus, in most typewriters, line-space movement is a
specific form of record-medium movement, but line-space movement
is a determinate, incremental movement in selected units of distance
or in multiples or fractions thereof. If a unit of distance is
considered as one line-space, the multiples would include two or
three line-spaces and the fractions would include one-half, one
and one-half, or two and one-half line-spaces, all these distances
being selected by the user of a typewriter according to the needs
of the user. The most significant aspect of line-space movement
is that it is related to a preceding or succeeding print-line on
the record-medium as distinguished from record-medium movement which
is not related to a print-line, but rather is an indeterminate movement.
LOWER-CASE
A "small" letter, similar in appearance
to this text, as opposed to upper-case*. The names lower-case
and upper-case are derived from the printing art during the period
when type-faces* were handpicked and handset, the type
being picked from a tray in which the capital or upper-case type
were held in compartments physically located above the compartments
for the small or lower-case type.
MAGNETIC
A property of nature resulting in attraction or orientation of
a ferrous material relative to a body having such a property. Examples
of such a body include the earth, a loadstone, and a coil of wire
in an electrical circuit, all of which have, or can generate, a
magnetic field. Magnetism is used to produce a force, as in a magnetic
solenoid, or to transmit a force, as in a magnetic clutch. Magnetic
also describes a property inherent in an auxiliary-record-program* containing
ferrous particles capable of being oriented or reoriented relative
to the auxiliary record, the orientation of the particles being sensed
to effect a typing operation in response to the sensing.
MARGIN
The distance from an edge of the record-medium* to
the closest character* symbol of a print-line* to
that edge. The term is most usually used when a plurality of print-lines
are typed and the first imprinted characters of each of the print-lines
are all equally spaced from the edge. When typing any language
that is read from left to right, the left margin is the distance
from the left edge to these first characters and will usually be
parallel to that edge, whereas the right margin is the distance
of the right edge to the last characters of the successive print-lines.
However, because the number of characters in a print-line is subject
to chance, the right margin will usually not be equally spaced from
the right edge unless "justification" is performed.
For a discussion of justification, see (1) Note to the definition
of subclass 1 below.
MARGIN-STOP
A member that is used to stop the movement of a carriage* when
the carriage reaches the margin* of the record-medium*.
The margin-stop of a platen* carriage (see the definition
of carriage in this Glossary) is usually mounted on the platen carriage
for movement therewith and cooperates with a stop fixed to the frame
of the typewriter, whereas the margin-stop of a "typehead-carriage" (see
the definition of carriage in this Glossary) is usually mounted
on the frame of the typewriter and cooperates with a stop mounted
on the type-head carriage for movement therewith, but in either
typewriter one margin-stop may be set for various margin distances for
the left margin and another margin-stop may be set for various margin
distances for the right margin.
PAGE
A unit of printed text corresponding to that which would appear
on one leaf or sheet of a book, newspaper, or document. It usually
refers to a sheet of text, but in the instance where text is imprinted
on a web (i.e., of indeterminate-length material), it refers to
that length of web which will subsequently be cut to form a sheet
of determinate length.
PAPER-FINGER
A member that is in substantial contact with a platen* or with
a record-medium* that is supported or backed by the platen,
which member thereby ensures contact of a record-medium with the
platen. It is usually an elongated element, and in those typewriters
wherein the platen is cylindrical the paper-finger is arcuate and
conforms to the periphery of the platen for a substantial length
of the paper-finger in order to hold the record-medium to the platen.
PAWL
A moveable member having a protruding portion that engages
a notch between two adjacent teeth of a ratchet* to cause
or enable intermittent movement of the ratchet. The movement of
a pawl is usually two-way, that is, oscillation or reciprocation,
and the protruding portion of the pawl engages a notch between two
adjacent teeth of the ratchet and moves relative to the ratchet over
or around one of the teeth to engage a notch between the next two
adjacent teeth. In one form of pawl and ratchet mechanism, the
pawl is driven while engaged in a notch between the teeth to thereby
drive the ratchet, and then is retracted to reengage a notch between
the next teeth. In another form of pawl and ratchet mechanism,
the ratchet is urged to be moved, but its movement is restrained
by the pawl; movement of the pawl momentarily releases the ratchet
for movement of the ratchet, and return of the pawl to a notch between the
next teeth again restrains the ratchet. In either mechanism a plurality
of pawls, or a pawl with a plurality of protruding portions may
be used alternately.
PITCH
The term "pitch" in the typewriter
art derives from its usage in mechanics or machinery, where it refers
to the distance between two things in series, e.g., two adjacent threads
of a screw or two adjacent teeth of a toothed wheel or rack, etc.
As used in the typewriter art, "pitch" refers
to a line-space* distance or to a character-space* distance,
as such distances are caused by mechanical elements in the typewriter.
Some typewriters are capable of imprinting different character* sizes
due to easily replaceable type-head* elements. In order
to maintain a proper or pleasing appearance to the type text, it
is necessary, when such a change in character size is made, also
to change the character-space and line-space distances in proper
proportion to that of the character size. Such a typewriter is
therefore also capable of having the pitch changed when character
size is changed.
PLATEN
An element that serves as a support or backing for a record-medium* while
a type-member* is impressed against the record-medium and
thereby prevents movement of the record-medium during impression;
or an element that serves as a support or backing for a record-medium
and also moves the record-medium toward the type-member for impression
of the type-member against the record-medium. Although from the
derivation of the word "platen" it should comprise
a flat or planar plate, in the typewriter art it is not so limited.
In most typewriters the platen is a cylinder having a generally smooth
surface, and the record-medium is partially wrapped around the periphery
of the cylinder. In use the cylinder is rotated until the location
of the record-medium corresponds to the desired location of the
print-line* to be imprinted thereon, and after the desired
line has been imprinted, the cylinder is rotated an increment corresponding
to a desired line-space*, thereby moving the record-medium.
Some typewriters do include a flat platen, which may be a plate
having dimensions corresponding to the record-medium (i.e., sheet),
or may be a bar platen having dimensions corresponding to the height
of a character* and the length of a print-line, or may
be an anvil having dimensions corresponding to the height and width
of a single character.
PRINT-LINE
A single row of imprinted, spaced character* symbols and
word* groups that is part of the text being typed. It is
usually a straight row, but particular characters of the line may
be offset therefrom, as, for example, to imprint subscript (i.e.,
slightly below the line) or superscript (i.e., slightly above the
line), or to imprint a mathematical or chemical formula without
negating its characteristics as a line. It is usually formed and
read across a page, either from left to right as in European languages, or
from right to left, as in Semitic languages, but may also be formed
and read parallel to one of the side margins* of a page* (i.e., "up" or "down"),
as in some Oriental languages.
PRINT-POINT
Print-point is the typewriter industry term for the area
or spot on the record-medium* that a type-member* is impressed
against to imprint a character* on the record-medium. The
print-point may be fixed or movable relative to a typewriter main
frame as discussed in the definition of carriage* in this
Glossary.
PROGRAMMED-CONTROL-SYSTEM
Means for regulating the operation of a typewriter to perform
a predetermined sequence of operations for typing, which means include
a set of instructions which may be replaced or modified at will,
to which instructions the typewriter mechanism responds by performing the
sequence of operations. The instructions may be in the form of
a tangible article such as a tape or card or disc with visible or
invisible indicia thereon, or may be in the form of an intangible "computer
program" including a "memory" and related
circuitry, but in any event, must be related to the operation of
a typewriter to be considered for this class.
RATCHET
A movable member having teeth thereon and at least one
notch between the teeth, which notch is engaged by a protruding
portion of a pawl* to cause or enable intermittent movement
of the ratchet. The manner in which a pawl and ratchet mechanism
is used in a typewriter is discussed under the definition of pawl
in this Glossary, section III. Ratchet teeth may be part of a "ratchet wheel" or
of a "ratchet rack", and the action of the pawl is
similar in both instances. However, since a ratchet wheel is circular,
its motion will be a one-way rotational intermittent motion; and
since a ratchet rack is linear, its motion will be a one-way rectilinear
intermittent motion.
RECORD-MEDIUM
A piece of material, usually paper but not limited to paper,
on which material is recorded an imprint of a type-member* that
is impressed against the material to form a character* to
be read. The material may be a relatively thin "sheet" having
a determinate width and a determinate length, or may be a "web" having
a determinate width and an indeterminate length. The recording
is usually by way of an ink* that coats the material in
the form of a line representing a character; but other kinds of
recording may be done, as, for example, embossing, which deforms
the surface of the material to raise or lower the surface into a
line representing the character, or perforating, which punches a
plurality of holes in the material that taken together form a representation
of a character.
RIBBON
A piece of elongated and relatively thin transfer-medium* material
impregnated with, or carrying, ink* that is to be applied
to a record-medium*, which material is interposed between
the record-medium and a type-face* that is at the print-point*.
When the type-face is impressed against the record-medium (with
the ribbon therebetween) a portion of the ink on the ribbon will
be transferred to the record-medium to form a readable character* symbol
corresponding to the symbol on the type-face that was impressed
against the record-medium. Although in most typewriters the ribbon
is an elongated relatively narrow strip of material, these dimensions
are not critical in its usage as a ribbon. (For example, a ribbon
may be narrow and sufficiently short to be held in the hand of a
typist while being temporarily positioned adjacent to the print-point,
or a ribbon may be elongated and as wide as the record-medium to
be typed on.) What is critical in its usage as a ribbon for making
an original copy is (a) its location directly between the record-medium
and the type-face that is at the print-point, and (b) the use of
a "permanent" or not easily erasable ink; the
combination forms an original copy of the typed text, in contrast
to a carbon copy. (See the definitions of transfer-medium and ink
in this Glossary for a discussion of carbon copy). Among the various
forms of ribbon used in a typewriter are: (a) a fabric ribbon coated
or impregnated with "permanent" ink, the ribbon
being reusable many times or until the ink therein is depleted,
and producing an original copy; (b) a carbon-ink ribbon coated with
permanent ink, the ribbon being usually a single-use ribbon due
to the operation wherein all or most of the coating is deposited
on the record-medium during the impact of a type-face thereagainst,
and producing an original copy (see the definition of transfer-medium
in this Glossary, for a discussion of the difference between the
permanent ink used in a carbon-ink ribbon, and the carbon coating
of a "carbon-paper" transfer-medium); (c) a "hectographic" ribbon
that uses a soluble ink and produces a "master" plate
subsequently used in a spirit duplicating copy process; (d) a carbon-paper
ribbon coated with a substance containing carbon or other pigment
to produce a carbon copy that is easily erasable; (e) a "correction" ribbon that
is used to correct an error in typing as discussed in the definition
of subclass 697 below. It should be noted that in early typewriter
technology the term "ribbon" usually referred
only to a fabric ribbon mentioned above; therefore, unless a disclosure
particularly describes a ribbon by an intended function or specific coating,
it should be assumed that a fabric ribbon is disclosed.
SPACE-BAR
An element on a typewriter, located on a keyboard*, which
element is pressed to cause a carriage-feed movement of the carriage* without
an imprint of a character*, thereby to separate one word* from
another word on a print-line*.
TAB
A tab is an abbreviated form of the term "tabular", which
term refers to a columnar arrangement of character* symbols
on a page* of text. A "column" of text
is formed by imprinting a particular symbol on one print-line* and
subsequently imprinting the same or another particular symbol on
another print-line directly below the first print-line (i.e., equally
spaced from one of the side edges of the record-medium*),
and repeating the typing until a plurality of print-lines have been
formed, all of which are in vertical array. The particular symbol may
be the first letter of the first word* in each of the successively
imprinted print-lines, and two or more columns are usually arranged
in such a "column-set" arrangement, each of the
columns being arrayed at a preset distance from an edge of the record-medium.
The particular symbol may be the decimal point or the "units" digit
of a set of numeral digits representing a number; this arrangement
is termed "denominational". The terms "column" and "tabular" are
also discussed in (1) Note and (2) Note to subclass 284, the term "denominational" is
also discussed in (1) Note to subclass 285, and the term column
set is discussed in (3) Note to subclass 284 and defined in subclass
285.1. It should also be noted that, in some disclosures, the term "tab" has been
used as an abbreviation of an element which is better known as a "tab-stop" element
and is discussed in this Glossary under tab-rack*.
TAB-RACK
A component of the carriage* mechanism that
causes stopping of the carriage in any of selected tabular (see tab* in
this Glossary) positions. A tab-rack is an elongated member extending
parallel to the direction of carriage movement and having a length
substantially the same as the extent of carriage movement. On the
tab-rack a plurality of "tab-stop" elements are
mounted, each of said elements being movable transversely of the length
of the tab-rack form a "clear" position at which the
element is passive to a "set" position at which
the element is able to cooperate with a "counter-stop" element.
In operation, relative movement between the tab-rack and the counter
stop is effected in the lengthwise direction of the tab-rack until
a set tab stop abuts against the counter stop. Usually the tab-rack
is connected to the carriage and its tab stop abuts a stationary
counter stop, thereby stopping the carriage. The same result may
be achieved by mounting the counter stop on the carriage and abutting
the counter stop against a set tab stop on a stationary tab-rack,
thereby stopping the carriage. A plurality of counter stops may
be provided, one of which counter stops may be set to stop the carriage
in a preset column or denominational position. A typewriter capable
of tabular operation is provided with at least three key* elements
for regulating the operation. One of the keys, labelled "set" (or
a variant thereof) is depressed by the typist to move a selected
tab-stop element from its passive position to its set position on
the tab-rack. Another key, labelled "tab" (or
a variant thereof), or unlabeled but having a distinctive shape,
is depressed by the typist to concurrently (a) release the carriage
from its normal carriage-feed mechanism to enable unrestrained movement
of the carriage, and (b) set a counter stop into a position where
it will abut against the set tab stop when the counter stop and
tab stop engage one another, whereby the movement of the carriage
will be stopped in the tabular position. A third key, labelled "clear" (or
a variant thereof), is depressed by the typist to move any of the
previously set tab stops back to its passive position on the type-rack.
TOGGLE-LINKAGE
An assemblage of at least two links, pitmans, bars, or struts
and at least three pivots, an end of one link being connected to
an end of the other link by a pivot that is common to both links.
Each of the links also has a pivot at the end remote from the common
pivot, which common or intermediate pivot is movable from a first
(or "broken") position at which the common pivot
is not in line with the other two pivots to a second (or "straightened")
position at which the common pivot is substantially in line with
the other two pivots, or which common pivot is movable from said
second position to said first position. Such movement is accomplished
by a force applied to the common pivot in a direction approximately
at right angles to either link, thereby moving the remote pivots
relatively away from each other (i.e., when the common pivot moves
to the second position) or relatively toward each other (i.e., when
the common pivot moves to the first position).
TRANSFER-MEDIUM
A piece of material, relatively thin as compared to its other
dimensions, and flexible so as to conform to various configurations
as required in a typewriter, which material is impregnated or coated
on one or both of its opposite surfaces with a preparation of ink* or
gelatin or other substance-containing carbon or other pigment that is
capable of being transplaced from a surface of said material onto
a surface of an adjacent record-medium*. Among the various
forms of transfer-medium used in a typewriter are: (a) a "permanent" ink
transfer-medium in the form of an elongated, narrow ribbon*,
a wide ribbon, a disc, etc., all of which have the property that
the character* symbol imprinted with the use of this transfer-medium
is not easily erased, thereby producing an "original copy" text;
(b) a "carbon-paper" transfer-medium, so called
because one of its surfaces is coated with a substance containing
carbon or other pigment having the property that the character imprinted
with this transfer-medium is easily erased, thereby producing a "carbon
copy" text; (c) a "hectos:graphic" ink
transfer-medium, using an ink that is soluble in a particular solvent
and is used to form a "master" plate that is subsequently
used in a "spirit duplicating" copying process, and
(d) a "correction" transfer-medium that is coated with
a substance containing a pigment of the same color as that of the
record-medium, and is used to correct an error in typing (as discussed
in the definition of subclass 697 below).
TYPE-BAR
An elongated member having at one end a type-member* (i.e.,
a type-die* or a type-face*) element and at its other
end a connection to one or more key* elements. In most
manual type-writers, the number of type-bars corresponds to the
number of keys provided, and the type-bars are pivoted to a type-bar-segment* so
that the various type-faces are all impressed at approximately the same
print-point*, but many variations of the construction are
to be found. The type-bars may be pivoted to individual linkages,
or may be slidable to print position. In some typewriters a single
key may actuate a plurality of type-bars; in others, a plurality
of keys may be depressed simultaneously to actuate a single type-bar; and
in others (e.g., stenographic typewriters), there may be a plurality
of character* symbols simultaneously imprinted.
TYPE-BAR-SEGMENT
A type-bar-segment is an arcuate member that serves to support
all the type-bar* members for pivotal motion so that each
of the type-member* elements carried by the type-bar members
will be impressed onto the record-medium* at approximately
the same print-point*. In some manual typewriters the
type-bar-segment is moved to effect case-shift*. (This
occurs because the type-member (i.e., type-face* or type-die*)
that is at the print-point has been moved as a result of moving
the type-bar-segment, so that an upper-case* or a lower-case* form
of character* symbol is imprinted on the record-medium
according to the choice of the typist.) The difference between
a type-bar-segment and a type-face-carrier* (which also
permits a type-bar to move relative thereto) is that a type-face-carrier
moves both for selection of a character and for choice of upper-case
of lower-case, whereas a type-bar-segment moves only for choice
of upper-case or lower-case.
TYPE-DIE
An element that is impressed against a record-medium* to
deform or pierce the surface of the record-medium into a representation
of a character*. It is that portion of a type-member* that
projects from the body of the type-member and contacts the surface
of the record-medium to raise or lower the contacted surface relative
to the uncontracted surface into a line representing a character, or
to form one or more perforations in the contacted surface, which
perforations taken together represent a character.
TYPE-FACE
An element that is impressed against a record-medium* to
imprint a line representing a character*. It is that portion
of a type-member* that projects from the body of the type-member,
and contacts the surface of the record-medium to form the character
by ink* applied to the type-face and transferred to the
record-medium, or by ink applied via an ink ribbon* or
similar transfer material that lies between the type-face and the
surface of the record-medium.
TYPE-FACE-CARRIER
A type-face-carrier is a mechanism on which is mounted a
plurality of type-member* elements (i.e., type-face* or type-die*)
for movement of any one type-member relative to the remainder of
the type-members mounted thereon. Usually a group of type-faces
comprising a type-set-assemblage* is mounted on a type-face-carrier, face-carrier,
and the type-face-carrier is capable of various kinds of movement.
A typist will select one key* element from among the many
key elements available, causing the type-face-carrier to move to
a position at which the selected type-face will impact against a record-medium* to
imprint the selected character* symbol (e.g., a particular
letter, or a particular number, etc.) on the record-medium. A typist
may choose to effect case-shift* or not effect case-shift,
thereby to choose from the character symbols available on one key
element the one symbol (e.g., the upper-case* or the lower-case* form
of the same letter, etc.) thereby causing the type-face-carrier
to move to a position at which the chosen type-face will imprint
the chosen symbol. The mechanism also causes or enables relative
movement between the type-face and the record-medium (e.g., movement
of the type-face toward the print-point*) to imprint the
selected or the chosen character or symbol on the record-medium.
(See this Glossary, section III, under the definitions of the terms
type-bar-segment* and type-head-carrier* for the
differences between those mechanisms and a type-face-carrier).
TYPE-HEAD
A type-head is an element comprising one or more type-member* elements
integral one with the other(s). In most manually powered type-writers
a type-set-assemblage* is distributed among a plurality
of type-heads, each of which as two type-face* elements.
Some of these type-heads include a type-face for imprinting a particular
letter in lower-case* and a type-face for imprinting the
same letter in upper-case*, the choice being made by a
case-shift* mechanism. Other type-heads in these manually
powered type-writers include a type-face for imprinting a number
and a type-face for imprinting a symbol (see the definition of character* in this
Glossary for examples of a symbol), the choice of which is to be
imprinted also being made by the case-shift mechanism. In some
electrically powered typewriters a single type-head includes a complete
type-set-assemblage, and said type-head is mounted on a type-head-carrier*.
In such typewriters the single type-head is moved for selection
of the type-face to be imprinted, or for the choice of the case
to be used. In the definitions of the subclasses that follow, the
term "type-head" has usually been reserved for
the element that includes a type-set-assemblage on an electrically
powered typewriter, and the element on the type end of a type-bar* has
usually been referred to as a type-face.
TYPE-HEAD-CARRIER
A type-head-carrier is a mechanism on which is mounted
at least one type-head* that includes a type-set-assemblage* (e.g.,
a group of type-face* elements) thereon for movement of
the type-head relative to the type-head-carrier. Usually a type-head-carrier
and the type-head mounted thereon are capable of various kinds of
movement. A typist will select one key* element from among
the many key elements available, causing the type-head to move (e.g.,
by oscillating and/or tilting) to a position at which the
selected type-face will impact against a record-medium* to
imprint the selected character* symbol (e.g., a particular
letter, or a particular number, etc.) on the record-medium. A typist
may choose to effect case-shift* or not effect case-shift, thereby
to choose from the character symbols available on one key element
the one symbol (e.g., the upper-case* or the lower-case* form
of the same letter, etc.) that is to be imprinted, thereby causing
the type-head to move to a position at which the chosen type-face
will imprint the chosen symbol. The mechanism also causes or enables
movement of the type-head (i.e., by movement of the type-head-carrier)
between the type-face and the record-medium (e.g., movement of the
type-face toward the print-point*) to imprint the selected
or the chosen character or symbol on the record-medium. The difference
between a type-head-carrier and a type-face-carrier* (which
also carries a type-set-assemblage that moves both for selection
of a character and for choice of upper-case or lower-case) is that
a type-face-carrier supports individually movable type-face elements,
whereas a type-head-carrier supports a type-head wherein all the type-face
elements are integral therewith.
In some typewriters that use a type-head-carrier a single type-head
includes a complete type-set-assemblage, and this type-head may
be removed from its carrier and be replaced with a different type-head
having a different font* (e.g., the style, character size,
alphabet, or symbols that the typewriter can produce). In some typewriters
that use a type-head-carrier plural type-heads may be provided,
each including a complete type-set-assemblage (e.g., in different
fonts, etc.) or each including only part of a complete type-set-assemblage
(e.g., one-half of an assemblage on one type-head and the other half
of that assemblage on the other type-head).
TYPE-MEMBER
An element having on a surface thereof a type-die* or
a type-face* which is impressed against a record-medium* to
imprint a character* in or on the surface of the record-medium.
In most typewriters there is only one type-member corresponding
to each character* that is to be typed, and the user of
the typewriter selects from the assortment of type-members provided
in the apparatus one type-member at a time to be imprinted, and
serially imprints the selected type-members to form the characters
representing the text to be typed.
TYPE-SET-ASSEMBLAGE
A group of type-face* elements including a multiplicity of
type-faces for imprinting the different character* symbols
that a typewriter is capable of imprinting in the same font* of
type. In many typewriters a type-set-assemblage is carried on a
plurality of type-bar* members that include all the type-faces
that the typewriter can imprint, either in upper-case* or
in lower-case*, or in the various character symbols. In
other typewriters a single type-head* includes all type-faces
that the typewriter can imprint in the same font, and that type-head can
be removed from the typewriter to be replaced by a type-head for
another type-set-assemblage of a different font. In still other
typewriters two or more type-heads are provided to comprise one
type-set-assemblage, or to comprise two or more type-set-assemblages
in different fonts.
TYPEWRITER-ACTUATED-CONTROL
Typewriter-actuated-control is intended to refer to a mechanism
wherein a first part of a typewriter moves to accomplish its intended
first-part function, and during said movement the first part engages
a second part to move the second part, thereby accomplishing a second function
as the second part is moved. A simple example of a typewriter-actuated-control
exists in the instance of a typewriter wherein the ribbon* vibrator
has means for opening the guide means of the vibrator for the purpose of
facilitating insertion of a new ribbon. When the vibrator is next
lifted or raised to enable the ribbon to cover the print-point* to
imprint the next character*, the upward movement of the
vibrator for typing causes engagement of elements that "automatically" causes closing
of the vibrator guide to its normal position without special intervention
of the typist to accomplish the guide-closing function.
UNIVERSAL-BAR
A member that is part of a drive train of a typewriter, which
member is driven by any of a multiplicity of elements and which
member serves to drive any of a different multiplicity of elements.
A universal-bar may be driven, for example, by a space-bar*,
or by a character* key* element that causes imprint
of a character and also drives the universal-bar either directly
or via a type-bar* member or associated linkage. The universal-bar
may then serve to drive a carriage-feed mechanism or a ribbon-feed
mechanism or a character-counter mechanism or all these exemplary
mechanisms concurrently.
UPPER-CASE
A capital letter, similar in appearance to this text,
as opposed to lower-case*. The derivation of the terms upper-case* and
lower-case is discussed in the definition of lower-case in this
Glossary. See the definitions of character* and case-shift* in
this Glossary for the forms of symbols that are imprinted when the
case-shift mechanism is in the upper-case mode.
VIBRATOR
Vibrator is the typewriter industry term for an element or
an assemblage of elements that (a) guides a ribbon* or
constrains the ribbon for movement along its elongated dimension,
and (b) is located on the typewriter adjacent to the print-point*,
and (c) moves at least a portion of the ribbon that is so guided
transversely to its elongated dimension from a first position adjacent
to but not covering the print-point to a second position covering
the print-point. The first position is a normal, or "rest" position
that permits the print-line* to be seen by a typist, and
the second position places the ribbon over the print-point so that
a type-face* will be impressed against the ribbon to imprint
a character* on a record-medium*. The vibrator
movement may be controlled so as to move different zones of the
ribbon to the print-point, each of which zones extends longitudinally
and is spaced transversely to the others, whereby different colored
characters may be imprinted.
WORD
For purposes of this class, a word is one or more imprinted
character* symbols that are grouped together and separated
from other groups of characters to convey intelligence or information
to a reader. Usually a word consists of one or more letter characters
that taken together as a group may also be spoken by people of a national
or ethnic folk, but especially for purposes of this class, a word
may consist of more number characters as well as letter characters,
the words then conveying information in a cryptos:graphic "language".
WORD-SPACE
The distance that separates the last character* of
one word* of imprinted text from the first character of
a subsequent word of the same text on the same line of text.
SUBCLASSES
![[List of Patents for class 400 subclass 1]](../ps.gif) 1 | INCLUDING JUSTIFICATION OR QUADDING OF PRINT-LINE: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein more than one print-line* of
character* symbols is imprinted on a record-medium* to
form a page* of text, and wherein significance is attributed
to the typing operation known as "justification" as that
term is discussed and defined in (1) Note below, or significance
is attributed to the typing operation known as "quadding" as
that term is discussed and defined in (2) Note below, either operation
modifying the print-lines of a page of text.
| | (1)
Note. When typing in a language that is read from left to
right, a typist can predetermine the left margin (i.e., the distance from
the left edge of the record-medium to the first character of the
print-line). The right margin (i.e., the distance from the right
edge of the record-medium to the last character of the print-line)
is subject to chance and depends on the number of character symbols
and word* groups in the print-line; therefore, the right
margin will usually not be even. "Justification" corrects
the uneven right margin by expanding or contracting the print-line
as necessary to make all the print-lines of uniform length. Justification
is usually accomplished by typing a rough draft to form a print-line
that ends within a "justification zone" and then retyping
with the addition or subtraction of "unit" spaces
to or from the character-space* or word-space* distances
on the print-line. The characters and spaces in a print-line may
be stored in a justification circuit which may include a "memory" and
circuitry to modify the memory by the addition or subtraction of
unit spaces described above to expand or contract the print-line.
Justification may also be accomplished by typing on a stretchable
record-medium as described in subclass 14 below. |
| | (2)
Note. The term "quadding" is derived from
the printing and type setting arts, where the word "quad" refers
to a piece of metal that is of less height than a type-face* and
is used to form a blank space in the printed line. By introducing
quads in sufficient numbers and appropriate positions, a printed
line could be printed as "quad right" (i.e., the
last character of successively printed lines uniformly spaced from
the right edge of a page) or printed as "quad left" (i.e.,
the first character of successively printed lines uniformly spaced
from the left edge of a page) or printed as "quad center" (i.e., the
first and the last character of the same printed line equally spaced
from the left and the right edge of the page, respectively). A similar
appearance of text and successively imprinted print-lines can be
accomplished on a typewriter by quadding to control the location
of the first or the last character (or both of said characters)
of a print-line. In addition, the quadded print-lines may also be
expanded or contracted in an operation similar to justification [described
in (1) Note above], so that the text that has been subjected
to a quadding operation will also appear to be justified. | |
| | |
| 2 | Including quadding of print-line: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter wherein more than one print-line* of
character* symbols is imprinted on a record-medium* on
a page* of text, and wherein significance is attributed
to the typing operation known as "quadding" as
that term is discussed and defined in (2) Note of subclass 1 above. |
| | |
| 3 | By programmed-control-system: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
typing operation known as "justification" as that
term is discussed and defined in (1) Note of subclass
1 above, and wherein the justification is accomplished
by way of a programmed-control-system*.
| | (1)
Note. The programmed-control-system is
not particularly described in the patents of this subclass (3), but
rather is referred to as a "register" of a "memory" that
is modified, or a variant of such terminology.
However, it is clearly described as a means for modifying
the operation of a typewriter to produce a justified print-line*. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 358, | Facsimile and Static Presentation Processing,
subclasses 1.1 through 1.18for static presentation processing (e.g., processing
data for printer, etc.). |
| 715, | Data Processing: Presentation Processing
of Document, Operator Interface Processing, and
Screen Saver Display Processing,
subclasses 243 through 253for document layout processing and subclasses 255
through 272 for document edit, composition, or
storage control processing. |
|
| | |
| 4 | On auxiliary-record-program (e.g., tape, card, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 3. Subject matter wherein the programmed-control-system* includes
a set of instructions that may be readily removed from the typewriter
so that another set of instructions may be inserted into the typewriter
to perform a different or modified sequence of justifying operations. |
| | |
| 5 | Magnetic record: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 4. Subject matter wherein an auxiliary-record-program* includes
or contains ferrous particles capable of being oriented or reoriented
relative to the auxiliary-record-program, the
orientation of the particles being sensed to effect the control
of the typewriter or the justification of a print-line* typed
thereby. |
| | |
| 6 | With error-correcting storage register: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 4. Subject matter wherein the programmed-control-system* includes
a "memory" circuit and means for amending or modifying
the program in the event that a typist has made a mistake in the
typed text or in the justification thereof so that the text may
be retyped with the mistake rectified.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 74, | for error detection and correction of a program
for selection of type-face* elements. |
|
| | |
| 7 | Including artificial or end-of-line hyphen: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 4. Subject matter wherein the auxiliary-record-program* includes
provision of determining if and where a "hyphen" will
be imprinted at the end of a print-line* and provision
for inserting the hyphen properly.
| | (1)
Note. A hyphen is a punctuation mark comprising
a short line used to indicate the end of a syllable in a word* which has
been divided so that one or more syllables of that word appear on
one print-line and the remainder of the syllables of that
word appear on a succeeding print-line. | |
| | |
| 8 | By using "no-print" device: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
typing operation known as "justification" as that
term is discussed and defined in (1) Note to subclass
1 above, and wherein the justification is accomplished
with the use of a means for not printing or suppressing the imprinting
of one or more character* symbols of a print-line*. |
| | |
| 9 | By interword or intercharacter spacing: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
typing operation known as "justification" as that
term is discussed and defined in (1) Note of subclass
1 above, and wherein the justification is accomplished
by adding to or subtracting from the character-space* or
the word-space* distances in a print-line*. |
| | |
| 10 | Variable carriage-feed mechanism: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 9. Subject matter wherein the character-space* or the
word-space* distances are varied for justification
by moving the carriage* in irregular or unequal increments
of movement.
| | (1)
Note. The variable carriage-feed mechanism
that may be used for the typewriter of this subclass is of the kind
that, per se, is found in subclass 303. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 303, | and see (1) Note above. |
|
| | |
| 11 | Carriage slidable relative to its carriage-rack: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 9. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with a
carriage* that is attached to a tab-rack* that
enables the carriage to be moved in a character-space direction
and wherein the character-space or the word-space* distances
are varied for justification by moving the carriage along the tab-rack
in varying or irregular increments required for justification.
| | (1)
Note. A fuller explanation of the relationship between
the various elements of a carriage-feed mechanism will
be found in the definitions of tab-rack and the various
definitions of subclasses indented under 283. | |
| | |
| 12 | By interword spacing only: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 9. Subject matter wherein the justification is accomplished
by adding to or subtracting from the word-space* distances
in a print-line*. |
| | |
| 13 | Including plural space-bars for different spacings: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 12. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with two
or more space-bar* elements on the key-board* of
the typewriter, each of which space-bar* elements
will effect a word-space* distance different than
the other(s), and wherein justification
is accomplished by using one or another of the space-bars
during the imprinting of the print-line* according
to what distances are needed to justify the print-line. |
| | |
| 14 | By typing line on stretchable medium: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
typing operation known as "justification" as that
term is discussed and defined in (1) Note to subclass
1 above, and wherein the justification is accomplished
by typing print-line* of character* symbols
on a material that is capable of being elongated.
| | (1)
Note. In this subclass justification is accomplished
by typing a print-line on a stretchable ribbon* to
an extent less than that of the desired print-line, and
subsequently adhering either the ribbon or the characters* that
have been imprinted on the ribbon to the record-medium*. | |
| | |
| 15 | Including justification indicator: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
typing operation known as "justification" as that
term is discussed and defined in (1) Note to subclass
1 above, and wherein the typewriter is provided with means
for helping the typist to know the need for justification or the
number of character-space* distances required
for justification.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 703, | for other indicator means. |
|
| | |
| 16 | FOR TYPING OR FORMING CONTINUOUS OR DISCONTINUOUS LINE (E.G., BY "LINER"): |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter
capable of producing a mark on a record-medium*, which
mark is long in proportion to its breadth.
| | (1)
Note. The mark may be formed by a penlike instrument
that applies ink* to the record-medium in a continuous stroke
or movement of the instrument relative to the record-medium (e.g., by moving
the record-medium with respect to a stationary pen), or
may be formed by impacting the record-medium with a succession
of short marks (e.g., each produced
by a dash) that overlap to form a continuous line, or
the marks may be separated, but taken as a whole form a dotted
line or a dashed line. | |
| | |
| 17 | Including programmed-control-system: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 16. Subject matter wherein a programmed-control-system* is
used for giving instructions to which the typewriter responds by
forming said mark (e.g., a line) in
the record-medium*. |
| | |
| 18 | By scriber (e.g., pen, pencil, etc.) or
with scriber guide: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 16. Subject matter wherein said mark is formed or produced by
contacting the record-medium* with an instrumentality
that is provided with ink*, pigment, or
coating material that is visible to the eye, and by moving
the record-medium, or the instrumentality while
the record-medium is coated on the record-medium, or
wherein said mark is formed or produced by such an instrumentality
with the help of a device, which device is used by an operator
to direct the course or path of the instrumentality while in contact
with the record-medium.
| | (1)
Note. In this and the indented subclasses, the
scriber is disclosed as an addition to a usual or standard typewriter. | |
| | |
| 19 | For writing in script: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 18. Subject matter wherein the instrumentality is moved relative
to the record-medium* in a path that forms cursive
letters (i.e., joined together in
flowing strokes as formed in handwriting). |
| | |
| 20 | Rotatable disc scriber: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 18. Subject matter wherein the instrumentality is a plate turned
on an axis and having a thin peripheral edge that is coated with
ink* that is transferred to the record-medium* as
the plate is turned while the edge is in contact with the record-medium
and while relative movement between the plate axis and the record-medium occurs. |
| | |
| 21 | Responsive to carriage movement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 16. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with a
carriage* that carries a platen* that supports
the record-medium*, which carriage is
movable in a direction parallel to a print-line*, and
wherein said mark is formed as a result of the carriage being moved
while a marking instrument or device is brought into contact with
the record-medium.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 299, | for a similar structure that imprints a succession
of the same character* symbol. |
|
| | |
| 22 | Underscoring concurrently with character imprinting: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 16. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with type-face* elements
that are selectively impressed against the record-medium* to
imprint character* symbols on the record-medium, and
wherein a mark is imprinted at the same time that a character is
imprinted, the mark being a short line that is imprinted
underneath any of the selected characters. |
| | |
| 23 | FOR TYPING ON FLAT RECORD-MEDIUM OR AGAINST FLAT
PLATEN: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein the significance is attributed to
a typewriter in which the record-medium* that
is being typed on is planar or in which the record-medium
is backed by a platen* that is planar.
| | (1)
Note. In the definition of the term platen in the
Glossary, section III, there is a discussion of
some of the various forms of platen. Included therein
is a discussion of the difference between a flat or planar platen
and a cylindrical platen. This and indented subclasses
are the loci of disclosures wherein a typewriter is provided with
a significant flat or planar platen. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 648, | for a cylindrical platen in a typewriter. |
|
| | |
| 24 | For typing on a book: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 23. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter
particularly intended for typing on a book.
| | (1)
Note. A "book" is an assemblage
of pages* or sheets that have been fastened or bound together.
One of the characteristics of a book that is significant in this subclass
or the subclasses indented hereunder is that pages are turned to
be inverted for recording of information thereon. As a
consequence of such use, the number of pages on one side
of the binding will increase as the number of pages on the other
side of the binding decreases, resulting in unequal thicknesses
of material on each side of the binding. | |
| | |
| 25 | Including a type-head (e.g., cylinder,
disc, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 24. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with a
type-head* element that carries type-face* elements
thereon.
| | (1)
Note. A type-head is distinguished from a
type-face* in that a type-head carries
in one member a complete (or substantially complete) type-set-assemblage* that includes
many type-faces. | |
| | |
| 26 | Against cylindrical backing: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 24. Subject matter wherein the book that is being typed on is
supported against movement away from the type-face* that
is impressed against the book, the support being an elongated
member that is circular in cross section.
| | (1)
Note. The back or supporting is similar in configuration
to a cylindrical platen*, but the book is not
partially wrapped about the platen as in the usual typewriter where
the record-medium* encompasses the platen through
approximately 180°. In this typewriter, the
book is approximately tangent to the surface of the cylindrical
backing. | |
| | |
| 29 | For typing on flat blueprint or drawing (e.g., "platenless" typewriter): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 23. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter
in which the record-medium* that is being typed
on has length and width dimensions that are substantially greater than
the corresponding dimensions of the typewriter, and wherein
the typewriter is moved in directions parallel to said dimensions
to properly locate the typewriter relative to the record-medium.
| | (1)
Note. The term platenless has been ascribed to such
a typewriter because it does not have a platen* ( in
the usual sense of the word) connected thereto. Instead, the
drawing board or other large, flat surface that ordinarily
supports a blueprint or drawing also supports the typewriter, and
serves as the platen for this form of typewriter. | |
| | |
| 30 | For typing on carton or package: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 23. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter
in which the record-medium* that is being typed
on is a three-dimensional object that has flat surfaces
defining its sides, and wherein either the typewriter or
the object may be moved to enable the typewriter to type on one
of the surfaces. |
| | |
| 31 | By multidirectional movement of typewriter structure (e.g., "Elliot-Fisher" structure): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 23. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter
that is mounted relative to a flat platen* so that the
typewriter, its key-board*, type-bar* members, and
all its operating mechanisms move as a unit in the widthwise and
lengthwise dimensions of the platen.
| | (1)
Note. The term Elliot-Fisher derives from
the names of the persons to whom the invention and development of
this form of typewriter is ascribed. |
| | (2)
Note. This subclass also includes structure for
levelling the carriage* frame relative to the flat platen. | |
| | |
| 32 | Bottom-strike typewriter including type-bar action
or bar platen or anvil platen: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 23. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter
in which type-face* elements impact against a
flat platen* from underneath the platen, to structure
that moves a type-bar* carrying a type-face
element from its rest position to its impact position, or
to a bar platen (e.g., a platen
having dimensions corresponding to the height of a character* and
the length of a print-line*), or
to an anvil platen (i.e., a
platen having dimensions corresponding to the height and width of
one character).
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 408, | for a bottom-strike typewriter and its type-bar
action mechanism. |
|
| | |
| 33 | Top-strike typewriter including pivoted type-bar: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 23. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter
in which type-face* elements impact against a
flat platen* from above the platen, and wherein
significance is also attributed to structure that moves a type-bar* carrying
a type-face from its rest position to its impact position, the
movement being arcuate.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 415, | for a top-strike typewriter and its type-bar-action
mechanism. |
|
| | |
| 34 | Including carriage-return mechanism: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 23. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter
in which type-face* elements impact against a
flat platen*, and wherein significance is also
attributed to movement of the carriage* of the typewriter
in a direction opposite to the character-space* direction.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 313, | for carriage-return mechanism. |
|
| | |
| 35 | Including case-shift by shifting platen: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 23. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter
in which type-face* elements impact against a
flat platen*, and wherein significance is also
attributed to movement of the platen to accomplish case-shift* from
a lower-case* form of a letter to an upper-case* form
of that letter.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 251, | for case-shift mechanism. |
|
| | |
| 36 | Including ribbon-feed mechanism: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 23. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter
in which type-face* elements impact against a
flat platen* at a print-point*, and
wherein significance is also attributed to mechanism for feeding
a ribbon* relative to the print-point.
| | (1)
Note. Mechanism for feeding a ribbon is found in
subclass 223, which subclasses should be searched for ribbon
feed, per se. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 223, | and see (1) Note above. |
|
| | |
| 37 | For typing on manifold set (e.g., with
type-die, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 23. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter
in which type-face* elements or type-die* elements
impact against a record-medium* that is backed
by a flat platen*, and wherein significance is
also attributed to the use of manifold set that includes carbon
paper so that the typewriter produces an original copy and at least
one carbon copy.
| | (1)
Note. The terms "carbon paper" and "manifold
set" are discussed in (1) Note and (2) Note, respectively, of
subclass 497. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 497, | for a cylindrical-platen typewriter for typing
on a manifold set and see (1) Note above. |
|
| | |
| 38 | Including feeding of wide carbon paper transverse to feed
of record-medium: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 37. Subject matter wherein the record-medium* of a
typewriter is fed in a first direction coinciding with the line-space* direction, and
wherein said carbon paper is moved (i.e., fed) in
a second direction substantially perpendicular to the first direction
and the carbon paper has a width dimension that is relatively large
and approximately equal to the length of a page* of record-medium.
| | (1)
Note. In some typewriters of this subclass the carbon
paper is wound on either a supply roll or a take-up roll
or both. | |
| | |
| 40 | Including clamp or guide for carbon paper: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 37. Subject matter wherein the flat platen* or another
portion of the typewriter is provided with means to firmly hold
said carbon paper to the platen, or to lead or direct the
carbon paper relative to the platen. |
| | |
| 42 | Including aligning and feeding manifold set: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 37. Subject matter wherein said manifold set includes a plurality
of pieces of web record-medium* interleaved with
a plurality of pieces of web carbon paper, all the pieces
being in surface-to-surface relationship and the
pieces are positioned so that their corresponding side edges are
located adjacent one another or so that a particular indicium that
occurs along the length dimension of one piece is located adjacent
to a corresponding indicium that occurs along the length dimension
of another web, and wherein the manifold set is moved along
the flat platen* in a line-space* direction.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 606, | for aligning and feeding of plural webs in a standard
typewriter. |
|
| | |
| 43 | Including feed of tally strip: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 23. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
feeding of a tally strip in a flat-platen* typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. The term "tally strip" is
discussed in the definition of subclass 586, see the (1) Note
thereof. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 586, | for a cylindrical-platen typewriter for typing
on a tally strip and see (1) Note above. |
|
| | |
| 44 | Including line-spacing mechanism: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 23. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter
in which type-face* elements impact against a
record-medium* that is backed by a flat platen* at
a print-point*, and wherein significance
is also attributed to effecting relative movement between the record-medium
and the print-point in a step-by-step manner
so that successively imprinted print-lines* will
be spaced apart by line-space* distances.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 545, | for line-spacing by incremental rotation
of a cylindrical platen. |
|
| | |
| 45 | Platen shifted for line-spacing: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 44. Subject matter wherein line-space distances are effected
by moving the flat platen* along a line that is perpendicular
to the print-line*.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass also includes some typewriters
wherein the platen is shifted for line-spacing and the
platen is also shifted for character-spacing. | |
| | |
| 46 | Including adjustment of line-space distance or
increment: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 44. Subject matter wherein the extent of the space intervention
between two successive print-lines* may be varied.
| | (1)
Note. The difference between the two kinds of adjustment
herein provided for is as follows: |
| |
If a typist changes the space between one print-line
and the next print-line to be typed, by manual
intervention for the one print-line which is to be differently spaced, that
is an adjustment of line-space* distance. However, if
the typewriter is re-set to change the spaces between any
plurality of print-lines to make those spaces different
from the spaces between a previous plurality of print-lines, that
is adjustment of the line-space increment. | |
| | |
| 47 | Including disengagement of line-spacing mechanism: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 44. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with means
whereby structure for effecting the relative movement (i.e., of
subclass 44) may be disconnected temporarily.
| | (1)
Note. The disengagement is usually for the purpose
of facilitating the loading of a flat platen* with record-medium*. Also
found herein is a typewriter wherein the line-spacing* mechanism may
be locked against movement. | |
| | |
| 48 | Work support (e.g., sheet
or card holddown or guide, sheet-size platen, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 23. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a device
or member for backing the record-medium* as type-face* elements
are impacted thereagainst.
| | (1)
Note. The device or member may include a flat platen*, per
se, for example, characterized as being of dimensions corresponding
to a sheet that it will hold, or may include means for
holding or guiding the record-medium relative to the flat
platen, these being only examples of the subject matter
of this subclass. | |
| | |
| 50 | INCLUDING DELAY MEANS FOR PREVENTING MALFUNCTION IN POWERED
TYPEWRITER: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein a source of energy other than that
supplied by a typist is used to actuate, or aid a typist
to actuate, mechanism for performing first and second sequential
operations on a typewriter. The typewriter having a capability
of performing each of said operations in an optimum time period
from the instant that each operation has been initiated by a signal, until
the instant that each operation is complete, and wherein
there will be a failure in proper performance of the second operation
if the first operation has not reached a first predetermined stage
of performance before the second operation has reached a second predetermined
state of performance and wherein significance is attributed to sensing
an occurrence wherein a signal to initiate the second operation
has been given prematurely. As a result of such sensed
occurrence, retarding the performance of the second operation
to assure the first operation has reached the first stage before
the second operation reaches the second stage. |
| | |
| 51 | Delay of sequential character rate in programmed-control
typewriter: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 50. Subject matter wherein the sequential operations are regulated
by a programmed-control-system*, and
wherein the first and second operations are each for typing of a
character*, and wherein the retarding of the second
operation is by increasing the period of time for performing the
second operation from said optimum period to a time greater than
said optimum period. |
| | |
| 52 | Delay by storage of next character to be imprinted: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 50. Subject matter wherein the first and second operations are
each for typing a character*, and wherein after
the second operation has been initiated, it is retarded
by holding it from completion for a predetermined period of time. |
| | |
| 53 | INCLUDING ADJUSTMENT MEANS TO COMPENSATE FOR WEAR: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter whereby attrition of a typewriter part occurs
during use of the typewriter, and wherein significance
is attributed to changing the position of such part relative to another
part to counteract such attrition. |
| | |
| 54 | SAFETY SWITCH OR CONDITION-RESPONSIVE-CUTOFF
SWITCH FOR ELECTRICALLY POWERED TYPEWRITER: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein typewriter mechanism is driven with
the help of force derived from electrical energy and wherein significance
is attributed to a device for influencing a circuit through which
the energy is supplied, said device being either for preventing
the typist from being harmed, or for interrupting the circuit
as a result or characteristic of the state of the environment or
the occurrence of a predetermined event in a typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. Examples of devices provided for in this subclass
are a switch which cannot be placed in an "on" position
unless a cover prevents access to the electrically powered mechanism, and
a switch that will automatically turn the power "off" after
a preset time interval if the typewriter is left unattended. | |
| | |
| 55 | INCLUDING ADJUSTMENT FOR OPTIMUM PRINTING PLANE: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to adjustment
of the optimum printing plane of a typewriter as that term is discussed
and defined in (1) Note below.
| | (1)
Note. In over simplified terms, a typewriter
requires at least two elements for a typing operation.
One of these elements is a type-member* that impacts against
a record-medium* at a print-point*; another
of these elements is a platen* that serves to prevent movement of
the record-medium away from the type-member during
impact. (Obviously, other structures
and mechanisms are also required for operation, but discussion
of these may be deferred.) The type-member
includes a type-face* that lies in a plane; the
platen includes a surface that lies in a plane. In the
instance of a cylindrical platen, the platen plane is theoretically
tangent to the peripheral surface of the platen, whereas
the surface itself is arcuate, therefore not planar, but considering
the small area of a character* compared to the area of
a cylindrical platen, the difference between the arcuate
surface and the tangent plane is minimal; the platen plane
can be considered as planar. Theoretically, the
platen plane should coincide with the type-face plane when
the type-face is at the print-point to ensure
an imprinted character that is uniformly legible at any point on
its area. Actually, the two planes cannot coincide because
of the thickness of the record-medium and the thickness
of a ribbon*, both of which lie between the two
planes in most typewriters, but at the very minimum the
two planes should be parallel, one to the other. Because
in an actual typewriter the planes may become out of parallelism
with each other, it is necessary to provide means to adjust
either the platen plane or the type-face plane, or both, to
correct the possible misalignment. Moreover, in
an actual typewriter the number or thickness of record-medium
sheets may vary. If the record-medium of greater
than usual thickness is used, the type-face will
impact the surface of the record-medium at a print-point
that is further from the axis of the platen than is usual. The
type-face plane would not be parallel to the plane of the record-medium
at the new print-point. To summarize, the "optimum
printing plane" is the plane at which the type-face and
the record-medium best meet to form an imprinted character
that is uniformly legible at any point on its area, and
is the result of adjustments to the typewriter to ensure the coincidence
and parallelism of the record-medium with the type-face
at the print-point. | |
| | |
| 56 | Responsive to thickness of record-medium: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 55. Subject matter wherein the thickness dimension of the record-medium* (i.e., its
dimension perpendicular to a surface area) is measured, and
the adjustment of the optimum printing plane is made by the typewriter
as a result of such measurement. |
| | |
| 59 | By adjustment of carriage (e.g., carriage-guide
rollers): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 55. Subject matter wherein the optimum printing plane is adjusted
by varying the position of the carriage* of the typewriter
with respect to the print-point.
| | (1)
Note. In this subclass the position of roller elements
or the carriage frame on which the carriage moves to and fro is adjusted. | |
| | |
| 60 | Via adjustment of case-shift linkage: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 59. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with a
case-shift mechanism that is connected to the carriage* for
choice of upper-case* or lower-case* form
of type-face* element, and wherein the
optimum printing plane is adjusted by varying the position of the
carriage with respect to the case-shift mechanism. |
| | |
| 61 | INCLUDING CONTROL OF FORMAT AND SELECTION OF TYPE-FACE
BY PROGRAMMED-CONTROL-SYSTEM (E.G., INPUT
TYPEWRITER): |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein a programmed-control-system* governs
the operation of a typewriter so as to control the format of the text
to be imprinted on a record-medium* and so as
to impress selected or chosen type-face* elements
against the record-medium.
| | (1)
Note. The term "format" refers
to physical appearance. As used in the typewriter art
the term refers to the appearance of a page* of text of
typewritten character* symbols. Control of format
involves (a) movement of the record-medium
in the line-space* direction (i.e., the "Y" direction
of a graph) to locate the record-medium at a desired print-line* location
and (b) movement of the carriage* (e.g., a
platen* carriage or a type-head* carriage) in
a character-space* direction (i.e., the "X" direction of
a graph) to locate the first-imprinted-character
symbol of the print-line along that print-line. Format
control also governs such function* operations as carriage
return (Found, per se, in subclass 313), tabulation (found, per
se, in subclass 284), subsequent line-spacing* (found, per
se, in subclass 545), or record-medium
feeding (found, per se, in subclasses
578), (these functions being only exemplary) so
that the entire format of the printed text on the record-medium is
controlled. In some typewriters having format control
the typewriter or the program is capable of being modified to change
the format as desired. For example, a paragraph
of text comprising six print-lines, each print-line
having approximately 70 characters thereon, may be changed
to a paragraph comprising 12 print-lines, each
print-line having approximately 35 characters thereon; or the
distance between successive print-lines may be varied as
desired to compress or expand the typed text to fit a page. |
| | (2)
Note. In the typewriter of this and indented subclasses, the
programmed-control-system also governs the operation
to select or choose the type-face elements that are to
be used to imprint the characters in sequence. The difference between "select" and "choose" as
to type-face, is discussed in the glossary under
definitions such as case-shift*, type-face-carrier*, type-head, and
type-head-carrier*. Briefly, a
particular type-face is selected from among the many available
from a type-set-assemblage, whereas an
upper-case* form of letter (As distinguished
from a lower-case* form of the same letter) is
chosen from the forms available on one key* element. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 70, | for selection of type-face by a programmed-control-system. |
| 76, | for control of format by a programmed-control-system. |
|
| | |
| 62 | Including means for responding to input program or incoming
signals and providing output program or signals representing typing
operations (e.g., output typewriter): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 61. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is governed by an
auxiliary-record-program* or is governed
by an instrumentality outside of the typewriter, which
instrumentality transmits to the typewriter the instructions necessary
to control the typing functions* and type-face* selections
and choices, and wherein the typewriter also generates
an auxiliary-record-program or also generates
the instructions necessary to control the typing functions and type-face
selections and choices for another typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. The typewriter of this subclass is known as
an "input-output" typewriter in the art.
The "input" of this typewriter may be from a program
in the form of a punched or magnetic tape or other record, or
may be in the form of signals from a "computer" or "register" or "memory" outside
of the typewriter. The "output" of this
typewriter may also be in the form of a program tape or other record, or
may be in the form of signals to a "computer" or "register" or "memory", the
signals being generated in response to depression of the key* elements
on a key-board* by a typist and being transmitted
to another typewriter. The typewriter of this subclass
is capable of responding to an input and of producing an output.
Also a typewriter of this subclass could be one of several typewriters
in a chain wherein the "input" of one typewriter
is converted to an "output" of that typewriter, which "output" of
the first typewriter becomes the "input" of a
second typewriter, etc. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 80, | for an "output" typewriter. |
|
| | |
| 63 | Including editing or revision system: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 61. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter
capable of editing or revision as those terms are discussed and
explained in the notes below.
| | (1)
Note. The term "revision" is applied
to an operation wherein the text of typewritten material is changed. Typically, a typist
types a "rough draft" text and generates a "rough
draft program". The text is proof-read
and various changes are indicated where necessary to add, delete, modify
spelling, or otherwise correct the text. The
typist or proofreader then locates on the rough draft text and program
the portion of text to be changed and reprograms to correct the
text. The reprogrammed corrections may be put onto a correction
program or onto the rough draft program or onto another instrumentality.
The correction program is then combined with the rough draft program
to in corporate all the changes and corrections into a master program which
is then used to reproduce as many original copies as are desired.
A revision system typewriter is sometimes used as an input or as
an output, and usually additional equipment is necessary
to correlate the changes so that they may be entered properly in
the master program. |
| | (2)
Note. The term "editing" is applied
to an operation wherein the appearance (e.g., the
format) as well as the text of typewritten material is
changed. An editing system will usually operate similarly
to a revision system, but will include changes such as "centering", "indent
paragraphing", or other format control changes. An
incoming program (i.e., input) will be
modified by appropriate equipment to perform format control or character-selection
control that is different from the original program. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 709, | Electrical Computers and Digital Data Processing
Systems: Multiple Computer or Process Coordinating, appropriate subclassesfor data transferring among multiple computer
and digital processing systems. |
| 710, | Electrical Computers and Digital Data Processing
Systems: Input/Output,
subclasses 1+ for transferring data from one or more peripherals
to one or more computers for the latter to process, store, or
further transfer or for transferring data from the computers to
the peripherals. |
| 715, | Data Processing: Presentation Processing
of Document, Operator Interface Processing, and
Screen Saver Display Processing,
subclasses 243 through 253for document layout processing and subclasses 255
through 272 for document edit, composition, or
storage control processing. |
|
| | |
| 64 | Including right-hand margin control system: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 61. Subject matter wherein the programmed-control-system* governs
the location or extent of the margin* at the right side
of the record-medium* that is being typed on.
| | (1)
Note. In this subclass the "input" to the typewriter
does not include right-hand margin control and such control is added by
the system, or the system does particularly include a right-hand
margin control and such control is either retained or is particularly
modified by the system. The operation known as "justification" is not
included here, but is to be found in subclass 1. | |
| | |
| 65 | Including typing of s:graphical representations: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 61. Subject matter wherein the programmed-control-system* governs
the operation of a typewriter so as to imprint character* symbols
and also governs the operation of said typewriter so as to produce
a graph denoting the imprinted character symbols.
| | (1)
Note. A "graph" is defined as a diagram representing
a system of connections or interrelations among two or more things by
a number of distinctive dots, bars, etc. The graph or chart produced
in this subclass represents the letter characters or number characters
that are imprinted by the typewriter. | |
| | |
| 66 | Including baseplate attachment with electromagnets for
input or output operations: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 61. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a mechanism
that is connected as an adjunct to a typewriter, which mechanism
is used to convert a typewriter that is operable by a typist depressing
the key* elements of the key-board* to a typewriter
that is operable by a programmed-control-system*, and which mechanism
is located underneath the typewriter and operates the type-face* selecting
or choosing means and the function* operations of the typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. Usually the attachment is used to convert a standard
typewriter to an input-output typewriter, but it may also be part
of the typewriter that is used as a "computer terminal". | |
| | |
| 67 | Separate interrelated programs: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 61. Subject matter wherein a typewriter is provided with at
least two programmed-control-system* programs, each of
which programs is intended for a different sequence of operations
to be performed, by the typewriter, and the programs being coordinated
to produce a final text.
| | (1)
Note. In this subclass, one of the programs may be for the
selection or choice of character* symbols and another program
may be for the line-space* or the character-space* control,
and both programs are used together. | |
| | |
| 68 | Including message writing (e.g., address program, form-letter
program, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 67. Subject matter wherein at least one of the programs effects
the typing of a part of a communication of information and another
of the programs effects the typing of another part of the same communication.
| | (1)
Note. An example of the subject matter of this subclass is
a program for typing the body of a letter (i.e., "letter" in
the sense of a piece of correspondence) that will be sent to various
people, and a plurality of programs, each program for typing the
address of each of the people to whom the correspondence will be
sent. | |
| | |
| 69 | Type-face selection via magnetic program tape: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 61. Subject matter wherein the program-control-systems* includes
an auxiliary-record-program* that comprises a band or ribbon* of material
containing ferrous particles capable of being oriented or reoriented
relative to the band or tape, the orientation of the particles being sensed
to effect selection or choice of the type-face* elements
that will be impressed against the record-medium* to effect
imprint of character* symbols in sequence. |
| | |
| 70 | INCLUDING SELECTION OF TYPE-FACE BY PROGRAMMED-CONTROL-SYSTEM
OR BY REMOTE CONTROL: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein a programmed-control-system or a
signal from outside of a typewriter governs the operation of the
typewriter so as to impress selected or chosen type-face* elements
against the record-medium* to imprint character* symbols
successively.
| | (1)
Note. In the typewriter of this and indented subclasses the
programmed-control-system is used to select or choose the type-face
elements that are to imprint the characters in sequence. The difference
between "select" and "choose" as
to the type-face element is discussed in the glossary, section
III, under definitions such as case-shift*, type-face-carrier*,
type-head*, and type-head-carrier*. Briefly,
A particular type-face is selected from among the many available
from a type-set-assemblage*, whereas an upper-case* form
of letter (As distinguished from a lower-case* form of
the same letter) is chosen from the forms of that letter available
on one key* element. |
| | (2)
Note. The signal from outside the typewriter that governs
the operation of the typewriter is usually referred to in such functional
terms as "reader", "translator", "storage", "input",
etc. it is not a remote signal such as that transmitted by a printing
telegraph of Class 178. See (1) note to Class 178, Telegraphy,
in section IV of the class definition of this class (400), for the
distinction between this class (400) and Class 178, Telegraphy. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 61, | for selection of type-face and control of format
by a programmed-control-system. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 178, | Telegraphy, and (2) note above. |
|
| | |
| 71 | Plural typewriters coupled for simultaneous operation (e.g., "master-slave" relationship): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 70. Subject matter wherein a first typewriter, while it is operating
to type on a record-medium*, produces signals. These signals
(i.e., signals from inside the first typewriter, but from outside
a second typewriter) are used to govern the operation of the second
typewriter concurrently with the operation of the first typewriter, whereby
corresponding character* symbols are typed onto a second
record-medium at the same time that character symbols are typed onto
the first record-medium by operation of the key-board* of
the first typewriter.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 77, | for a typewriter coupled to an information-recording
machine. |
|
| | |
| 72 | Including character-selection latches (e.g., for type-face
selection): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 70. Subject matter wherein the programmed-control-system* governs
the selection or choice of a type-face* element that is
part of a type-head* by way of components known in the typewriter
industry as "character-selection latches".
| | (1)
Note. The term character-selection latch refers to a component
used in a typewriter having a spheroidal type-head that is supported
by a type-head-carrier* that is mounted on a type-head
carrier* (see the definition of carriage in the glossary).
A typewriter of this subclass is provided with a plurality of these
components (usually five or six), each of which is hook shaped to "latch" to
a common actuator bar or member and is connected to a "whiffletree" arrangement
of links. A signal representing a selected character* or
function* causes one or character is selected, certain
of the components will be latched and when another particular character
is selected, other components will be latched or a different permutation
of components will be latched. Movement of the common actuator
will move those components that have been permutatively latched
thereto. Movement of the latched components will move the links of
the whiffletree, and movement of the whiffletree links will be converted
into tilting and/or rotational movement of a spheroidal
type-head to thereby position the selected type-face so that movement of
the type-head-carrier to the record-medium* will effect
imprint of the selected character, or movement of the whiffletree
links will be converted into movement of a selected function* (e.g., case-shift*). | |
| | |
| 73 | Including particular reader structure and operation: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 70. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to means
for converting the information stored on the program of a programmed-control-system* into
the operation of selection or choice of a particular type-face* element
and motion of the selected or chosen type-face to the record-medium*.
| | (1)
Note. In the patents of this subclass the converting means
(i.e., the "reader") is specifically claimed as
a part of the typewriter that controls the operation of the typewriter
in specific terms. In other words, the typewriter is more than merely
named as a load for the reader. The reader having a named typewriter
is classified elsewhere, see the search class note below. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 358, | Facsimile and Static Presentation Processing,
subclass 1.6 for a reader of a programmed control system together with
a named typewriter. |
|
| | |
| 74 | Including error detection: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 70. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a portion
of the program of a programmed-control-system* which provides verification
of the text to insure that the character* symbols that
are being imprinted on the record-medium* are the characters
that the programmed-control-system is instructing the typewriter
to imprint.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 6, | for an error-correcting storage register in a "justification" typewriter. |
|
| | |
| 75 | Including type-bar selection using mechanical program: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 70. Subject matter wherein the type-face* elements are
mounted on type-bar* members, and wherein the programmed-control-systems* includes
an auxiliary-record-program* that is directly linked to
means for actuating the type-bars for selection of the type-faces
to be impressed against the record-medium*, or is directly
linked to a case-shift* mechanism for choice of the upper-case* or
lower-case* form of the type-face to be impressed against
the record-medium.
| | (1)
Note. In the typewriter of this subclass a plurality of type-bars
are used, each type-bar carrying usually two type-faces thereon,
one type-face for upper-case and another type-face for lower-case character.
Also the typewriter of this subclass does not use an electrical "reader" of
the program for converting the program to signals that cause actuation
of the type-faces, but instead, this typewriter actuates the typefaces
directly from the program. | |
| | |
| 76 | INCLUDING CONTROL OF FORMAT BY PROGRAMMED-CONTROL-SYSTEM: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein a programmed-control-system* governs
the operation of a typewriter so as to control the format of the text
to be imprinted on a record-medium*.
| | (1)
Note. The term "format" is discussed in (1)
Note of subclass 61, above. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 61, | for control of format and selection of type-face* by
a programmed-control-system. |
|
| | |
| 77 | TYPEWRITER CONTROLS OTHER INFORMATION RECORDER: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein a first typewriter is capable of
operation of imprint character* symbols on a record-medium*,
and wherein another machine is capable of operation to imprint character
symbols or to form indicia on the same or on another record-medium,
and wherein operation of the first typewriter concurrently influences
the operation of the other machine.
| | (1)
Note. The other machine may be a printing machine, an accounting
machine, a card-punch machine, etc. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 71, | for a typewriter that controls another typewriter. |
|
| | |
| 78 | Typewriter controls apparatus used for accounting function: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 77. Subject matter wherein the other machine influenced by the
first typewriter is a machine which prints indicia on a Record-Medium*, said
indicia resulting from a mathematical computation.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 235, | Registers, for a mechanical device or a record controlled system
for performing a mathematical computation. |
| 705, | Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice,
Management, or Cost/price Determination,
subclasses 30+ for an electrical data processing accounting system. |
|
| | |
| 79 | And a tape-punch or card-punch apparatus: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 78. Subject matter wherein operation of the first typewriter
also concurrently influences a machine for providing indicia in
the form of apertures in a sheet or web of material.
| | (1)
Note. A sheet is a relatively thin piece of material having
determinate width and determinate length. A web is a relatively thin
piece of material having determinate width and indeterminate length.
A card is a sheet that is slightly thicker than a sheet and therefore
stiffer than a sheet. | |
| | |
| 82 | INCLUDING PLURAL, INDEPENDENTLY SUPPORTED KEY-BOARDS, PLATENS,
OR TYPE-SET-ASSEMBLAGES: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein there is provided more than one key-board* mounted
separate from each other, or there is provided more than one platen* mounted
separate from each other, or there is provided more than one type-set-assemblage* mounted
separate from each other.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 353, | for a typewriter having an auxiliary carriage*. |
| 585, | for a typewriter having a divided platen. |
|
| | |
| 83 | DISPLAYING TYPEWRITER-FORMED REPRESENTATION OF PRINT-LINE: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
showing to the typist or another person a visible expression or
designation of the character* symbols that are to be or are
being imprinted on a record-medium* as a print-line*. |
| | |
| 84 | By projecting typed image on screen: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 83. Subject matter wherein the visible expression or designation
is cast or exhibited by way of an optical system that includes a
surface on which the likeness of the print-line* on the
record-medium* is visible. |
| | |
| 86 | OPERATING BY SOUND: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter
responsive to the sound of the human voice to perform typing operations. |
| | |
| 87 | FOR OPERATION BY A HANDICAPPED USER: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter
intended to be operated by a typist whose physical capacities are limited.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 475, | for a typewriter wherein some functions are foot
actuated. |
|
| | |
| 88 | POCKET TYPEWRITER: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter
that is sufficiently small to be carried on the person of a user within
a pocket or handbag. |
| | |
| 89 | KEY REASSIGNMENT: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter which changes the relationship between the
key designation and the printed character.
| | (1)
Note. The term key designation includes either a change in
actuated printing element or key designator (e.g., mask or overlay). |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 380, | Cryptography,
subclass 51 and 55 for a cryptos:graphic typewriter. |
|
| | |
| 90 | Electrically powered: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 89. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter
that is operated with the help of electricity.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 380, | Cryptography,
subclass 55 for an electrical cryptos:graphic typewriter. |
|
| | |
| 91 | STENOGRAPHIC TYPEWRITER: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter
intended to be used while typing in "shorthand" or
stenos:graphically.
| | (1)
Note. Various terms are used in the art to refer to such
a typewriter, including "shorthand", "steno-typograph" and "tachygraphic",
and variations of such words. A typewriter capable of stenos:graphic
operation has a distinctive appearance that is different from that of
the usual typewriter. The keyboard* is arranged so that
plural key* elements are pressed simultaneously by the
fingers of one or both hands of the typist, and the type-face* elements
are impressed against the record-medium* simultaneously
in groups. The imprinted character* symbols therefore
appear in the record-medium in groups, and the record-medium, which
is usually a relatively narrow strip of elongated material, is moved
after each group of characters have been imprinted thereon. The
stenotypist thus forms groups of characters in succession, each
group corresponding to a syllable of a word*, thus the
operation of such a typewriter can be rapid and can be used while
recording a spoken conversation. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 482, | for a key-board specialized for use in a stenographic
typewriter. |
|
| | |
| 92 | Using common-letter type-face: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 91. Subject matter wherein the type-face* elements in
the stenographic typewriter are of the form or in one of the Fonts* that
is normal and usual in a typewriter. |
| | |
| 94 | Electrically powered: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 91. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a stenographic
typewriter that is operated with the help of electricity. |
| | |
| 95 | LOGOTYPE TYPEWRITER (E.G., WORD TYPING): |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter
in which one or more of the imprinting members is formed as an assemblage
of type-face* or type-die* elements, each of which
elements imprints simultaneously or in quick succession one with
the others as if the assemblage was a single element, thus imprinting
a plurality of character* symbols on the record-medium* by
the one impression of the member.
| | (1)
Note. The difference between this form of typewriter and
a printing machine proper for Class 101 is discussed in section
IV of the definition of this class (400), under the note to Class
101 in (1) note of section IV. | |
| | |
| 96 | Including date-stamp type-face: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 95. Subject matter wherein at least one of the imprinting members
is a typeface* or an assemblage of type-face elements that
form character* symbols representing the name or number
of a month or day or year. |
| | |
| 97 | Including signature type-face: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 95. Subject matter wherein at least one of the imprinting members
is a typeface* or an assemblage of type-face elements that
form character* symbols representing a person"s name
as written by that person. |
| | |
| 98 | Actuation of single key types plural characters: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 95. Subject matter wherein depression of one key* element
by a typist will effect the impressing of more than one type-face* element
onto a record-medium*
| | (1)
Note. In this subclass separate type-face elements imprint
corresponding character* symbols in quick succession when
a single key is depressed. | |
| | |
| 99 | Characters typed simultaneously: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 98. Subject matter wherein depression of one key* element
will effect the impressing of more than one type-face* element
onto a record-medium* at the same time. |
| | |
| 100 | PLURAL-KEY-ACTUATED TYPEWRITER (E.G., PERMUTATIVE KEY-BOARD): |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter
in which a single type-face* element is caused to be impressed against
a record-medium* to imprint a single character* symbol,
the actuation of said single type-face being initiated or powered
by the pressing of a plurality of key* elements on the key-board*.
| | (1)
Note. As discussed in the definitions of character, key,
and type-member* in the glossary, section III, most typewriters are
provided with a mechanism whereby a single key element is selected
by a typist and pressed to cause a single type-face to be impressed
against a record-medium to imprint a single character on the record-medium.
In a typewriter of this and indented subclasses a plurality of
key elements are pressed by the typist to imprint a single character
on the record-medium. This typewriter uses a "permutative" mechanism
in the key-lever linkage and the type-bar* or type-head* action
linkage which changes the linkages and enables a particular selection
of pressed key elements to imprint a selected character and enables
another particular selection of pressed key elements to imprint
another selected character. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 472, | for a key-board in a standard typewriter. |
|
| | |
| 102 | Having type-faces disposed on rotatable type-head: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 100. Subject matter wherein a type-face* element is carried
by a type-head* element that turns about an axis while
the typeface that is to be selected or chosen is moved to a position
where the type-face will be impressed against the record-medium*. |
| | |
| 103 | CODE-PRINTING TYPEWRITER (E.G., FOR PRINTING A PATTERN
OR MARK): |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter
that is capable of imprinting a mark or spot of ink* on
a record-medium*, the imprint of a succession of such marks
or spots forming a particular coded pattern.
| | (1)
Note. A typewriter of this and indented subclasses may be
capable of imprinting a succession of character* symbols
that together from an intelligible text, but this typewriter is
also capable of imprinting a pattern that is sensed or "read" by another
machine or a pattern that forms a picture to a human"s
eye. In some instances the pattern embodies a sequence of number
digits, but the digits represent a pattern of indicia or signs rather
than a numerical value. | |
| | |
| 104 | For typing and encoding: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 103. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is capable of imprinting
in a normal or usual English Alphabet as well as capable of imprinting
a mark or spot of ink* on the record-medium*. |
| | |
| 105 | Including magnetic encoding: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 104. Subject matter wherein the mark or spot of ink* that
is imprinted is in the form of ferrous particles capable of being
oriented or reoriented by magnetism, or is in the form of ink containing
such ferrous particles. |
| | |
| 108 | For marking laundry: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 103. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
imprinting of a mark or spot of ink* on an article of apparel
that is to be washed. |
| | |
| 109 | FOREIGN-LANGUAGE TYPEWRITER: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter
that is capable of imprinting character* symbols in an
alphabet other than the standard English alphabet.
| | (1)
Note. The standard "English" alphabet is
one that is derived from the Roman or Latin alphabet, and therefore
is common to languages used in many European countries, including
most of the western European countries. This and indented subclasses
provide for a typewriter capable of typing in such alphabets as
Cryllic (e.g., for Russian, Bulgarian or Serbian), Semitic (e.g.,
Arabic, Hebrew), Greek, Medieval German, etc., or is capable of typing
such oriental languages as Chinese, Japanese, etc., the enumeration being
only exemplary. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 484, | for a key-board* specialized for use in a
foreign-language typewriter. |
|
| | |
| 109.1 | Braille: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 109. Subject matter wherein the character* symbols are
embossed in the record-medium* so as to be discerned by
tactile sensation.
| | (1)
Note. The typewriter of this subclass usually forms a character* in
the form of a pattern of embossments, each different pattern representing
a different letter or number or other symbol. A trained blind person
feels the different patterns with his/her fingers and so "reads" the
character*s that form the text. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 483, | for a key-board* intended for use in a "Braille" typewriter. |
|
| | |
| 110 | Including oriental language: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 109. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is capable of imprinting
character* symbols used in an oriental language.
| | (1)
Note. An "Oriental" language is one that is
used by the inhabitants of Asia. Such languages as Chinese, Japanese,
Burmese, etc. are examples of Oriental languages. | |
| | |
| 111 | Including semitic language: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 109. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is capable of imprinting
character* symbols used in a Semitic language.
| | (1)
Note. A "Semitic" language is one that is
used by such people as Arabs and Hebrews. It is characterized by
being written and read from right to left. | |
| | |
| 112 | ANNULAR TYPEWRITER (E.G., FOR TYPING AROUND CIRCUMFERENCE OF
PLATEN): |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter
having a cylindrical or partially cylindrical platen* for
supporting or backing a record-medium* in which typewriter
character* symbols are imprinted on the record-medium in
such manner that each successively imprinted character in a direction extending
around the periphery of the platen.
| | (1)
Note. Successive characters may be imprinted in a helical
arrangement around the periphery, thus requiring no mechanism for
line-space* distances, or the platen may be moved axially between
successive print-line* typing, thus producing line-spaces. | |
| | |
| 113 | Including vertically disposed platen: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 112. Subject matter wherein said platen* turns about an
axis during use of the typewriter, and wherein said axis extends
upwardly relative to the typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. The turning of the platen is in increments corresponding
to character-space* distances and may be rotated in one
direction for a cylindrical platen or be rotated by increments followed
by oscillation in a return direction for a partially cylindrical
platen. | |
| | |
| 115 | Power actuated: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 112. Subject matter wherein one or more mechanisms of the typewriter
is/are driven with the help of energy derived from a source
other than the energy of the typist. |
| | |
| 116 | MUSIC-ROLL OR MUSICAL-NOTATION TYPEWRITER: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter
capable of imprinting character* symbols on a music roll,
or capable of imprinting character symbols representing the notes
used for indicating the signs and tones of a musical composition.
| | (1)
Note. A "music roll" is a web of record-medium* having
holes therein, the holes controlling the playing of a "player piano".
In the typewriter of this subclass the music roll is also imprinted
with the words of the song being played on the player piano, so
that a user may sing along with the music being played. | |
| | |
| 117 | Musical-notation typewriter: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 110. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter
capable of imprinting character* symbols representing the
notes used for indicating the signs and tones of a musical composition. |
| | |
| 118.1 | TYPING BY HEATED DIE: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter
in which character* symbols are successively imprinted
or formed in or on a surface of a record-medium* by applying
a piece of metal having a form (image) therein directly against
said record-medium* and heating said metal to thereby provide
the image on the record-medium*.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 120.01+, | for apparatus for recording utilizing heat applied
indirectly to the record-medium*. |
|
| | |
| 118.2 | TYPING BY OTHER THAN TYPE-FACE OR TYPE-DIE: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter
in which character* symbols are successively imprinted
or formed on a surface of a record-medium* by forming the
character* portion by portion.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 345, | Computer Graphics Processing and Selective Visual
Display Systems, subclasses 467-472.3 for character or font generation
and display. |
| 358, | Facsimile and Static Presentation Processing,
subclasses 1.1 through 1.18for processing of data for presentation to the
print-head. |
| 715, | Data Processing: Presentation Processing of Document,
Operator Interface Processing, and Screen Saver Display Processing, appropriate subclassesfor document processing performed by a computer
for presentation. |
|
| | |
| 118.3 | Electroconductive transfer: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 118.2. Subject matter wherein a recording means conducts current
through a resistive layer of the record-medium* or an ink* carrier
for generating heat to produce a record upon the record-medium* by
the reason of the medium becoming scorched, burned, marked, or otherwise thermochemically
changed. |
| | |
| 120.01 | Thermal: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 118.2. Subject matter wherein a recording means, due to its being
in a heated condition, produces a record upon the record-medium* as
by reason of the medium becoming scorched, burned, marked, or otherwise
thermochemically changed. |
| | |
| 120.05 | Block driving: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 120.01. Subject matter wherein the recording means comprises recording
elements grouped into sections capable of being selectively energized. |
| | |
| 120.08 | Preheating: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 120.01. Subject matter wherein the recording means, record-medium*,
or ink*-carrier is warmed-up prior to recording. |
| | |
| 120.09 | Density control: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 120.01. Subject matter comprising a regulating means for controlling
the amount of energy supplied to the recording means to maintain
a uniform output on the record. |
| | |
| 120.12 | By voltage regulation: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 120.09. Subject matter wherein the regulating means responds to
changes in electrical potential across a heating element used for
heating the recording means. |
| | |
| 120.13 | By transfer material or record receiver: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 120.09. Subject matter wherein the regulating means is responsive
to a parameter associated with the ink* carrier, the ink*,
or the record-medium*.
| | (1)
Note. Examples of the parameter are: the thickness of the
ink* carrier, the thickness of the paper, the volatility
of the ink*, etc. | |
| | |
| 120.16 | Recording means support or actuator: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 120.01. Subject matter comprising a mechanism for holding or moving
the recording means from an operative position in which the recording
means is pressed against the record-medium* to an inoperative
position in which the recording means is released from pressing engagement
with the record-medium*. |
| | |
| 120.17 | Adjustable: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 120.16. Subject matter comprising means for selectively varying
pressure applying the recording means against the record-medium*. |
| | |
| 124.01 | Character formation by impact (e.g., wire matrix): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 118.2. Subject matter wherein the character* symbol is
formed on the record-medium by percussing two or more discrete elements
(i.e., impact members) arranged in a group by use of an actuator
directly or indirectly against the record-medium*.
| | (1)
Note. The discrete elements are arranged into the configuration
of a selected character*, the same or different discrete
elements being selectable to arrange such elements into the configuration
of a different selected character*, wherein each of the
discrete elements is a member that is movable from a rest position
where it does not effect imprinting to an active position where
it effects printing, and wherein the configuration of a selected
character* symbol is formed by moving selected members from
a rest position to an active position by energization of actuators
in the printhead. | |
| | |
| 124.02 | With signal conditioning: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 124.01. Subject matter including an electrically powered actuator
and means to modify the input power thereof (i.e., the signal) to
control operating parameters of the actuator.
| | (1)
Note. These parameters include: length of actuation, strength
of actuation, and exact time of actuation. | |
| | |
| 124.03 | Overheat protection: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 124.02. Subject matter wherein the input power is modified to prevent
excessive temperatures in the actuator.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 124.13, | for details of the structure of the printhead which
dissipates heat produced by the printhead. |
|
| | |
| 124.05 | Control of drive force: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 124.02. Subject matter wherein the input power is modified in order
to change the strength of the pressure applied by the impact member
against the record-medium*. |
| | |
| 124.06 | Manifold form or plural copies: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 124.05. Subject matter wherein the force which is applied to the
record-medium* by the impact members is varied according
to the number of sheets of the record-medium* being printed
upon. |
| | |
| 124.08 | Plural printheads: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 124.01. Subject matter including more than one discrete groupings
of impact members arranged along the print-line*.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 82, | for typewriters which have more than one printhead,
which may be more than one type of printhead. |
|
| | |
| 124.09 | Multicolor: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 124.08. Subject matter wherein the character* symbol or
successive character* symbols produced are polychromatic.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 120.02+, | for thermal printers which print in multiple colors. |
| 216.1, | for ribbon* movement systems which are
used in multicolor printers. |
| 240+, | for specifics of ribbon*s having multiple
colors thereon. |
|
| | |
| 124.1 | With inking: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 124.01. Subject matter wherein ink* is applied to the impact
members prior to the impact members percussing the record-medium*.
| | (1)
Note. This is generally done by providing a reservoir for
ink* on the printhead, and the impact members are driven through
or next to a pad which distributes the ink* onto the impact
members. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 470+, | for structure which directly inks type-faces in
a typewriter. |
|
| | |
| 124.11 | Printhead: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 124.01. Subject matter including significant structure of the impact
member, the actuators, or the housing therefor (i.e., the printhead). |
| | |
| 124.12 | Having assembly means: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 124.11. Subject matter including structure for interconnecting portions
of the printhead together or for connecting the printhead to a support.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 29, | Metal Working, various subclasses for methods of assembly of printheads. |
|
| | |
| 124.13 | Overheat protection: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 124.11. Subject matter including cooling means.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass is limited to patents wherein the printhead
has structure for transferring heat therefrom, e.g., fins, fluid
flow means, etc. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 124.03, | for ways of controlling the power to the printhead
to reduce heat buildup. |
|
| | |
| 124.14 | With actuator: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 124.11. Subject matter including significant structure of the means
for applying percussing force to the impact members (i.e., the actuator).
| | (1)
Note. Patents claiming a printhead having significant actuator
structure are classified here. | |
| | |
| 124.16 | Electrostrictive, magnetostrictive, or piezoelectric: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 124.14. Subject matter wherein the percussive force is produced
in the actuator by periodic deformation of a dielectric body as
a result of an applied electric or magnetic field or electric voltage.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 310, | Electric Generator or Motor Structure,
subclasses 311+ for specifics of general purpose piezoelectric
actuators. |
|
| | |
| 124.17 | Actuator having electromagnet: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 124.14. Subject matter wherein the means for producing the percussive
force includes a looped conductor for conducting electrical current
which produces a magnetic* field.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 335, | Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches,
Magnets, and Electromagnets,
subclasses 209+ , for details of specific electromagnet structure. |
|
| | |
| 124.18 | Electrical component: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 124.17. Subject matter including significant structure to an electric
circuit or any portion thereof for conducting electric current through the
looped conductor.
| | (1)
Note. The electromagnet is not considered to be a part of
the "significant structure to an electric circuit" for
purposes of classification in this subclass. |
| | (2)
Note. This subclass could include, for example, a printhead
with an electromagnet having a particular electrical terminal or
connector, etc. | |
| | |
| 124.19 | Moving coil: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 124.18. Subject matter wherein the looped conductor is displaceable
relative to the housing responsive to the magnetic* field
produced therein. |
| | |
| 124.2 | Permanent magnet: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 124.18. Subject matter wherein the magnetic* field acts
against the magnetic* field of a material which is magnetically
polarized.
| | (1)
Note. This does not include magnetic* fields which
exist for a moving coil. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 335, | Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches,
Magnets, and Electromagnets,
subclasses 229+ for general purpose electromagnets which include
a permanent magnet. |
|
| | |
| 124.22 | Backstop: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 124.21. Subject matter including significant structure of means
for halting movement of the actuator towards its rest position. |
| | |
| 124.23 | Armature structure or mounting: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 124.17. Subject matter including significant structure of a movable
portion of the electromagnet or support means therefor.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 124.31, | for details of the attachment of an impact member
to an electromagnetically driven actuator. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 335, | Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches,
Magnets, and Electromagnets,
subclasses 270+ for details of mounting general purpose electromagnetic* actuators,
and subclasses 279+ for structure of armatures used in
general purpose electromagnets. |
|
| | |
| 124.25 | With lubricator: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 124.24. Subject matter including means for applying a friction reducing
substance between the impact member and the directing means. |
| | |
| 124.27 | Including shifting of guide: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 124.24. Subject matter wherein the impact member directing means
is movable relative to the housing or to a carriage* which
supports the housing.
| | (1)
Note. This is usually done in order to increase the density
of output by shifting one set of impact members relative to another
on the same printhead. | |
| | |
| 124.28 | Impact member tip arrangement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 124.11. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
layout of the record-medium* contacting portion of the
impact members within the housing.
| | (1)
Note. To be in this subclass, the layout should be arranged
in other than a straight line. | |
| | |
| 124.3 | Tip cross-section: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 124.29. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
shape of the portion of the impact member that impacts against the
record-medium*.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass does not include impact members which
are uniformly circular. | |
| | |
| 124.31 | With attachment or engagement means: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 124.29. Subject matter including means for connecting or interfacing
the impact member with an actuator.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass includes caps which are formed on the
impact members. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 124.23, | for details of an electromagnetically driven actuator. |
|
| | |
| 124.32 | Specific material: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 124.29. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
material which forms the impact member.
| | (1)
Note. This includes but is not limited to different materials
for the impact tip as opposed to the remainder of the impact member. | |
| | |
| 127 | TYPING TO PRODUCE EMBOSSED CHARACTER: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter
in which imprinting on a record-medium* is accomplished
by a type-die* that contacts a surface of the record-medium
and permanently deforms the surface to raise or lower the contacted
surface relative to the uncontacted surface into a line representing
a character*.
| | (1)
Note. An example of the form of typing accomplished by the
typewriter of this and indented subclasses is the making of a credit
card or an address plate having letters and symbols raised above
the surface of the card or plate. | |
| | |
| 129 | By type-die mounted on carrier movable for selection of
character: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 127. Subject matter wherein a typewriter is provided with a support
for a multiplicity of type-die* elements for embossing
the different character* symbols that the typewriter is
capable of embossing, which support is enabled to be moved relative
to the record-medium*, whereby any of the type-die elements
may be selected to be impressed against the record-medium; and the
selected type-die element may be impressed to emboss a character
symbol on the record-medium.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 138, | for similar structure for mounting piercing type-die
elements thereon. |
|
| | |
| 131 | Electrically powered: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 129. Subject matter wherein electricity is used to energize selection
of a type-die* or the operation of a function* of
the typewriter. |
| | |
| 132 | Type-die reciprocable on carrier: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 129. Subject matter wherein the selected type-die* element
is moved to and fro relative to the support, the movement occurring
for the purpose of impressing the selected type-die against the record-medium*. |
| | |
| 133 | On endless-band carrier: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 129. Subject matter wherein the support for the type-die* elements
is an elongated, closed-loop strip movable in the direction of its
elongation, to select the type-die to be impressed against the record-medium*. |
| | |
| 134 | On rotatable carrier: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 129. Subject matter wherein the support for the type-die* elements
is a member that turns about an axis to select the type-die to be impressed
against the record medium*. |
| | |
| 134.1 | Actuated by key-board control: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 134. Subject matter wherein the type-die* element that
is to be impressed against the record-medium* is selected
by pressing a corresponding key* element located on a key-board*,
the pressing of which key causes selection of type-die and movement
of the selected type-die to the print-point*. |
| | |
| 134.4 | On manually held embosser: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 134. Subject matter wherein the member that supports the type-die* elements
is part of an instrumentality for embossing character* symbols
one at a time in succession, which instrumentality is intended to
be grasped in a hand of a user and operated while so grasped. |
| | |
| 134.5 | Including web supply of record-medium: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 134.4. Subject matter wherein the instrumentality is provided with
means for storing a quantity of record-medium* in the form
of an indeterminate-length strip of material on which character* symbols
are to be embossed. |
| | |
| 134.6 | Including web supply of record-medium: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 134. Subject matter wherein the support for the type-die* elements
is part of an instrumentality, which instrumentality is provided
with means for storing a quantity of record-medium* in
the form of an indeterminate-length strip of material on which character* symbols
are to be embossed. |
| | |
| 135 | TYPING TO PRODUCE PIERCED CHARACTER: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter
in which imprinting on a record-medium* is accomplished
by a type-die* that contacts a surface of the record-medium
and cuts through that surface into the opposite surface to form
one or more perforations in the surface, which perforations taken together
represent a character*.
| | (1)
Note. An example of the form of typing accomplished in the
typewriter of this and indented subclasses is the writing of a bank
check or money order representing an amount of money to be paid,
the digits representing the amount being pierced or scarified into
the surface of the check so that alteration of the check cannot
be accomplished without visible indication of an attempt to alter
the check. | |
| | |
| 136 | Cutout character for stencil: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 135. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
formation of a character* symbol by excising the record-medium* using
type-die* elements that sever the record-medium to produce
perforations therein, each perforation having an outline of a character
symbol.
| | (1)
Note. The record-medium so severed with cutout characters
is used as a stencil by placing the stencil on surface and coating
the stencil and surface with pigment. When the stencil is lifted
from the surface, the pigmented areas on the surface will form the
characters that have been cut out of the stencil record-medium. | |
| | |
| 137 | Check-protection character: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 135. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
formation or character* symbols on a form that directs
a bank of financial institution to pay money, or a form that shows
the amount of money to be paid for value received.
| | (1)
Note. The significance of the particular form of character
in the typewriter of this and indented subclasses is that such characters
cannot be altered without detection; thus, the amount of money that
the check represents will not be raised in value. | |
| | |
| 138 | By type-die mounted on carrier movable for selection of
character: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 137. Subject matter+ wherein a typewriter is provided
with a support for a multiplicity of type-die elements for piercing
the different character* symbols that the typewriter is
capable of piercing, which support is enabled to be moved relative
to the record-medium* whereby any of the type-die elements
may be selected to be impressed against the record-medium and the selected
type-die element may be impressed to pierce a character symbol on
the record-medium.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 129, | for similar structure for mounting embossing type-die
elements thereon. |
|
| | |
| 138.1 | Electrically powered: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 138. Subject matter wherein electricity is used to energize selection
of type-die* or operation of a function* of the
typewriter. |
| | |
| 138.2 | On rotatable carrier (e.g., for scarifying elements, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 138. Subject matter wherein the support for the type-die elements
is a member that turns about an axis to select the type-die to be
impressed against the record-medium*.
| | (1)
Note. In the typewriter of this subclass the type-die elements
usually pierce one surface of the record-medium to roughen that
surface beyond a level where the surface may be made smooth again.
The intent is not necessarily for the type-die to perforate both
surfaces of the record-medium, but rather to scarify at least one surface. | |
| | |
| 138.3 | Actuated by key-board control: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 138.2. Subject matter wherein the type-die* element that
is to be impressed against the record-medium* is selected
by pressing a corresponding key* element located on a key-board*,
the pressing of which key causes selection of a type-die and movement
of the selected type-die to the print-point*. |
| | |
| 138.4 | Including plural-character type-die: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 138.2. Subject matter wherein at least one of the type-die* elements
is constructed so as to have type-dies representing or corresponding
to more than one character* symbol, whereby when one of
such elements is impressed against the record-medium*,
a plurality of character symbols will be formed in the record-medium.
| | (1)
Note. The typewriter of this subclass usually imprints an
amount of money spelled in letter symbols rather than numeral symbols. | |
| | |
| 138.6 | For type-die including piercing or cutting elements: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 138.2. Subject matter wherein the type-die* elements include
slender elements, each having a sharp point at one end, or include
elements, each having a sharp edge, which sharp point or edges penetrate
through both opposite surfaces of the record-medium* as
the type-die impacts the record-medium. |
| | |
| 139 | INCLUDING TYPE-SET-ASSEMBLAGE MOUNTED ON CARRIER AND RELATIVELY
MOVABLE FOR SELECTION AND FOR IMPACT OF TYPE-FACE: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein a typewriter is provided with a type-head-carrier* or
with a type-face-carrier*, either of which carriers supports
a type-set-assemblage* for movement of the type-face* elements
thereon relative to the record-medium*, whereby any of
the type-face elements may be selected or chosen to be impressed
against a record-medium and the selected or chosen type-face element
may be impressed to imprint a character* symbol.
| | (1)
Note. The definition of type-head- carrier in the Glossary,
section III, discusses the difference between a type-head-carrier
and a type-face-carrier. Briefly, a type-head-carrier supports a
type-head* wherein all type-faces are integral one with
the others, whereas a type-face-carrier supports type-faces that
are movable, one with respect to the others. The difference between "selected" and "chosen" is
also discussed in the Glossary under the definition of case-shift* and other
definitions. Briefly, a particular type-face is selected from among
the many available from a type-set-assemblage whereas an upper-case* form
of letter (as distinguished from a lower-case* form of
the same letter) is chosen from the forms available on one key* element. |
| | (2)
Note. In some typewriters movement of the selected or chosen
type-face for impact is a relative movement; that is, in these typewriters
the platen* (and the record-medium supported thereby) are moved
toward the selected or chosen type-face, whereas in most typewriters the
type-face moves toward the platen. |
| | (3)
Note. The definition of type-bar-segment* discusses
the differencebetween a type-bar-segment and a type-face-carrier.
Briefly, a type-bar-segment supports a type-set assemblage for
case-shift movement (i.e., choice of upper-case or lower-case),
whereas a type-face-carrier supports a type-set- assemblage for selection
of type-face from among many type-faces as well as for choice of
upper-case or lower-case. | |
| | |
| 140 | Including type-faces movable relative to type-face-carrier: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 139. Subject matter wherein a typewriter is provided with a type-face-carrier* that
supports a type-set-assemblage* comprising a plurality
of separate type-face* elements, and wherein the typewriter
is also provided with a mechanism for selecting or choosing the
particular type-face that is to be impressed against the record-medium* and
with a mechanism for moving said type-face toward the print-point*.
| | (1)
Note. In this and indented subclasses the term type-face
may include, for example, an element carrying both the upper-case* and
lower-case* forms of the same letter, and both forms on
the same element are moved together, although only the chosen form
of the letter is impressed against the record-medium. The relative movement
referred to is that which moves the element for the selected letter away
from the other type-face elements of a type-set-assemblage and toward
the print-point. | |
| | |
| 141 | Slidable type-faces mounted on reciprocable carrier: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 140. Subject matter wherein the type-face-carrier* supports
a plurality of type-face* elements each of which elements
may be reciprocated relative to the type-face-carrier, and wherein the
type-face-carrier may be reciprocated relative to the typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. The direction of reciprocation of the type-face elements
is usually perpendicular to the direction of reciprocation of the
type-face-carrier. | |
| | |
| 141.1 | On rotatable or oscillatable carrier reciprocable along
its axis: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 141. Subject matter wherein the type-face-carrier* may
be reciprocated relative to the typewriter and may also be turned
in one direction of to-and-fro in opposite directions about an axis
of turning, and wherein the reciprocation of the type-face carrier
is along a line that coincides with said axis of turning. |
| | |
| 142 | Slidable type-faces on rotatable carrier: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 140. Subject matter wherein the type-face-carrier* supports
a plurality of type-face* elements each of which elements
may be reciprocated relative to the type-face-carrier, and wherein the
type-face-carrier may be turned on an axis relative to the typewriter. |
| | |
| 143 | Rotatable type-face-carrier including type-faces on pivotable
arms: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 140. Subject matter wherein the type-face-carrier* supports
a plurality of members, each of which members is oscillatable to
and fro on its own axis, and each of which members supports one of
the type-face* elements of a type-set-assemblage*,
and wherein the type-face-carrier may be turned on an axis relative
to the typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. Usually the members (i.e., pivotable arms) extend in
a direction parallel to the axis of the type-face-carrier and pivot
in a direction extending radially of the axis. | |
| | |
| 144 | Type-face-carrier including type-faces on flexible arms: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 140. Subject matter wherein the type-face-carrier* supports
a plurality of members, each of which members is resilient and oscillatable
to and fro relative to the carrier, and each of which members supports
one of the type-face* elements of a type-set-assemblage*. |
| | |
| 144.1 | Rotatable or oscillatable carrier: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 144. Subject matter wherein the type-face-carrier* may
be turned relative to the typewriter either in one direction or
to and fro in opposite directions about an axis of turning, thereby
to turn the plurality of members and type-face* elements
relative to the typewriter. |
| | |
| 144.2 | Carrier having coplanar flexible arms (e.g., "daisy" wheel,
etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 144.1. Subject matter wherein the type-face carrier* includes
the plurality of resilient members, and wherein the members extend
radially from the axis of the carrier in substantially the same plane,
and each member, and the type-face* element supported thereby,
oscillates in a second plane that is coincident with said axis.
| | (1)
Note. The term "daisy" wheel has been applied
to this form of type-set- assemblage* and carrier due to
its resemblance to a daisy. | |
| | |
| 145 | Type-faces on deformable type-face-carrier: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 140. Subject matter wherein the type-face-carrier* is
made of a material that is resilient and supports a plurality of
type-face* elements thereon, and wherein the selected or
chosen type-face is yieldably displaced relative to the type-faces
remaining in the type-set-assemblage* and the displaced
type-face is impressed against the record-medium*. |
| | |
| 145.2 | Cylindrical carrier: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 145.1. Subject matter wherein the type-face-carrier* has
the configuration of a cylinder or a cylindroid.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 152, | for a type drum having a cylindrical appearance. |
|
| | |
| 146 | Including endless-band carrier for type-faces: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 139. Subject matter wherein a typewriter is provided with a member
that supports a type-set-assemblage* for movement of the
type-face* elements therewith relative to the typewriter, which
member is an elongated, closed-loop strip trained around two or
more pulleys and movable in the direction of its elongation to select
or choose the type-face to be impressed, and which type-face elements
are moved with the strip in a direction substantially perpendicular
to the elongation toward the record-medium* to impress
the type-face against the record-medium.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 134, | for an endless-band type-face-carrier* in
an embossing typewriter. |
|
| | |
| 147 | Type-faces arranged in rectilinear row and selected by
reciprocable movement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 139. Subject matter wherein a typewriter is provided with a member
that supports a type-set-assemblage* for movement of the
type-face* elements therewith relative to the typewriter, which
member may be reciprocated along a first straight line for selection
or choice of the type-face elements thereon, and on which member
the type-face elements are supported in a second straight line that
is parallel to said first straight line.
| | (1)
Note. The reciprocating movement defined above is that which
is needed for selection of choice of a type-face. There may also
be another movement, for example, a pivoting motion toward the record-medium*,
imparted to the member for impressing the type-face against the
record-medium. | |
| | |
| 148 | On rotatable carrier having plural rectilinear rows: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 147. Subject matter wherein the member is reciprocated along
said first straight line and also may be turned about an axis that
is parallel to said first straight line, and on which member two
or more sets of type-face* elements are supported, each
set in a straight line parallel to said first straight line.
| | (1)
Note. Each set of type-face elements defined above may comprise
all or part of a type-set-assemblage*, or may comprise
upper-case* or lower-case* forms of the same letter,
or may comprise type-set-assemblage having different font* assortments
of type-faces. The rotation of the member enables selection or choice
from among the type-faces of different sets of type-faces. | |
| | |
| 150 | Type-heads arranged for selective individual imprinting
movement away from coaxial rest position: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 149. Subject matter wherein each of the type-head* elements
is supported for rotation on its own axis of rotation and each of
the type-heads may be moved toward the print-point* of
the typewriter separately from the other(s) to imprint the selected
or chosen type-face* element on the record-medium* and
wherein all of the axes of rotation of all the type-head elements are
normally in the same line, the selected type-head being moved away
from said line when it is moved toward the print-point. |
| | |
| 151 | Turret carrier for type-heads: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 149. Subject matter wherein the type-head* elements
are each supported on a platform or member, which platform or member
is capable of rotation about an axis of rotation, and each of the
type-head elements being capable of separate movement toward the
print-point* of the typewriter. |
| | |
| 151.1 | Axis of turret carrier parallel to platen axis: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 151. Subject matter wherein the print-point* is located
on or adjacent to the platen* of the typewriter, which
platen is rotatable about an axis, and wherein the axis of rotation
of said platform is parallel to the axis of rotation of the platen. |
| | |
| 152 | Type drum having multiple type-set-assemblages: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 139. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with a
member that is (a) cylindrical or cylindroidal, (b) rotatable about
an axis that extends through the cylinder parallel to the circumference
of the cylinder, and (c) supporting a plurality of type-set-assemblage* groups
of type-face* elements on the circumference of the cylinder.
| | (1)
Note. Usually the type drum extends in length to substantially
the full width of the record-medium* and each of the type-set-assemblages
extends around the circumference of the type drum. The number of
type-set-assemblages provided on the type drum corresponds to the
number of character* symbols and character-space* distances
that may be included within the width of the record-medium. Selection
of type-face for the first character of a print-line* is
made from the first type-set-assemblage and selection of the second
character of that print-line is made from the next adjacent type-set-assemblage,
the action being repeated until the entire print-line has been imprinted. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 145.2, | for a cylindrical, deformable type-face-carrier*. |
|
| | |
| 154.1 | Including selection of type-face: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 154. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with mechanism
for selecting or choosing the particular type-face* that
is to be impressed against the record-medium* by the movement
of the record-medium toward the type-face.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 161.1, | for selecting mechanism on a typewriter having a
type-head* movable for imprinting. |
|
| | |
| 154.3 | By shortest peripheral path: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 154.1. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with a
type-head* having a cylindroidal or spheroidal surface
having the type-face* elements of a type-set-assemblage* thereon, which
type-head is normally in a particular rest position and is moved
to a second position at which the selected or chosen type-face will
be impressed against the record-medium*, and wherein significance
is attributed to movement of the type-head that results in the least
amount of type-head movement as it moves from the rest position
to the second position. |
| | |
| 154.4 | Via coded disc in electric or magnetic circuit (e.g., photoelectric): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 154.1. Subject matter . wherein said selecting mechanism, includes
one or more circular plates, each plate being rotatable to a position
where particular index characteristics on the plate(s) are related
to an arrangement within the mechanism that causes completion of
an electrical or magnetic circuit, the completion of the circuit effecting
selection or choice of the type-face* desired by the typist.
| | (1)
Note. The index characteristics may be, for example, notches
or apertures in the discs, which permit passage of a beam of light
that actuates a photoelectric cell when the notches or apertures
in several discs are aligned, or may be magnetic code in one or
more discs, which completes a circuit when proper alignment of the
code disc(s) is accomplished. | |
| | |
| 154.5 | Via stepping motor responsive to selection: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 154.1. Subject matter wherein said selecting mechanism includes
an electric motor that rotates incrementally, the rotation being
caused by the selection or choice of a type-face* and the motor
being connected to a type-head* that supports the type-face
elements. |
| | |
| 155 | Via electrical or electromagnetic means: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 154.1. Subject matter wherein said selecting mechanism includes
an electrical circuit or an electromagnetic device connected to
a type-head* that supports the type-face* elements.
| | (1)
Note. The mechanism or circuit for this subclass may include
a commutator, a solenoid, an electromagnetic coil, an induction
coil, or other similar device used in the selection or choice of
a type-face. | |
| | |
| 155.1 | Including plural-function actuation by electromagnet(s): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 155. Subject matter wherein said selecting mechanism includes
an electromagnet powered by an electrical current, and wherein the
typewriter includes mechanism for performing at least one other
function*, which function is energized by either the same
electromagnet that energizes the selecting mechanism or by a different
electromagnet powered by an electrical current. |
| | |
| 156 | Via helical arrangement of projections: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 154.1. Subject matter wherein said selecting mechanism includes
a rotatable cylindroidal member having elements on the cylindrical
surface thereof that protrude from the surface, which elements are
arranged to form a helix on the cylindrical surface and which elements
engage portions of the selecting mechanism to connect the mechanism
to a type-head* that supports the type-face* elements. |
| | |
| 156.1 | Via mechanically permutated bar(s), disc(s), or plate(s): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 154.1. Subject matter wherein said selecting mechanism includes
one or more members, each member being either (a) an elongated component
that is movable along its length, or (b) a circular component that
is rotatable, or (c) a flat and relatively thin component that is
movable in a plane parallel to its width and length dimensions,
and also having particular index characteristics on the member,
which member(s) is/are moved to a position relative to
an arrangement within the mechanism where the index characteristics
are aligned to enable movement of another component of the mechanism
to effect selection or choice of the type-face* desired
by the typist. |
| | |
| 156.2 | Via planetary gear arrangement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 154.1. Subject matter wherein said selecting mechanism includes
a plurality of toothed wheels in mesh one with the other(s) and
at least one rotating and revolving about another, while in mesh
therewith, which assemblage of toothed wheels in connected to a
type-head* that supports type-face* elements,
one of which elements is to be selected or chosen for impression. |
| | |
| 156.3 | Including latch means: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 156.2. Subject matter wherein the assemblage of toothed elements
is provided with means to temporarily secure the toothed elements together
until the selected or chosen type-face* has been impressed
against the record-medium*. |
| | |
| 157 | Including type-faces arranged along helical path(s): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 154. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with a
type-head* that is formed as a rotatable, cylindroidal
member having type-face* elements on the cylindroidal surface thereof,
which type-face elements are arrayed as a helix on the cylindroidal
surface, and wherein selection or choice of the type-face that is
to be impressed against the record-medium* is made from
one of the helically arrayed elements.
| | (1)
Note. The type-set-assemblage* of type-faces may
be arranged in one or more helical paths. | |
| | |
| 157.3 | For variable impression (e.g., impact control): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 157.1. Subject matter wherein movement of the striking member is
regulated as to its striking force, whereby the striking force can
be changed as desired.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 116, | for impact control in a typewriter wherein a type-head* moves
toward the record-medium. |
|
| | |
| 157.4 | Hammer(s) mounted on endless belt or in helical array: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 157.1. Subject matter wherein the striking member(s) is/are
supported on an elongated, closed-loop strip trained around two
or more pulleys and movable in the direction of its elongation,
or wherein the striking members are supported on a rotatable, cylindroidal
component and are arranged in a helix around the circumference of said
component. |
| | |
| 158 | Including platen for moving record-medium against type-face
and mechanism for feeding record-medium: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 153. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with a
platen* that is a backup for the record-medium* and
is also provided with a mechanism for moving the record-medium in
a line-space* direction, which platen also moves the record-medium
toward the selected or chosen type-face* for imprint of
a character* symbol on the record-medium.
| | (1)
Note. In this subclass the record-medium is moved in a line-space
direction by a mechanism other than the platen. | |
| | |
| 160 | Imprint by pivoting of type-head-carrier and type-head
against record-medium: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 139. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with a
type-head-carrier* that supports a type-head* for
movement relative to said carrier so that any of the type-face* elements
on the type-head may be selected or chosen to be impressed on the
record-medium*, and wherein the type-head-carrier is supported
for arcuate movement of said carrier toward the record-medium to
imprint the corresponding character* symbol on the record-medium. |
| | |
| 161 | Type-head-carrier movable on movable carriage: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 160. Subject matter wherein said type-head-carrier* is
mounted on a carriage* to be arcuately movable toward the
record-medium* to impress a selected or chosen type-face* against
the record-medium, and wherein said carriage is movable to impart
character-space* and word-space* distances to
the carriage and the type-head-carrier that is mounted thereon. |
| | |
| 161.1 | Including selection of type-face (e.g., on "golf-ball" type-head): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 161. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with selecting
mechanism for moving the type-head* relative to its type-head-carrier* to select
or choose the particular type-face* that is to be impressed
against the record-medium* by movement of the type-head
toward the record-medium.
| | (1)
Note. The term "golf-ball" type-head has
been applied to the type-heads of this subclass because of the spheroidal
configuration of the type-head elements found herein. | |
| | |
| 161.2 | Via gear train: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 161.1. Subject matter wherein said mechanism for selecting or choosing
the particular type-face* is driven by an assemblage of
toothed wheels or toothed members in mesh, one with the other(s),
which assemblage is connected to a type-head* that supports
type-face elements, one of which elements is to be selected or chosen
for impression. |
| | |
| 161.5 | Via multiple cam surfaces: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 161.1. Subject matter wherein said mechanism for selecting or choosing
the particular type-face* is driven by a plurality of cam
surfaces that are connected by way of cam surface followers to the
type-head* that supports type-face elements, one of which
elements is to be selected or chosen for impression.
| | (1)
Note. A "cam surface" is defined as the edge
periphery of a disc that rotates about an axis, the radial distance
from the axis to the periphery varying around the periphery. As
the disc rotates, the distance of a follower that is in contact with
the periphery will increase and decrease relative to the axis of
the disc, thus the rotation of the disc will effect substantially
radial movement of the follower. The cam surfaces may be on separate
disc elements or may be on a single member having separate cam surfaces. | |
| | |
| 162 | Type-head movable for selection of type-face: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 160. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with selecting
mechanism for moving the type-head* relatively to its type-head-carrier* to
select or choose the particular type-face* that is to be
impressed against the record-medium* by movement of the
type-head toward the record-medium.
| | (1)
Note. The difference between this subclass (162) and subclass
161.1 above is that in this subclass the type-head is movable for
selection of the particular type-face, whereas in subclass 161.1
the type-head is mounted on a type-head-carrier that is movable
toward the record-medium, and the type-head-carrier is mounted on
a carriage* that is movable for character-space* distances. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 154.1, | for selecting a mechanism in a typewriter having
a hammer movable for imprinting. |
| 161.1, | and see (1) Note above. |
|
| | |
| 162.1 | Via pulley and cord arrangement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 162. Subject matter wherein said selecting mechanism includes
an elongated, flexible element trained around a plurality of rotatable
wheels, the mechanism being connected to a type-head* that
supports the type-face* elements. |
| | |
| 162.2 | Via shortest peripheral path: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 162. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with a
type-head* having a cylindroidal or spheroidal surface
having the type-face* elements of a type-set-assemblage* thereon, which
type-head is normally in a particular rest position and is moved
to a second position at which the selected or chosen type-face will
be impressed against the record-medium*, and wherein significance
is attributed to movement of the type-head that results in the least
amount of type-head movement as it moves from the rest position
to the second position. |
| | |
| 162.3 | Via coded disc in electric or magnetic circuit (e.g., photoelectric): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 162. Subject matter wherein said selecting mechanism includes
one or more circular plates, each plate being rotatable to a position
where particular index characteristics on the plate(s) are related
to an arrangement within the mechanism that causes completion of
an electrical or magnetic circuit, the completion of the circuit effecting
selection or choice of the type-face* desired by the typist.
| | (1)
Note. The index characteristics may be, for example, notches
or apertures in the discs, which permit passage of a beam of light,
that actuates a photoelectric cell when the notches or apertures
in several discs are aligned, or may be a magnetic code in one or
more discs, which completes a circuit when proper alignment of the
code disc(s) is accomplished. | |
| | |
| 163 | Via stepping motor responsive to selection: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 162. Subject matter wherein said selecting mechanism includes
an electric motor that rotates incrementally, the rotation being
caused by the selection or choice of a type-face* and the motor
being connected to a type-head* that supports the type-face
elements. |
| | |
| 163.1 | Via electrical or electromagnetic means: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 162. Subject matter wherein said selecting mechanism includes
an electrical circuit or an electromagnetic device connected to
a type-head* that supports the type-face* elements.
| | (1)
Note. The mechanism or circuit for this subclass may include
a commutator, a solenoid, an electromagnetic coil, an induction
coil, or other similar device used in the selection or choice of
a type-face. | |
| | |
| 163.3 | Including plural-function actuation by electromagnet(s): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 163.1. Subject matter wherein said selecting mechanism includes
an electromagnet powered by an electrical current, and wherein the
typewriter includes mechanism for performing at least one other
function*, which function is energized by either the same
electromagnet that energizes the selecting mechanism or by a different
electromagnet powered by an electrical current. |
| | |
| 164 | Via helical arrangement of projections: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 162. Subject matter wherein said selecting mechanism includes
a rotatable cylindroidal member having elements on the cylindrical
surface thereof that protrude from the surface, which elements are
arranged to form a helix on the cylindrical surface and which elements
engage portions of the selecting mechanism to connect the mechanism
to a type-head* that supports the type-face* elements. |
| | |
| 164.1 | Via pneumatic actuation: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 162. Subject matter wherein said selecting mechanism is caused
to operate by the energy that is transmitted and said mechanism
by way of exertion of a force upon a gaseous material. |
| | |
| 164.2 | Via setting elements actuating selector-command members: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 162. Subject matter wherein said selecting mechanism includes
one or more members, each member being either (a) an elongated component
that is movable along its length, or (b) a circular component that
is rotatable, or (c) a flat and relatively thin component that is
movable in a plane parallel to its width and length dimensions,
and also having particular index characteristics on the member,
which member(s) is/are moved to a position relative to
an arrangement within the mechanism where the index characteristics
are aligned to enable movement of another component of the mechanism
to effect selection or choice of the type-face* desired
by the typist. |
| | |
| 164.3 | Control arm connected to selection gear and movable to
engage key-lever-actuated abutment: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 162. Subject matter wherein said selecting mechanism includes
a pivotable lever having at one end thereof a toothed portion that
is in mesh with a toothed wheel that is associated with and drives
the type-head*, which lever has at the other end thereof
a portion that will engage any of a plurality of stops when one
of the stops is interposed into the path of pivoting of the lever, the
inter-position of the selected stop to be engaged being made by
the depression of a selected key* element. |
| | |
| 164.4 | Via stop pins actuatable by key-board: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 162. Subject matter wherein said selecting mechanism includes
a plurality of slender, elongated elements that are connected to
the type-head* for movement there of, each of said elements being
also connected to and moved by the depression of a selected key* element. |
| | |
| 164.5 | Toothed member connected to selection gear and slidable
by key-lever movement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 162. Subject matter wherein said selecting mechanism includes
a bar having serrations or teeth along one edge thereof, the serrations
being in mesh with a toothed wheel that is linked to the type-head* for
movement thereof, which bar is reciprocated to various extents in
accordance with the selection of a particular key* element and
the depression of the selected key. |
| | |
| 164.6 | Selection gear rotated by key-lever movement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 162. Subject matter wherein said selecting mechanism includes
a toothed wheel connected to the type-head* for movement
thereof, which toothed wheel is turned by the depression of a key* element
corresponding to the selected character* symbol desired
to be typed. |
| | |
| 165 | Simultaneous rotation and translation of type-head by manually
powered actuation (e.g., helical shift): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 162. Subject matter wherein said selecting mechanism moves a
type-head* that is formed as a rotatable cylindroidal member
having type-face* elements on the cylindroidal surface thereof,
which type-face elements are arrayed as a helix on the cylindroidal
surface, and wherein selection or choice of the type-face that is
to be impressed against a record-medium* is made by turning
the member about its axis of rotation and moving the member along
the axis at the same time it is turning, the movement being caused
by a hand of the typist. |
| | |
| 165.1 | Via manually powered actuation other than by key-board
(e.g., stylus selection): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 162. Subject matter wherein selection or choice of the type-face* that
is to be impressed against the record-medium* is made by
a typist who moves a member that is part of a selecting mechanism
that does not include a key-board*.
| | (1)
Note. In this subclass (165.1) the typist manipulates a slender,
elongated rod (i.e., a stylus) to select or choose the particular
type-face for impression. | |
| | |
| 165.2 | Including type-head movable to print-point by actuator
common to all type-faces: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 165.1. Subject matter wherein said mechanism includes a type-head* that
is moved from a rest position to the print-point* position
by a member that causes only such movement, and wherein selection
or choice of the type-face* element that is to be impressed
against the record-medium* is made by a hand of the typist.
| | (1)
Note. In most typewriters that include a type-head having
a type-set-assemblage* thereon, depression of a key* element
causes at least two movements of the type-head. One such movements
is for selection or choice of the type-face that is to be impressed,
and another movement is for moving the type-head against the print-point;
therefore an actuator for each key element is required. In a typewriter
of this subclass, selection is made by a typist who moves the type-head
manually, and movement of the type-head to the print-point is made
by a single actuator that only moves the type-head to the print-point.
A typewriter with this kind of mechanism is often called a "toy" typewriter. |
| | (2)
Note. In this subclass (165.2) selection of the particular
type-face may be made by rotating the type-head manually or with
the aid of a rack and pinion that is manually powered. | |
| | |
| 165.3 | Selection by rotatable dial: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 165.2. Subject matter wherein the type-head* has affixed
thereto a plate bearing indicia, letters or character* symbols
corresponding to those which may be imprinted on the record-medium*,
which plate is turned by a hand of the typist to thereby turn the
type-head for selection or choice of the type-face* to
be impressed against the record-medium. |
| | |
| 166 | Including impact control: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 160. Subject matter wherein the arcuate movement of said type-head-carrier* toward
the record-medium* is regulated as to its impression force,
whereby the impression force can be changed as desired.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 157.3, | for impact control in a typewriter wherein a hammer
moves the record-medium toward a selected type-face*. |
|
| | |
| 167 | Including rebound control: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 160. Subject matter wherein the type-head-carrier* is
supported for arcuate movement from a rest position to a print-point* and
for return arcuate movement from the print-point to the rest position,
and wherein the return movement is regulated as to the force with
which the type-head* is returned whereby the type-head
will come to rest gently, or wherein the return movement is stopped
as soon as the type-head reaches its rest position whereby the type-head
is prevented from springing away from its rest position after return. |
| | |
| 168 | Articulated-support joint: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 160. Subject matter wherein the type-head-carrier* is
supported for arcuate movement from a rest position to a print-point* and
for return arcuate movement from the print-point to the rest position,
and wherein significance is attributed to the connection between
the type-head-carrier and its support, which connection enables
the arcuate movement to occur. |
| | |
| 169 | Detenting to fix type-head for imprinting: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 160. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with mechanism
on the type-head-carrier* to temporarily secure the type-head* to the
type-head-carrier while said carrier is moving toward the record-medium* whereby
the selected or chosen type-face* element will not move
relative to the type-head-carrier. |
| | |
| 170 | Including movable printing anvil within type-head: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 160. Subject matter wherein the type-head* is a hollow
member having type-face* elements on the exterior surface
thereof, and wherein the member is provided with one or more elements adjacent
to the interior surface of the member, which element(s) move(s)
to engage the interior surface opposite to the type-face element that
has been selected or chosen to be impressed against the record-medium*. |
| | |
| 172 | Type-faces mounted on type chips and removable from storage
for printing: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 139. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with a
type-set-assemblage* comprising type-face* elements
all of which elements are separate and separable one from the others,
and all of which elements are supported in or on a type-face-carrier* from
which carrier each selected or chosen type-face is taken for impression
of the type-face against a record-medium* and replaced
into the carrier. |
| | |
| 173 | With means for exposing last-typed character: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 139. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to means
for showing the typist the character* symbol that was imprinted
just prior to the time that the typist wished to see the character.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 124.01+, | for similar subject matter in a "matrix" printer
typewriter. |
|
| | |
| 174 | Type-head, per se: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 139. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
type-head* that bears a type-set-assemblage* in
a typewriter. |
| | |
| 176 | HAVING FLUID-PRESSURE POWER DRIVE: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein a typewriter or a portion thereof
is caused to operate by energy that is derived from or transmitted
via the exertion of force upon a fluid (i.e., a flowable material).
| | (1)
Note. The most usual fluid employed in these typewriters
is air, but a liquid may also be employed as a fluid-pressure means. | |
| | |
| 177 | Including pneumatic decoder for perforated tape: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 176. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is controlled for
operation by a mechanism that includes (a) a strip having holes
therein, and (b) means for moving the strip relative to a bar having
holes therein whereby the strip will cover the holes in the bar
except when a hole in the strip matches a hole in the bar, and (c) means
for passing air or gas through the holes in the bar when a hole
in the bar is uncovered by a hole in the strip, whereby a signal
or pulse is generated by the passage of air or gas through a hole
in the bar, and (d) means for converting the signals or pulses so
generated into one or more operation(s) of the typewriter. |
| | |
| 178 | For producing typewriter-control tape (e.g., perforated
tape, etc.) |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 176. Subject matter wherein the energy of said fluid is used
to form indicia on a strip that will subsequently be used to regulate
the operation(s) of a typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. The fluid pressure may be applied to a punch (or a
plurality of punches) that cause a tape to be perforated, or may be
applied to form indicia on a tape that will control a typewriter. | |
| | |
| 179 | For type-face selection or choice: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 176. Subject matter wherein the energy of said fluid is used
to select or choose a type-face* element that is to be
impressed against a record-medium*, or is used to cause
the selected or chosen type-face element to be impressed against
the record-medium to imprint a character* symbol thereon.
| | (1)
Note. In this subclass the typewriter usually operates by
a typist depressing a key* element, the movement of the
key producing the air pressure that actuates a type-bar* (to
which the selected type-face is affixed) from rest position to the print-point* position. |
| | (2)
Note. The terms "select" and "choose" (or
variants of those terms) and the differences between the terms are
discussed in the Glossary under definitions such as case-shift*,
type-face-carrier*, type-head* and type-head-carrier*.
Briefly, a particular type-face is selected from among the many
available from a type-set-assemblage*, whereas an upper-case* form
of letter (as distinguished from a lower-case* form of
the same letter) is chosen from the forms available on one key* element. | |
| | |
| 181 | By pneumatic actuation of type-face or type-bar: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 179. Subject matter wherein the energy of said fluid is used
to cause a selected or chosen type-face* element or a type-bar* carrying
such element to be impressed against the record-medium* to imprint
a character* symbol thereon. |
| | |
| 183 | Including line-spacing: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 182. Subject matter wherein the motion of either the carriage* or
of the platen* is such as to effect line-space* distances
to the record-medium*. |
| | |
| 184 | HAVING TYPEWRITER-CONTROLLED RECIPROCABLE ELECTROMAGNETIC
DRIVE FOR PLURAL FUNCTIONS IN SAME TYPEWRITER: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with means
to actuate the operation of more than one function* thereof,
each of said means including a magnetic* motor energized by
electricity and movable to-and-fro in a straight line, and the actuation
of each of said means being initiated by a typist who is typing on
the typewriter that is being actuated.
| | (1)
Note. The "motor" of this subclass is usually
a solenoid energized by electricity and initiated by pressing a
switch that is connected to a key* element other than a
character* key. For similar structure wherein character
key elements actuate type-bar* action mechanisms, see subclass
359. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 359, | and see (1) Note above. |
|
| | |
| 185 | HAVING POWER-DRIVEN OPERATOR FOR PLURAL FUNCTIONS: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with means
to actuate the operation of more than one function* thereof,
each of said means being energized by force other than that supplied
by the typist.
| | (1)
Note. For the purposes of this and indented subclasses, the
operation of line-space* means is considered to be equivalent
to the operation of record-medium* feeding means and effectively is
only a single function. | |
| | |
| 186 | Via continuously rotated power roll selectively connected
to operate: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 185. Subject matter wherein the energizing force drives one function* or
another function at the will of the typist by way of a continuously rotated
power roll.
| | (1)
Note. The term "continuously rotated power roll" is
defined below in subclass 370 as that structure is applied to operate selected
type-bar* members. In this subclass (186) a similar structure
is used to operate a selected one of plural functions or is used
to operate an auxiliary function. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 370, | and see (1) Note above. |
|
| | |
| 188 | FOR TYPING ON REVERSE SURFACE OF RECORD-MEDIUM: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein a record-medium* has a first
surface which faces toward a platen*, and the record-medium
has a second surface which faces toward a type-face* when the
type-face is at a print-point*, and wherein significance
is attributed to imprinting character* symbols on the first
surface of the record-medium.
| | (1)
Note. The characters are usually in mirror image, and the
record-medium is either transparent so as to be able to read the
characters through the record-medium, or the record-medium is a "hectograph" master.
See Glossary, section III, for further discussion of hectograph under
terms ribbon* and transfer-medium*. | |
| | |
| 189 | By simultaneous use of both surfaces of same ribbon: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 188. Subject matter wherein a ribbon* is used as a transfer-medium* for
imprinting said character* symbols on said first surface,
and wherein the same ribbon is used as a transfer-medium for imprinting
corresponding character symbols on another record-medium surface
or on a surface of another record-medium at the same time the character
symbols are imprinted on the first surface. |
| | |
| 190 | By use of "carbon paper": |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 188. Subject matter wherein carbon paper is used as a transfer-medium* for
imprinting said character* symbols on said first surface.
| | (1)
Note. See (1) Note under subclass 497 in this class for a
discussion of the term carbon paper. | |
| | |
| 191 | INCLUDING INTERPOSED INKING DEVICE (E.G., RIBBON) FOR RECORD-MEDIUM: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a transfer-medium* which
is intended to be positioned between a record-medium* and
a type-face* to have simultaneous surface contact with
the type-face and the record-medium to form a character* on
the record-medium, or to the manner of renewing the transfer characteristics
of the transfer-medium while it is on the typewriter, or to the manner
of holding the transfer-medium on the typewriter, or to the manner
of moving the transfer-medium relative to the print-point* on the
typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. A transfer-medium which is only for correction of an
error in typing is found in this class, subclass 697. |
| | (2)
Note. Inking a type-face directly for forming a character
without the use of an interposed transfer-medium is found in various
subclasses in this class indented under subclass 383. |
| | (3)
Note. This subclass (191) provides for an interposed inking
member having a configuration other than an elongated ribbon*. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 383, | and see (2) Note above. |
| 697, | and see (1) Note above. |
|
| | |
| 192 | Moved by continuously rotating power drive intermittently
applied: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 191. Subject matter wherein the transfer-medium* is
a ribbon* having a length dimension and a width dimension,
and wherein movement along either dimension is imparted to the ribbon
by way of a rotated power drive intermittently applied, the rotation
of the drive shaft not stopping during the operation of the typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. The term "rotated power drive intermittently
applied" is defined below in subclass 365 as that term
is applied to operate selected type-bar* members. In this
subclass (192) a similar structure is used to cause feeding of a
ribbon or actuation of the vibrator* for a ribbon. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 365, | and see (1) Note above. |
|
| | |
| 193 | Inking device handheld during typing: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 191. Subject matter wherein the transfer-medium* is
manually supported between the record-medium* and the type-face* as
the type-face is impressed against the record-medium through the
transfer-medium. |
| | |
| 194 | Endless ribbon or cartridge therefor: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 191. Subject matter wherein the transfer-medium* is
a ribbon* in the form of a closed-loop band having an elongated
dimension.
| | (1)
Note. The ribbon may be driven in a single direction, thus
avoiding need for ribbon-reversing structure. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 237, | for an ink* ribbon, per se. |
|
| | |
| 195 | Mobius strip: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 194. Subject matter wherein the ribbon is a one-sided surface
formed by holding a first end of an elongated rectangle fixed, rotating
the opposite end 180 about an axis coincident with a centerline
of the rectangle parallel to the long dimension thereof, and securing
the opposite end to the first end.
| | (1)
Note. A Mobius strip is a unique topological phenomenon in
that an object formed as described above will apparently have two "surfaces",
but mathematically and actually will have only one surface. This
can be proved by forming a Mobius strip as described and then applying
a mark along the surface continuously along the length thereof without
lifting the marker from the surface or crossing the edge of the
strip. The experimenter will find that the marker will eventually
reach the mark initially produced, thus proving the actuality of only
a single surface. In a ribbon*, this permits typing against
the apparently two "surfaces" without further
manipulation of the ribbon. | |
| | |
| 196.1 | Having ribbon stored in pleated form: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 196. Subject matter wherein the portion of the band in the holder
is folded in a regular pattern of folds that are transverse to the
elongated dimension of the band, and are alternately folded in opposite
folds. |
| | |
| 197 | Renovation of used ribbon: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 191. Subject matter wherein the transfer-medium* is
a ribbon* which ribbon during typing is at least partially
depleted of ink*, and the ribbon is treated to maintain
or increase its efficacy as a transfer-medium while the ribbon is
on the typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. Examples of ribbon treatment provided for in this subclass
are adding ink to the ribbon, moistening the ribbon, etc. | |
| | |
| 198 | With ink heater (e.g., for melting solid ink): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 197. Subject matter wherein ink* which is on or to be
added to the ribbon* is relatively thick, hard, or viscous
at normal room temperature, and wherein the typewriter is provided
with means for elevating the temperature of the ink to increase
its flowability.
| | (1)
Note. Also found in this subclass is a disclosure of means
to heat a record-medium* adjacent to the print-point* to promote
uniform distribution of the ink imprinted on the record-medium. | |
| | |
| 199 | By discrete auxiliary band movable with ribbon: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 197. Subject matter wherein the ribbon* is movable in
a direction parallel to its longitudinal extent while it is on the
typewriter, and the ribbon treatment includes contacting the ribbon
with a separate elongated strip of material, said strip moving in
face to face contact and concurrently with at least a portion of
the ribbon.
| | (1)
Note. The band may be loaded with ink* to replenish
the ink supply in the ribbon. | |
| | |
| 200 | Selectively actuatable re-inker: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 197. Subject matter wherein the ribbon* is treated by
a device which adds ink* to the ribbon; said device being
movable at the will of the typist, to either a position on the typewriter
at which the device is operative to add ink to a position at which
it is inoperative to add ink. |
| | |
| 201 | Of multicolor ribbon: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 197. Subject matter wherein the ribbon* which is treated
has plural fields of differently pigmented or tinted ink* materials. |
| | |
| 202.1 | Attached to ribbon spool: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 202. Subject matter wherein the ribbon* is wound in convolutions
on a reel, which is mounted on the typewriter, and the device for
adding ink* is mounted in or on said reel. |
| | |
| 202.4 | And re-inking roller: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 202.2. Subject matter wherein the ink* from the container
is supplied to the ribbon* via a rotatable member having
a cylindrical surface for receiving and transporting the ink. |
| | |
| 203 | Ribbon disposed within platen: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 191. Subject matter wherein the transfer-medium* is
a ribbon*, and the ribbon is housed interiorly of a hollow
typewriter platen*.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 242, | for a spool mounted on a typewriter. |
|
| | |
| 204 | For typing plural copies simultaneously with ribbon(s)
(e.g., duplicate typing): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 191. Subject matter wherein the transfer-medium* is
a ribbon* and wherein plural portions of the same ribbon,
or plural ribbons, are positionable relative to plural record-medium* pieces
so that a single impact of a type-face* against the record-medium* imprints
an identical character* on each of said pieces at the same
time.
| | (1)
Note. Proper placement of a patent into this or an indented
subclass requires recitation of a transfer-medium in ribbon form.
Usually the typewriter of these subclasses is used to type "duplicate original
copy" texts of typed material. The term "original
copy" refers to typed text that is imprinted with the use
of a ribbon coated with ink* to form characters that are
not |
| |
easily erased from the record-medium. The ribbon used may
be an inked fabric ribbon, although in some typewriters a different
form of ribbon, called a "carbon ribbon" or a "carbon-ink
ribbon" has come into use. An " original copy" is distinguished
from a "carbon copy" in at least two respects:
an original copy is on a record-medium that is located adjacent to
a fabric ribbon or a carbon ribbon at the print-point*,
so that a type-face will impact directly or through the ribbon to cause
transplacing of ink directly onto the surface of the record-medium,
and the character imprinted onto the original may be erased only
with difficulty; a carbon copy is on a record medium that under
lies an original copy and a sheet of transfer-medium, usually consisting
of "carbon paper", and the character imprinted
onto a carbon copy is erased easily. |
| | (2)
Note. In placing a patent as an original into this or one
of the subclasses indented hereunder, consideration must be taken
of the intent of the patent as determined by various criteria.
The primary criterion is the intent to produce a plurality of original
copy texts. This is determined by a positive disclosure of at least
one of the following criteria: (a) at least two record-medium pieces
are imprinted each via a ribbon with "permanent" (i.e.,
not easily erasable) ink, (b) the ribbon(s) being used are reversible
(i.e., fed in two opposite directions so that the ribbon is used
and reused). If the specification is not clear as to plural original
copy texts, the patent may be cross-referenced herein, but placed
as an original patent into subclass 497 as appropriate. The use
of carbon paper in typing carbon copies is found in this class,
subclass 497. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 497, | and see (2) Note above. |
|
| | |
| 205 | Including holder for short length of ribbon: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 204. Subject matter wherein there is provided a device for supporting
at least one ribbon* in position relative to a platen* to
receive a type-face* impact and wherein the length of the
ribbon or ribbons supported by said device approximates the platen
dimension along the print-line*. |
| | |
| 205.1 | Holder movable to inoperative position on typewriter: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 205. Subject matter wherein the device, while mounted on the
typewriter, is selectively positionable by the typist to move the
ribbon* or ribbons supported by the device to a position where
the ribbon or ribbons will not receive the type-face* impact.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 206.2, | for a similar holder for plural ribbons. |
|
| | |
| 206.1 | Including "carbon paper" ribbon: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 206. Subject matter wherein at least one ribbon* is
a ribbon formed from carbon paper.
| | (1)
Note. See (1) Note under subclass 497 in this class for a
discussion of the term carbon paper. | |
| | |
| 206.2 | And ribbon holder movable to inoperative position on typewriter: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 206. Subject matter wherein there is provided a device for supporting
at least one ribbon* in position on the typewriter to receive
a type-face* impact, and wherein said device, while mounted
on the typewriter is selectively positionable by the typist to move
the ribbon or ribbons supported by the device to a position where
the ribbon or ribbons will not receive the type-face impact.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 205.1, | for a similar holder for a short length of ribbon. |
|
| | |
| 206.3 | On plural coaxial spools: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 206. Subject matter wherein ribbon*-receiving reels are
provided to mount the ribbons on the typewriter, and wherein at
least two of the reels are so mounted on the typewriter, as to have
a common centerline about which the reels may rotate in paying-out
or taking-up the ribbons. |
| | |
| 206.4 | On single spool: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 206. Subject matter wherein at least one ribbon*-receiving
reel is provided to mount the ribbons on the typewriter, and wherein
more than one ribbon is convoluted on a single reel. |
| | |
| 207 | Package for ribbon facilitating mounting of ribbon on typewriter
(e.g., ribbon cartridge): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 191. Subject matter wherein the transfer-medium* is
a ribbon* housed in a receptacle, and wherein the ribbon
and receptacle are attachable to and removable from the typewriter
as a unit, or the receptacle contributes in simplifying attachment
of the ribbon to the typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. A ribbon spool for a typewriter with no additional
package structure is found in this class, subclasses 242+. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 242+, | and see (1) Note above |
|
| | |
| 209 | For bottom-strike typewriter: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 191. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a ribbon* specialized
for use in a typewriter in which type-face* elements impact against
the platen* (and thereby impact against a record-medium* that
is backed by the platen) at a print-point* located adjacent
to an underneath part of the platen. |
| | |
| 210 | For boldface typing: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 191. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to imprinting
character* symbols formed of lines having greater than
normal thickness.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 304, | for varying carriage feed to accomplish a similar
result. |
| 466, | for a type-face* configuration which accomplishes
a similar result. |
|
| | |
| 211 | Including mechanism for shifting ribbon laterally at print-point: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 191. Subject matter wherein the transfer-medium* is
a ribbon and provision is made for moving the ribbon in a direction
transverse to its elongated dimension, such movement occurring in an
area of the typewriter adjacent to the print-point*.
| | (1)
Note. In this subclass (211) the transverse movement occurs
by reason of the entire ribbon and the spool(s) on which the ribbon
is wound or mounted being moved in the transverse direction. | |
| | |
| 213 | For impact of successive type-face on one field of ribbon
in path not parallel to longitudinal extent of ribbon (e.g., "zigzag", oblique,
etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 211. Subject matter wherein type-face* elements strike
the same print-point* of a typewriter in a series of impacts
against a ribbon* that moves in a length direction between
successive impacts and that has a zone of a particular color, the
dimensions of which zone correspond to the length and to at least
part of the width of the ribbon, and wherein succeeding elements
impact the zone at areas of the zone that are spaced widthwise as
well as lengthwise of the ribbon.
| | (1)
Note. The path of the successive impacts on the ribbon so
moved may be zigzag, oblique, sinusoidal, etc., as the ribbon moved
longitudinally and transversely of the print-point. | |
| | |
| 213.1 | Via ribbon vibrator: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 213. Subject matter wherein the transverse movement of the ribbon* is
accomplished by a ribbon vibrator*.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 215+, | for a ribbon vibrator and means for moving the vibrator. |
|
| | |
| 215 | By ribbon vibrator: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 211. Subject matter wherein at least a portion of an elongated
ribbon* is constrained for movement within a vibrator* and
wherein the vibrator moves the constrained portion transversely
to the elongated dimension of the ribbon.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 213.1, | for a ribbon vibrator producing a particular path
on the ribbon. |
|
| | |
| 215.1 | Including vibrator shiftable during use of nonfeed character
key (e.g., for typing accent mark, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 215. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with means
for normally moving the carriage* to the extent of a character-space* for each
depression of a character* key* and with means
for normally moving the vibrator* concurrently with carriage
movement, and wherein significance is attributed to a mode of operation
in which a character key is depressed to move the vibrator without
concurrent movement of the carriage.
| | (1)
Note. The mode of operation defined above enables two type-face* elements to
be impacted successively at the same print-point* on the
record-medium* so that a letter and an accent mark for
that letter may be imprinted. | |
| | |
| 215.2 | With retardation of vibrator return after type-face impact
(e.g., with dashpot): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 215. Subject matter wherein the vibrator* movement is
regulated in such a manner that the ribbon* is temporarily
held at its print-point* covering position for receiving
successive type-face* impacts without completely uncovering
the print-point after each impact.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass provides for a disclosure wherein the
print-point remains covered by the ribbon when typing at a normal
rate, but if the typist stops typing, the vibrator moves the ribbon
to permit viewing the print-point. | |
| | |
| 216 | Including variable throw of vibrator: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 215. Subject matter wherein provision is made for changing the
extent of transverse movement imparted to the vibrator* so
as to change the extent the ribbon* is moved transversely
relative to the print-point*. |
| | |
| 216.1 | For diverse-field (e.g., plural-color) ribbon: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 216. Subject matter wherein the ribbon* has zones with
different characteristics, each zone having dimensions that correspond
to the length and to at least part of the width of the ribbon, and
the change in the extent of the transverse vibrator* movement
is for changing the ribbon zone which is over the print-point* to
receive the type-face* impact. |
| | |
| 216.2 | With typewriter-controlled change of field: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 216.1. Subject matter wherein a first part of a typewriter moves
to accomplish its intended first-part function, and during said
movement the first part engages a second part to move the second
part, and wherein movement of the second part causes movement of
the vibrator* that changes the ribbon* zone that
is over the print-point*.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass provides for a typewriter wherein the
typist may preset the typewriter to imprint selected columns of
type in different colors of ink*. | |
| | |
| 216.4 | Vibrator throw controlled via alternate pins selectively
inserted in slots: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 216.1. Subject matter wherein an assemblage of elements for moving
the vibrator* to change ribbon* zones includes
one member or members having plural peg-like projections selectively positionable
in respective elongated openings in another member or members, and
wherein the extent of vibrator movement is controlled according
to which of the pins is positioned relative to its respective opening. |
| | |
| 216.6 | To compensate for case-shift: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 216.1. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to accommodating
the extent of transverse vibrator* movement to take into
account relative change of position between a record-medium* and
a type-face* as a result of case-shift*. |
| | |
| 217 | To shift impact path (e.g., during ribbon reversal): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 211. Subject matter wherein the ribbon* is intended to
receive multiple type-face* impacts along a first zone
extending parallel to the elongated dimensions of the ribbon, and
wherein significance is attributed to the manner of moving the ribbon
transversely relative to its elongated dimension so that subsequent
type-face impacts will be in a different zone transversely spaced
from the first zone. |
| | |
| 217.1 | By adjustable ribbon guide spaced from supply spool: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 217. Subject matter wherein the ribbon* is wound in convolutions
of a reel and is led from the reel past the print-point* via
a member which causes the ribbon to follow a predetermined path,
and wherein the transverse movement of the ribbon is caused by selectively
changing the position of said member relative to the print-point. |
| | |
| 218 | Ribbon-reversing mechanism: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 191. Subject matter wherein the transfer-medium* is
a ribbon* and the provision is made for moving the ribbon
relative to a print-point* in a first direction as character* symbols
are imprinted on a record-medium* during typing, and wherein
significance is attributed to a manner of causing the ribbon to
move relative to the print-point in a direction opposite to said first
direction for further typing of characters on the record-medium
using the same ribbon. |
| | |
| 219 | Including means responsive to depletion of ribbon supply: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 218. Subject matter wherein the ribbon* is moved to the
print-point* from a location where the ribbon has been
stored on the typewriter, and wherein there is means for detecting
when such ribbon storage has been exhausted to cause the ribbon
to move in the opposite direction. |
| | |
| 219.1 | Including an electric switch: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 219. Subject matter wherein said detecting means includes a device
for influencing an electrical circuit used in the operation of a
member or members controlling the direction of movement of the ribbon*. |
| | |
| 219.2 | Including lever retained in spool by wound ribbon: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 219. Subject matter wherein the ribbon* is stored on the
typewriter in convolutions on a reel, and wherein said detecting
means includes a member mounted on the reel and held in a first
position by the convoluted ribbon, said member being movable to
a second position to influence ribbon direction-changing means when the
ribbon has been unwound from engagement with the member. |
| | |
| 219.3 | Including sensor for diameter of wound ribbon: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 219. Subject matter wherein the ribbon* is stored on the
typewriter accumulated in wound convolutions, and wherein said detecting
means includes a detecting member which is biased against the outermost
convolution in a manner such that said member moves as the number
of convolutions increases or decreases and wherein the movement
of said member influences the ribbon direction-changing means. |
| | |
| 219.4 | Sensor received in depression in core of spool: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 219.3. Subject matter wherein the ribbon* is stored on the
typewriter in convolutions around a cylindrical surface of a reel,
and wherein said cylindrical surface includes an opening or cavity which
receives said detecting member when all the convolutions have been
exhausted from the reel. |
| | |
| 219.5 | Including projection from ribbon: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 219. Subject matter wherein the ribbon* includes a protuberance
from a surface thereof, and said detecting means includes a member
actuated by said protuberance to influence ribbon direction-changing
means when the ribbon storage is exhausted.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 239, | for a ribbon, per se, having a protuberance for
actuating reversing mechanism. |
|
| | |
| 220 | Alternative pawl-and-ratchet drive including ratchet directly
connected to spool or spindle: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 218. Subject matter wherein opposite ends of the ribbons* are
attached respectively to first and second cylindrical members, the
first member having a first ratchet* secured thereon to
be driven by a first pawl* and thereby move the ribbon
in the first direction by winding it on the first member, and the
second member having a second ratchet secured thereon to be driven
by a second pawl and thereby move the ribbon in the opposite direction
by winding it on the second member, and wherein means are provided for
causing the first pawl to be operative in its driving relationship
with the first ratcher while the second pawl is caused to be inoperative,
or for causing the second pawl to be operative in its driving relationship
with the second ratchet while the first pawl is caused to be inoperative.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 236.1, | for pawl-and-ratchet drive for ribbon feeding. |
|
| | |
| 221 | Alternative gear drive including gear directly connected
to spool or spindle: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 218. Subject matter wherein opposite ends of the ribbon* are
attached respectively to first and second cylindrical members, the
first member having a first toothed-driven wheel secured thereto,
and the second member having a second toothed-driven wheel secured
thereto, the first and second driven wheels being driven by a toothed
driving wheel selectively engageable with either of the driven wheels
or being driven by first or second driving wheels engageable respectively
with the first or the second driven wheels, the driving wheel or
wheels having a different axis of rotation than the driven wheels,
and wherein shiftable means are provided to selectively cause a
driving wheel to operatively engage the first driven wheel to move
the ribbon the first direction by winding the ribbon on the first
member, or to cause a driving wheel to operatively engage the second driven
wheel to move the ribbon in the opposite direction by winding the
ribbon on the second member.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 236.2, | for gear drive for ribbon feeding. |
|
| | |
| 221.1 | And gears mounted on ends of axially shiftable common shaft: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 221. Subject matter wherein a first driving wheel is secured
to one extremity of a rod having an elongated dimension and a second
driving wheel is secured to the opposite extremity of the same rod,
the rod being shiftable in opposite directions parallel to the elongated
dimension of the rod to either engage the first driving wheel with
the first driven wheel or to engage the second driving wheel with
the second driven wheel. |
| | |
| 221.2 | And gears mounted on ends of pivoted common shaft: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 221. Subject matter wherein a first driving wheel is secured
to one extremity of a rod having an elongated dimension, and a second
driving wheel is secured to the opposite extremity of the same rod,
the rod being movable about an axis perpendicular to its elongated
dimension to either engage the first driving wheel with the first
driven wheel or to engage the second driving wheel with the second
driven wheel. |
| | |
| 222 | Alternative clutch drive including clutch member directly
connected to spool or spindle: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 218. Subject matter wherein opposite ends of the ribbon* are
attached respectively to first and second cylindrical members, the
first member having a first driven coupling device secured thereto,
and the second member having a second driven coupling device secured
thereto, the first and second driven coupling devices being driven
by a driving coupling device selectively engageable with either
of the driven coupling devices or being driven by first or second
driving coupling devices selectively engageable respectively with
the first or the second driven coupling devices, the driving coupling
device or devices being coaxial with the driven coupling devices
and the driving and driven devices having a one-to-one drive ratio,
and wherein shiftable means are provided to selectively cause a
driving coupling device to operatively engage the first driven coupling
device to move the ribbon in the first direction by winding the
ribbon on the first member, or to cause a driving coupling device
to operatively engage the second driven coupling device to move
the ribbon in the opposite direction by winding it on the second
member. |
| | |
| 223 | Ribbon-feeding mechanism: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 191. Subject matter wherein the transfer-medium* is
a ribbon* and significance is attributed to a manner of
moving the ribbon relative to a print-point* in a direction
parallel to the longitudinal extent of the ribbon as character* symbols
are imprinted on a record-medium* or to the manner of regulating
such ribbon movement.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 36, | for ribbon feed in a flat-platen typewriter. |
| 218, | for ribbon reversing wherein ribbon feeding is disclosed. |
|
| | |
| 224.2 | Ribbon is full-page wide: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 224.1. Subject matter wherein a dimension of the ribbon* transverse
to the longitudinal extent of the ribbon is approximately the same
as the dimension of the record-medium* parallel to the
print-line*.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 246, | for a cylindrical member for convoluting thereon
a ribbon of similar dimension. |
|
| | |
| 226 | For feeding ribbon partial character-space before impact
and partial character-space after impact: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 223. Subject matter wherein the ribbon is moved relative to the
print-point* in incremental distances approximating the
width of a character* as characters are imprinted on the
record-medium*, and wherein the ribbon is moved a portion
of such incremental distance prior to a type-face* contacting
the ribbon, and the ribbon is moved the remaining portion of such incremental
distance after the same type-face contacts the ribbon.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 232, | for ribbon feeding at a particular feed rate. |
|
| | |
| 227 | For narrow carbon ribbon (e.g., carbon ink, "single
use", etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 223. Subject matter wherein the ribbon* being moved
is a carbon-ink ribbon or a "carbon-paper" ribbon.
| | (1)
Note. See the definition of ribbon in the Glossary, section
III, for a discussion of carbon-ink and carbon-paper ribbons, and
see (1) Note under subclass 497 for a discussion of the term carbon-paper. | |
| | |
| 227.1 | Ribbon destroyed after use: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 227. Subject matter wherein provision is made for treating the
ribbon* on the typewriter after the ribbon leaves the print-point* so
as to render illegible any type-face* impressions on the
ribbon or to make the ribbon useless for further typing. |
| | |
| 227.2 | Or for alternately used fabric ribbon: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 227. Subject matter wherein a "fabric" ribbon* is also
mounted for use on the typewriter and provision is made for either
moving the fabric ribbon relative to the print-point* or
for moving the "carbon-paper" or "carbon-ink" ribbon
relative to the print-point, the ribbon which is so moved being
selectable by the typist which is so moved being selectable by the
typist.
| | (1)
Note. See the definition of ribbon in the Glossary, section
III, for a discussion of fabric ribbon. | |
| | |
| 228 | Including pin-feed-engaging ribbon: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 223. Subject matter wherein the ribbon* is moved by
contacting the ribbon with elements that are movable in a ribbon-feeding
direction, which elements either pierce the ribbon or move into preformed
openings in the ribbon. |
| | |
| 229 | Mounted with movable type-face-carrier or type-head-carrier: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 223. Subject matter wherein the ribbon* is attached to
a type-face-carrier* or is attached to a type-head-carrier* either
of which carriers moves relative to a stationary record-medium* for imprinting
the character* symbols along the print-line*,
whereby the ribbon moves with either the type-face-carrier or the
type-head-carrier. |
| | |
| 230 | With fast rewind of ribbon: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 223. Subject matter wherein the ribbon* is supplied to
the print-point* from a coiled supply of the ribbon so
that the supply is depleted while the ribbon is moved in a first
direction during imprinting of character* symbols, and
wherein provision is made for rapidly moving the ribbon in the opposite
direction to replenish the coiled supply, no character symbols being imprinted
during such rapid movement. |
| | |
| 231 | With prevention of ribbon feed (e.g., for nontype operation,
etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 223. Subject matter wherein there is a drive mechanism for moving
the ribbon* relative to the print-point*, and
wherein significance is attributed to stopping or disconnecting
such drive mechanism while a function* is performed on the
typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. It is usual to have ribbon movement depend on carriage* movement
as the carriage is moved in the direction of the print-line* while
character* symbols are imprinted so that a fresh ribbon
surface is presented for each type-face* impact. There
are other carriage movements (e.g., for spacing between words, backspace,
etc.) where no imprint takes place and so a fresh ribbon surface
is not needed as a result of the latter movements. This subclass
(231) provides for disclosures wherein ribbon drive mechanism is
disconnected for carriage movements when no imprinting takes place. | |
| | |
| 232 | Including feed at particular feed rate (e.g., "creep"
feed): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 223. Subject matter wherein the ribbon* is moved a predetermined
distance relative to the print-point* each time a character* is
imprinted on the record-medium*, and wherein significance is
attributed to the speed at which the ribbon is so moved or to the
distance the ribbon is so moved.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 226, | for feeding ribbon a partial character-space* before
type-face* impact and a partial character-space after type-face impact. |
|
| | |
| 233 | Ribbon feed from supply only during carriage return: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 223. Subject matter wherein a carriage* is moved in a
first direction along a print-line* as character* symbols
are imprinted, and the carriage is moved in a second direction opposite
to the first direction to begin another print-line, and wherein
the ribbon* is moved to the print-point* from
a location where the ribbon has been stored on the typewriter, such
movement of the ribbon from storage taking place only when the carriage
is moved in the second direction. |
| | |
| 234 | Including ribbon tensioner: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 223. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to means
for maintaining the ribbon* in a relatively taut or non-sagging
condition as the ribbon is moved relative to the print-point*. |
| | |
| 235 | Drive applied by means directly engaging ribbon in advance
of takeup: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 223. Subject matter wherein the ribbon* is accumulated
at a location on the typewriter after the ribbon has moved past
the print-point*, and wherein the ribbon is moved in the
direction parallel to its longitudinal extent by a motion-transmitting
mechanism which contacts the ribbon at a place on the typewriter
between the print-point and the accumulated location of the ribbon. |
| | |
| 235.1 | Drive applied by pinch-roller couple: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 235. Subject matter wherein the motion-transmitting mechanism
includes a pair of rotatable cylindrical members positioned with
respect to each other, and to the ribbon*, in a manner
such that one member engages one surface of the ribbon, and the
other member engages the opposite surface of the ribbon, whereby
rotation of the members in opposite rotational directions moves
the ribbon toward the location wherein the ribbon is accumulated. |
| | |
| 236 | Drive applied directly to spool or spool spindle: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 223. Subject matter wherein one end of the ribbon* is
attached to a cylindrical member, and wherein the ribbon is moved
past the print-point* by rotating the member about its
axis to wind the ribbon in convolutions thereon, said member being
rotated by a motion-transmitted mechanism, and said mechanism including
a component rigidly secured to the cylindrical member. |
| | |
| 236.1 | By a pawl driving a ratchet on the spool or spindle: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 236. Subject matter wherein the component secured to the cylindrical
member is a ratchet*, and wherein the motion-transmitting
mechanism includes a pawl* for moving the ratchet.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 220, | for pawl-and-ratchet drive used with ribbon reversing. |
|
| | |
| 236.2 | By a gear driving a gear on the spool or spindle: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 236. Subject matter wherein the component secured to the cylindrical
member is a first toothed wheel, and wherein the motion-transmitting mechanism
includes a second toothed wheel engageable to rotate the first toothed
wheel, said first and second toothed wheels having different and
non-coextensive axes of rotation.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 221, | for gear drive used with ribbon reversing. |
|
| | |
| 237 | Ribbon, per se: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 191. Subject matter wherein the transfer-medium* is
a ribbon* and significance is attributed to the structure
or characteristics of the ribbon.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 194, | for an endless ribbon. |
|
| | |
| 238 | Having leader portion (e.g., for threading, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 237. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a modification
of either end of the ribbon*.
| | (1)
Note. Such modification may be for various reasons including
facilitating attachment to a spool, facilitating threading of the
ribbon through a guide, or permitting handling without soiling the typist"s
fingers with ink*. | |
| | |
| 239 | With ribbon-reversing indicator or device on ribbon: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 237. Subject matter wherein the ribbon* is of a kind which,
when in use on a typewriter, is intended to be moved in either of
opposite directions relative to a print-point*, and wherein
significance is attributed to a modification of the ribbon which
either alerts the typist that directional change of the ribbon is
desired or controls the mechanism for changing the directional movement
of the ribbon.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 218, | for a mechanism for moving a ribbon in either of
opposite directions. |
|
| | |
| 240 | Including differently pigmented fields: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 237. Subject matter wherein the ribbon* has plural zones
impregnated or coated with a coloring agent intended to be transferred
from the ribbon to the record-medium* during typing, the coloring
agent in one zone being ink* of a first color, and the
coloring agent in another zone being of a different shade or color
than the first color. |
| | |
| 240.1 | Including correction-material field: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 240. Subject matter wherein one of the zones includes a coloring
agent which is a coating of a color approximating the color of the
record-medium*, which coating will adhere to the ink*,
of an imprinted character*, or wherein one of the zones
includes a chemical agent which eradicates the ink that has been imprinted
on the record-medium.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 697, | for an error-correcting sheet or tape. |
|
| | |
| 241.1 | Synthetic material: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 241. Subject matter wherein the substance is a compound formed
from chemical reaction involving elements, radical, or simpler compounds.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass provides for disclosure of a ribbon* wherein
the ink*-carrying substance of the ribbon is a "man-made" substance
rather than a substance which occurs naturally. | |
| | |
| 241.3 | Particular weave pattern: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 241. Subject matter wherein the ribbon is formed from interlaced
thread-like elements, and wherein significance is attributed to
the manner in which such elements are arranged relative to each
other. |
| | |
| 241.4 | Including ink-impervious backing for ribbon: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 241. Subject matter wherein the ribbon* has first and
second surfaces, the first surface contacting a record-medium* to
imprint a character* by transferring ink* from
the ribbon to the record-medium when the second surface is contacted
by a type-face*, and wherein the second surface of the
ribbon is formed of a substance through which ink is incapable of passing
to preclude direct contact of the type-face with ink. |
| | |
| 242 | Ribbon spool or mount therefor: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 191. Subject matter wherein the transfer-medium* is
a ribbon* in the form of an elongated tape that is spirally
wound around a cylindrical member, and wherein significance is attributed to
said member or to holding the member and the ribbon wound thereon
on a typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. The member (i.e., spool) may have flanges extending
radially to retain the spiral convolutions of the ribbon wound thereon,
or may be a core having no flanges. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 203, | for a spool mounted within a platen*. |
| 207, | for a package for ribbon spool(s) simplifying mounting
the ribbon and spool on a typewriter. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 242, | Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding,
subclasses 600+ and 118+ for a spool to support wound
material. |
|
| | |
| 243 | Universally adaptable: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 242. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a modification
of, or an attachment for, the cylindrical member which facilitates
holding the member on any of diverse shapes or kinds of supports
on a typewriter. |
| | |
| 244 | Including ribbon-reversing indicator or device on spool
or mount: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 242. Subject matter wherein the cylindrical member is intended
to be rotated in either of opposite directions depending on whether
the ribbon is to be wound thereon or to be unwound therefrom, and
wherein significance is attributed to a modification of such cylindrical
member which either alerts the typist that a change in directional
rotation of the member is desired, or which controls the mechanism
for changing the directional rotation of the member.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 218, | for a mechanism for moving a ribbon in either of
opposite directions. |
|
| | |
| 246 | Spool for full-page-wide ribbon: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 242. Subject matter wherein the cylindrical member is intended
to accommodate a ribbon* having a dimension transverse
to its longitudinal extent which dimension is approximately the
same as the dimension of the record-medium* parallel to
the print-line*.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 224.2, | for a mechanism for feeding ribbon of similar dimension. |
|
| | |
| 247 | Means auxiliary to ribbon mechanism (e.g., shield, guide,
etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 191. Subject matter wherein the transfer-medium* is
a ribbon*, and wherein significance is attributed to a
device used in conjunction with the ribbon, but which device does
not itself effect the imprint of a character* or function* of
the typewriter, or which device is not provided for in any of the
subclasses indented under subclass 191. |
| | |
| 248 | Including guide for ribbon: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 247. Subject matter wherein the device is a member for conducting
or leading the ribbon* from its place of storage on the
typewriter to the print-point* or from the print-point
to a place of storage on the typewriter. |
| | |
| 248.1 | Ribbon guide opening expandable to facilitate ribbon insertion: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 248. Subject matter wherein the member includes a pair of components
between which the ribbon* extends, said components having
first and second positions movable relative to each other and being
spaced further from each other at said second position than at said
first position to facilitate placement of the ribbon between the
components at said second position. |
| | |
| 248.2 | And typewriter-actuated closing of guide: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 248.1. Subject matter wherein a first part of a typewriter moves
to accomplish its intended first-part function, and during said
movement the first part engages a second part to move the second
part, and wherein movement of the second part causes relative movement
of said components from said second position to said first position. |
| | |
| 251 | CASE-SHIFT MECHANISM: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a means
in a typewriter for performing a case-shift* function by
effecting relative movement between a record-medium* and
a type-face* element that is at the print-point* whereby
a typist is enabled to choose which one of two or more forms of
character* symbols that may be imprinted by pressing a particular
character key* element will be imprinted, the choice being
made by the typist who presses or does not press a case-shift key.
| | (1)
Note. As discussed in the definition of case-shift in the
Glossary, section III, case-shift is the function* that
enables a typewriter to imprint either an upper-case* form
or a lower-case* form of character symbol with the same
key element, depending on whether the case-shift key is used or
not used. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 35, | for case-shift in a flat-platen* typewriter. |
|
| | |
| 252 | Including programmed-control-system: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 251. Subject matter wherein the operation of the case-shift* mechanism
to effect the form of a type-face* that is to be impressed
against the record-medium* is governed by a programmed-control-system*. |
| | |
| 253 | Including electronic control or code-bar control: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 251. Subject matter wherein the operation of a case-shift* mechanism
to effect the form of a type-face* that is to be impressed
against a record-medium* is governed by either (a) an electrical system
involving the flow of electrons in a circuit, or (b) a plurality
of members having particular index characteristics thereon, which members
are moved to a position relative to an arrangement of element(s)
within the mechanism where the index characteristics are aligned
one with another to enable movement of another component of the
mechanism to effect choice of operation or non-operation of the
case-shift mechanism. |
| | |
| 254 | Controlled by typewriter-actuated mechanism: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 251. Subject matter wherein the operation of the case-shift* mechanism
to effect the form of a type-face* that is to be impressed
against the record-medium* is governed by an arrangement
of parts in the typewriter, which arrangement includes a first part
that moves to accomplish its intended first-part function*, and
during such movement the first part engages a second part to move
the second part, which second part is connected to the case-shift mechanism
to accomplish case-shift as the first part moves to accomplish its
first-part function. |
| | |
| 255 | Including plural case-shift mechanisms (e.g., for simultaneous
or selective use): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 251. Subject matter wherein one typewriter is provided with at
least two case-shift* means.
| | (1)
Note. One exemplary use of two case-shift mechanisms is in
a typewriter wherein the carriage*, and thereby the platen* that
is carried by the carriage, is vertically movable in a case-shift
mode, and wherein the type-bar-segment*, and thereby the
type-set-assemblage* that is carried by the type-bar-segment,
is also movable for case-shifting. | |
| | |
| 256 | Actuated by toggle-linkage: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 251. Subject matter wherein the case-shift* mechanism
includes a toggle-linkage* assemblage that is used to move
a portion of the typewriter for case-shifting. |
| | |
| 257 | For case-shift by type-head (e.g., spherical type-head)
movement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 251. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with a
type-head* that includes a type-set-assemblaged*,
which type-head is moved by case-shift* mechanism for selection
of the form of character* symbol to be used.
| | (1)
Note. The typewriter of this subclass often is provided with
a "golf-ball" or spheroidal type-head*.
See the definition of type-head in the Glossary, section III, for
a discussion of other configurations of type-head elements. | |
| | |
| 258 | Power-operated mechanism (e.g., for locking shift key): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 251. Subject matter wherein the case-shift* mechanism
is actuated with the help of force generated by or derived from
a source other than the typist.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass provides for power applied for a miscellaneous
function* in the case-shift mechanism of the typewriter,
including some disclosures of a solenoid used for locking the shift-key element
of the key-board. | |
| | |
| 261 | Multiple-shift mechanism (i.e., for type-bar having three
or more type-faces thereon): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 251. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with a
plurality of type-bar* members, each type-bar having at
least three type-face* elements thereon, only one of which
type-face is to be impacted to form only one character* on
record-medium* for each pressing of a character key* element,
and wherein the case-shift* mechanism is arranged to cause
relative movement between a record-medium and the selected type-bar
that is at a print-point* into one of at least three positions,
whereby a chosen one of the type-face* with respect to
the type-bar* that carries the type-face, the movement
being a turning motion.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass provides for a typewriter wherein a platen* is
shifted vertically, or horizontally, as in a bottom-strike or top-strike
typewriter. | |
| | |
| 262 | For shifting type-bar-segment: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 261. Subject matter wherein case-shift* is effected by
moving the type-bar-case-shift* is effected by moving the
type-bar-segment* relative to the typewriter thereby moving
the type-bar* members and the type-face* elements
carried thereby to the platen*. |
| | |
| 263 | For shifting type-bar or type-face on type-bar: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 261. Subject matter wherein case-shift* is effected by
moving the type-bar* relative to the typewriter, or by
moving the type-face* relative to the type-bar, whereby
in either event the type-face is moved relative to the platen*. |
| | |
| 264 | For shifting platen: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 251. Subject matter wherein case-shift* is effected by
moving the platen* relative to the typewriter, thereby
moving the record-medium* relative to the type-face* element
which will impact thereagainst.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 261, | for case-shift by moving platen in a multiple-shift
typewriter |
|
| | |
| 265 | Fore-and-aft (e.g., for top-strike or bottom-strike typewriter): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 264. Subject matter wherein the movement of the platen* during
case-shift* is in a direction that extends between the
front and rear of the typewriter and substantially parallel to the
bottom of the typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. The typewriter of this subclass is usually one wherein
the type-face* impacts against the top of the platen or the
bottom of the platen. | |
| | |
| 266 | Mounted on pivotally movable platen carrier: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 264. Subject matter wherein the platen* is supported by
structure that moves the platen in the arc of a circle for case-shift* purposes.
| | (1)
Note. In most typewriters, the platen- carrier or platen-support
structure is a carriage*. | |
| | |
| 266.1 | With movement of platen out of typing position: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 266. Subject matter wherein said structure enables the platen* to
be removed from adjacent the print-point*.
| | (1)
Note. In the typewriter of this subclass the platen is movable
out of typing position or may be entirely removed from the carriage* that
normally supports the platen. | |
| | |
| 266.2 | Including adjustable counterbalance spring: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 266. Subject matter wherein the platen* and the structure
that moves the platen has mass that exerts a downward force, and
wherein the typewriter is provided with a component or assemblage
of elements that exerts an upward force on the said structure to
compensate for this downward force of said structure, which component
or assemblage of elements is resilient and the upward force exerted
by the component or assemblage is variable. |
| | |
| 268 | For shifting type-face or type-bar: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 251. Subject matter wherein case-shift* is effected by
moving a type-face* or by moving a type-bar* relative
to the typewriter platen*, the direction of such movement
being considered to be parallel to a plane in which the print-point* lies,
thereby causing a chosen type-face to be impacted against a record-medium* at
the print-point.
| | (1)
Note. The type-face may be one of many type-faces on a type-head* containing
a type-set-assemblage*, in which event case-shift occurs
by moving the type-head so that the chosen type-face will be in
position to be impacted. Or the type-face may be movable relative
to a type-bar that carries only two (or three) type-faces. | |
| | |
| 269 | By shifting type-bar or type-face on type-bar: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 268. Subject matter wherein case-shift* is effected by
moving a type-bar*, together with the type-face* supported
thereby relative to the platen* or by moving a type-face
relative to the type-bar that supports the type-face, thereby moving the
type-face relative to the platen. |
| | |
| 269.1 | By pivoting type-face relative to type-bar: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 269. Subject matter wherein case-shift* is effected by
moving a type-face* with respect to the type-bar* that
supports the type-face thereby moving the type-face relative to
the platen*, the movement being oscillatory. |
| | |
| 270 | Mounted on type-bar support (e.g., guide pin, type-bar-segment
, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 268. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with structure
that sustains the type-bar* members in an operative relationship
to enable the type-bars, and the type-face* elements carried
by the type-bars, to move from rest position to print-point* position
as each type-bar is selected to impact its type-face against the record-medium*,
which structure also enables movement of the type-set-assemblage* that
is sustained on the structure, the movement of the type-set-assemblage
being for the purpose of effecting case-shift*.
| | (1)
Note. In some of the typewriters of this subclass the type-bars
are mounted on a type-bar-segment* which moves so that a
chosen type-face of the selected type-bar will impact the record-medium. | |
| | |
| 270.1 | Ring hanger support: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 270. Subject matter wherein said structure includes a generally
annular member to which the type-bar* members are connected.
| | (1)
Note. The ring hanger of this subclass is usually used in
a top-strike typewriter or bottom-strike typewriter. | |
| | |
| 270.2 | Including ball-bearing support: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 270. Subject matter wherein said structure includes a mechanical
assemblage known as a "ball bearing" to which
the type-bar* members are connected for movement.
| | (1)
Note. A ball bearing is a device in which a shaft or journal
turns upon a number of balls running in an annular track. | |
| | |
| 272 | Including key attachment for case-shift: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 251. Subject matter wherein case-shift* is effected by
a key* element on the key-board* that is pressed,
the pressing of the case-shift key being caused by a device that
is connected to the typewriter, which device is actuated or operated
by the typist. |
| | |
| 273 | Operated by user"s leg, (e.g., foot, knee, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 272. Subject matter wherein said device is energized by a lower
limb of the typist.
| | (1)
Note. A typewriter of this subclass is usually intended to
increase typing speed by giving the typist the capability of actuating
case-shift* by a key* element that is pressed
by action of a foot, knee, etc., rather than pressed by a finger.
A typewriter for handicapped persons is found in subclass 87 above. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 87, | and see (1) Note above. |
|
| | |
| 274 | For locking case-shift mechanism in position (e.g., rebound
lock, cam, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 251. Subject matter wherein said relative movement effects a
rearrangement of parts on the typewriter to at least two locations
relative to the typewriter frame, and wherein significance is attributed
to means for maintaining the particular arrangement of parts as
desired by the typist until another location of said parts is desired.
| | (1)
Note. In the typewriter of this subclass, the case-shift* mechanism
is held by a cam, or is prevented from rebounding out of position
into an undesired position. Also included herein is a typewriter wherein
the platen* is locked in a raised position. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 663, | for other locking mechanism in a typewriter. |
|
| | |
| 275 | For locking platen in fore-and-aft position (e.g., by overcenter
spring, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 274. Subject matter wherein the platen* of the typewriter
during case-shift* is in a direction that extends between
the front and rear of the typewriter and substantially parallel
to the bottom of the typewriter, and said two locations are the extreme
front and rear of the extent of movement of the plate, and wherein
significance is attributed to means for maintaining the platen in
its extreme front or rear location until another location is desired
by the typist. |
| | |
| 276 | For locking shift-key lever in depressed position: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 274. Subject matter wherein the case-shift* function is
accomplished by pressing a particular key* element known
as a shift key, which shift-key element is connected to a fulcrumed
bar for movement of the bar when the shift-key element is pressed
by a typist, and wherein significance is attributed to means for
maintaining the shift key in the position it has been moved to when
it is pressed by the typist. |
| | |
| 276.1 | By toggle-linkage: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 276. Subject matter wherein said means includes a toggle-linkage* connected
between said fulcrumed bar and the typewriter. |
| | |
| 277 | Including limit stop (e.g., block, chain, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 251. Subject matter wherein said relative movement is halted
at the extreme ends of the desired movement by the interengagement
of a component that moves with the case-shift* mechanism
and a component that is fixed to the typewriter. |
| | |
| 278 | Including limit screw: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 277. Subject matter wherein at least one of said components is
an elongated helically threaded member that is rotatable about an
axis extending in its elongated dimension and is movable along its
axis as it is rotated about its axis. |
| | |
| 279 | CONTROL OF PRINT POSITION ALONG PRINT-LINE BY SIGNAL GENERATED
BY PROGRAMMED-CONTROL-SYSTEM: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein a programmed-control-system* is
provided for transmitting instructions to a typewriter mechanism
to govern the location where a type-face* element will
be impressed against the record-medium*, the location being
along a path parallel to the print-line*. |
| | |
| 281 | Member is punched tape or card: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 280. Subject matter wherein the supplementary element is an elongated,
relatively narrow strip of material, or a sheet of material, said
material having apertures formed therein in a particular pattern,
and the apertures representing the instructions governing the operation
of the typewriter. |
| | |
| 283 | CARRIAGE OR CARRIAGE-MOVING OR MOVEMENT-REGULATING MECHANISM: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
carriage* of a typewriter, or to movement of the carriage,
or to control of movement or stoppage of movement of the carriage,
which movement occurs along a line that is parallel to the print-line*.
| | (1)
Note. The definition of the term "carriage" in
the Glossary, section III, includes a discussion of the movement referred
to the above, the direction of such movement, and the difference between
a "platen* carriage" and a "type-head* carriage". | |
| | |
| 284 | For stopping carriage in tabular position (e.g., column-set
positions): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 283. Subject matter wherein the carriage* is caused to
be moved in a direction that enables the character* symbols
to be imprinted in succession (i.e., the character-space* direction),
and wherein the movement in said direction is controlled such that
after the carriage has moved past a predetermined number of character-space
distances, the carriage will be stopped in a position corresponding
to a print-point* for the start of a column of character
symbols.
| | (1)
Note. The term "column" refers to a plurality
of print-lines* arranged one above or below another in
vertical array (i.e., a particular character of each successive line
of type being equally spaced from one of the side edges of a sheet
or web record-medium*). |
| | (2)
Note. The term "tabular" refers to at least
one, but usually a plurality of columns each arranged in vertical
array and each parallel to a side edge of a sheet or web as well
as to other column(s) that are produced on the sheet or web. |
| | (3)
Note. In the typewriter of this subclass the tab-stop elements
on the tab-rack* are set in active position to effect typing of
a column. The typewriter is thus said to be "column set". | |
| | |
| 285 | In denominational positions: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 284. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is used to imprint
one or more columns of numeral digits, and wherein the carriage* is
stopped in a position such that the decimal point of a succession
of numbers typed one below the other(s) will be arranged in vertical
array.
| | (1)
Note. In the instance of a "denominational" column
the left character* of successive print-lines* will
not necessarily be one below the others, depending on whether the
left character represents a "hundreds" digit,
a "tens" digit, etc. Rather the decimal point
will be in vertical array. Moreover, in the instance where the decimal
point of successive numbers is not actually imprinted, but is merely
understood to be present, the particular character is the basis
of the columnar arrangement, is in fact the "units" digit
of the successive numbers. | |
| | |
| 285.1 | And column-set positions: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 285. Subject matter wherein the carriage* may be stopped
in a column position and then be further moved and again stopped
in a denominational position within said column.
| | (1)
Note. The term "column" is discussed in (1)
Note of subclass 284; the term "column set" is
discussed in (3) Note of subclass 284; and the term "denominational" is
discussed in (1) Note of subclass 285. The typewriter of this and
indented subclasses combine features of two forms of tabulation,
that is, carriage is brought to a selected column field and the
carriage is further brought to a selected denominational position
within the selected column field. | |
| | |
| 285.2 | Tab-rack stop intercepted by denominational-stop: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 285.1. Subject matter wherein the carriage* is stopped by
the interengagement of a selected denominational-stop* with
a "tab stop" that is mounted on a tab-rack*.
| | (1)
Note. The term "tab stop" is discussed in the
definition of tab-rack in the Glossary, section III. | |
| | |
| 285.3 | Tab stops grouped in stepped fashion: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 285.2. Subject matter wherein the "tab stop" elements are
arranged on the tab-rack* in sets or assemblages of tab
stops, the individual tab stops of each set being in an ascending
or descending scale of individually varying length in each assemblage,
and each set or assemblage being arranged for a different "columnar" arrangement.
| | (1)
Note. The term "tab stop" is discussed in
the definition of tab-rack in the Glossary, section III, and the
term "columnar" is a variation of the term "column" which
is discussed in (1) Note of subclass 284. | |
| | |
| 285.4 | With control of zero or space for decimal point: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 285. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
suppression or regulation of the imprinting of a "zero" digit
in a sequence of number digits, or wherein significance is attributed
to the regulation of the occurrence of a character-space* associated
with a "decimal point" in a sequence of number
digits or the regulation of the decimal point associated with a
sequence of number digits. |
| | |
| 285.5 | With reverse-direction movement of carriage: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 285. Subject matter wherein the carriage* is moved in
a direction opposed to the normal character-space* direction
during the imprinting of numeral digits in denominational columns.
| | (1)
Note. In this subclass the number is imprinted from the most
significant to the least significant digit by backspacing the carriage
from right to left along the print-line*, or the number
is imprinted so that the first denominational digit typed is the
least significant digit. | |
| | |
| 285.6 | Helically mounted denominational-stop(s): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 285. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to an
arrangement of denominational-stop* components, the components
being carried on a drum or cylinder in an array that has the configuration
of a helix around the surface of the drum or cylinder. |
| | |
| 286 | Shiftable denominational-stop(s): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 285. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
movement of a denomination-stop* or the interengagement
of said denominational-stop with a tab-stop element on a tab-rack*. |
| | |
| 286.1 | Step-shaped denominational- or tab-stop(s): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 286. Subject matter wherein either the denominational-stop* components
or the "tab-stop" elements on the tab-rack* are
arranged in sets or assemblages, the components or elements of each
set being in an ascending or descending scale of individually varying
length in each assemblage. |
| | |
| 286.2 | Engaging movable tab-rack means: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 286. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
interengagement of a denominational-stop* with a tab-stop
element on a tab-rack* or to the movement of said tab-stop
element from inactive position to active position or return from
active to inactive position. |
| | |
| 286.3 | With latch or lock means: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 285. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to means
for temporarily securing against unwanted or undesired movement
any parts of the mechanism that is included in the tabulator mechanism
for denominational column(s).
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 663, | for other locking mechanism in a typewriter. |
|
| | |
| 287 | Column set by control of mutilated carriage-rack: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 284. Subject matter wherein the carriage* is caused to
move quickly to its "column-set" position by use
of a carriage-rack* that has gaps in the teeth or notches
of the bar that is part of the carriage-rack, the length of the
gap determining the length of the character-space* distance that
is to be jumped in moving the carriage to the column-set position. |
| | |
| 288 | Column set by control of tab-rack: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 284. Subject matter wherein the carriage* is caused to
move to its "column-set" position by moving a
tab-rack* component from an inoperative position to an
operative position, the tab-rack having tab-stop elements thereon
which are active to govern or regulate the column-set position. |
| | |
| 289 | Column set by control of tab-stops or column stops
or counter-stops: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 284. Subject matter wherein the carriage* is caused to
be moved to its "column-set" position and stopped
in that position by "tab-stop" elements mounted
on a tab-rack*, selected of said elements having been moved
from a "clear" position to a "set" position,
or the carriage is stopped in a column-set position by a "counter-stop" element.
| | (1)
Note. For further discussion of the terms used and their
operation, see the definition of tab-rack in the Glossary, section III. | |
| | |
| 289.1 | Tab-stops grouped in stepped fashion: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 289. Subject matter wherein the "tab-stop" elements are
arranged in sets or assemblages of tab stops on the tab-rack*,
the individual tab stops of each set being in an ascending or descending scale
of individually varying length in each assemblage, and each set
or assemblage being arranged for a different "columnar" arrangement. |
| | |
| 290 | Forward or reverse tabulation: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 284. Subject matter wherein the carriage* is caused to
be moved and is caused to be stopped in a position corresponding
to a print-point* for the start of a column of character* symbols,
the movement occurring in a character-space* direction,
or the carriage is caused to be moved in a direction opposite to
the character-space direction and caused to be stopped in a position corresponding
to a print-point for the end of a column of character symbols.
| | (1)
Note. The typewriter of this subclass is sometimes also provided
with a carriage-shuttling mechanism, which enables the carriage
to travel in a forward or a reverse direction directly between tabular
positions without having to first return to home position following
a tabulating movement. | |
| | |
| 291 | With impact cushion or rebound check: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 284. Subject matter wherein the carriage* is moved in
a first direction and then stopped in a tabular position, and wherein
the stopping of the carriage is regulated by a component or assemblage
that is yieldable or limited in the movement of said component or
assemblage when used to stop the carriage, whereby the energy of
movement of the carriage is absorbed and/or any movement
in a direction opposite to said first direction is inhibited. |
| | |
| 293 | By multiple pitch tab-racks or mutilated gear: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 284. Subject matter wherein the carriage* is moved and
then stopped in tabular position, the movement and stopping being
regulated or governed by either (a) a tab-rack* component
in which one plurality of tab-stop elements are spaced to one pitch* distance
and another plurality of tab stops are spaced to another pitch distance,
or a plurality of tab-racks, each tab-rack having tab-stop elements
spaced to a different pitch from one from another, or (b) a toothed
driving member having gaps in the teeth of the member. |
| | |
| 294 | Stop-setting or stop-clearing mechanism: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 284. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to structure
for causing movement of a "tab-stop" element from
a passive position (i.e., a position at which it will not engage
with a "counter-stop" element) to an active (i.e., "set")
position (i.,e., a position at which it will engage with a counter-stop
element to stop a moving carriage* in a "tabular" position),
or for causing movement of a tab-stop element from an active position
to a passive (i.e., "clear") position, or wherein
significance is attributed to structure for causing movement of a
counter-stop element from a passive position to an active position
or for causing movement of a counter-stop element from an active
position to a passive position.
| | (1)
Note. The terms "tab-stop" element and "counter-stop" element
have been discussed in the definition of tab-rack* in the
Glossary, section III, and the term "tabular" has
been discussed in the definition of tab* as well as in
(2) Note to the definition of subclass 284 above. |
| | (2)
Note. This subclass provides for a type-writer wherein the
tab stop(s) is/are cleared, i.e., moved from active position to
inactive position. | |
| | |
| 294.1 | With stop magazine (i.e., for supply of stops): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 294. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with a
receptacle in which the "tab-stop" elements are
contained ready for use, from which receptacle the tab stops are
removed to be used for use in the tabulating mechanism, and to which
receptacle the tab stops are returned after use in the tabulator
mechanism. |
| | |
| 294.2 | With key-locking mechanism: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 294. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with means
to prevent activation of the key* element that effects
tabulation or the key element that effects any action or function* other
than the setting or clearing of a "tab-stop" element
during the time that the tab stop is cleared or set.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 663, | for other locking mechanism in a typewriter. |
|
| | |
| 294.3 | Drum-mounted tab-stops: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 294. Subject matter wherein the "tab-stop" elements are
carried on a cylindrical member or on a segment of a cylindrical
member, either on the inner or the outer periphery of the member
or on the radial surface of the member. |
| | |
| 295.1 | Stop shifts horizontally from tab-rack: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 295. Subject matter wherein the "tab-stop" element is
set into an active position by moving the tab stop forwardly or
rearwardly relative to the tab-rack* component that carries
the tab-stop elements. |
| | |
| 295.2 | Stops shifts laterally along tab-rack: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 295. Subject matter wherein the "tab-stop" element is
set into one position or another position to accomplish the tabulation
by moving the tab stop along the length of the tab-rack* component
that carries the tab-stop elements. |
| | |
| 296 | Stop setting by movement of tab-rack: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 294. Subject matter wherein the tab-rack* of the typewriter
is movable from one position to another relative to the carriage* of
the typewriter, and wherein the "tab-stop" element
on the tab-rack is set into active position by moving the tab-rack. |
| | |
| 296.1 | Tab-rack rotates about its axis: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 296. Subject matter wherein the movement of the tab-rack* is
a turning movement that occurs about a center that extends through
the tab-rack component along the length of the component. |
| | |
| 297.1 | Stop setting by pivoting pawllike stop: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 294. Subject matter wherein the "tab-stop" element is
set into active position for tabulation by moving the tab-stop element
with an arcuate movement.
| | (1)
Note. The tab stop is usually hook- shaped and has a pivot
axis on the end remote from the hook. | |
| | |
| 299 | With rotatable type wheel for repeat printing in response
to carriage movement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 283. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with a
type-member* in the form of a disc that turns about an
axis and bears on the edge of the disc a plurality of type-face* elements
all of which type-faces imprint the same character* symbol
on the record-medium* when the edge of the disc is impressed
against the record-medium, and wherein the typewriter is provided
with means to urge the disc against the record-medium as the carriage* is
moved in a character-space* direction, whereby as the carriage
so moves as the disc is impressed against the record-medium, a series
of the same character symbol is imprinted on the record-medium.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 21, | for a liner responsive to carriage movement. |
|
| | |
| 300 | Key-actuated mechanism for nonfeed of carriage (e.g., "silent" key,
locking carriage, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 283. Subject matter wherein the carriage* is normally
caused to be moved in a direction that enables the character* symbols
to be imprinted in succession (i.e., the character-space* direction)
by or concurrently with successive pressing of successive character
key* elements, but wherein significance is attributed to
a mode of operating the typewriter whereby pressing of a particular
key element will not cause movement of the carriage.
| | (1)
Note. The purpose of this mechanism is to permit the imprinting
of a character* symbol without an accompanying character-space* movement
of the carriage, thereby permitting two or more symbols to be imprinted
at the same print-point*. The mechanism thus permits a
letter and an accent mark, or a letter and a vowel symbol, or two
different letters (these being only exemplary of the possibilities),
to be imprinted at the same print-point. | |
| | |
| 301 | By disabling carriage-escapement mechanism: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 300. Subject matter wherein the nonfeed or the nonmovement of
the carriage* is caused by temporarily making the normal
carriage-feed mechanism ineffective to move the carriage.
| | (1)
Note. For discussion of how the normal carriage-escapement
mechanism operates, see the definition of subclass 329. | |
| | |
| 302 | By key actuated independently of carriage feed: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 300. Subject matter wherein the nonfeed or nonmovement of the
carriage* is caused by the pressing of a special key* element
on the key-board*, which special key is used only to prevent
carriage movement and has no other effect on the carriage movement. |
| | |
| 303 | For varying carriage feed: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 283. Subject matter wherein the carriage* is caused to
be moved in a direction that enables the character* symbols
to be imprinted in succession (i.e., the character-space* direction),
and wherein the movement in said direction is regulated to occur
in irregular or unequal increments of movement, the increments corresponding
to variable character-space distances or variable word-space* distances.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 10, | for a variable carriage-feed mechanism used in a "justification" typewriter. |
|
| | |
| 304 | For kerning or overlap imprinting: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 303. Subject matter wherein the movement of the carriage* in
the character-space* direction is regulated to enable (a)
imprinting a first character* symbol in a first character-space,
moving the carriage to a distance less than a full character-space
distance, and imprinting a second character different from the first
character partly within the character-space of the first-character,
or (b) imprinting a first character symbol in a first character-space,
moving the carriage a very short distance relative to the first
character-space, and imprinting the first character again almost
within the first character-space, but only slightly displaced from
the first character.
| | (1)
Note. The operation described in (a) above is known as "kerning" and
is sometimes used to form a compound letter symbol out of two standard
letter symbols. The operation described in (b) is known as overlap
imprinting and is sometimes used to form a "boldface" letter
symbol. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 210, | for a ribbon used for boldface typing. |
|
| | |
| 305 | By force-feed or screw-feed mechanism: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 303. Subject matter wherein the carriage* is caused to
be moved in a carriage-feed (i.e., character-space*) direction
through irregular increments by a mechanism that positively engages
the carriage or a portion affixed thereto and that positively moves
in a direction to thereby move the carriage therewith in said direction,
or wherein the carriage is caused to be moved by the rotation of
a helically threaded member.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 328, | for force-feed mechanism in an equal increment carriage
feed. |
|
| | |
| 306 | Proportional to variable widths of imprinted characters: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 303. Subject matter wherein the irregular or unequal increments
of movement of the carriage* correspond to the various
widths of the character* symbols that are imprinted on
the record-medium*.
| | (1)
Note. In the definition of the term character-space* in
the Glossary, section III, there is a discussion of the reason for variable
carriage feed. Briefly, in this mode of operation the carriage is
moved along the print-line* to the extent that a particular
character extends along the print-line. Therefore the distances between
adjacent characters are more nearly equal one to another, and the resulting
text appears uniform and gives a pleasing appearance. | |
| | |
| 306.1 | By settable elements (e.g., pins, bars, slides, etc): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 306. Subject matter wherein the irregular increments of carriage* movement
are caused by drive means that includes a movable member that is
provided with components that may be set into active position to
engage with another portion of the drive means, which component may
be cleared out of active position so as not to engage with the other
portion of the drive means, the selection of the amount of increment
of carriage movement being made by setting or not setting the components. |
| | |
| 306.2 | By ratchet wheel and controlled pawl: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 306. Subject matter wherein the irregular increments of carriage* movement
are caused by drive means that includes a pawl* that is
oscillated and caused to move into engagement with the teeth of
a ratchet* in the form of a ratchet wheel.
| | (1)
Note. The term "ratchet wheel" is defined
in the definition of ratchet. | |
| | |
| 307 | By ratchet rack and controlled pawl: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 306. Subject matter wherein the irregular increments of carriage* movement
are caused by drive means that includes a pawl* that is
oscillated and caused to move into engagement with the teeth of
a ratchet* in the form of a ratchet rack.
| | (1)
Note. The term "ratchet rack" is defined in
the definition of ratchet. | |
| | |
| 307.2 | By cooperating toothed members (e.g., gear, segment, rack,
etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 306. Subject matter wherein the irregular increments of carriage* movement
are caused by drive means that includes at least two components,
each of which is formed with notches or teeth, the notches of one
component intermeshing with the notches of the other so that movement
of one component is transmitted to the other component.
| | (1)
Note. Included in this subclass are drive means having gears
or differential gears, or gear and rack. or gear segment and gear,
in many arrangements of such components. | |
| | |
| 308 | Carriage backspace mechanism: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 283. Subject matter wherein the carriage* is caused to
be moved in a direction opposite to the typing (i.e., character-space*)
direction that enables the character* symbols to be imprinted in
succession, and wherein the movement in said opposite direction
is regulated to occur in increments corresponding to character-space distances
but in the direction opposite to the character-space direction.
| | (1)
Note. The backspace increments may be regular (i.e., corresponding
to equal character-space distances), or the backspace increments
may be irregular or unequal or variable (i.e., corresponding to
variable character-space distances, mechanism for which is found
in subclass 303). | |
| | |
| 309 | Backspace proportional to variable width of imprinted characters: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 308. Subject matter wherein the carriage* is caused to
be moved in irregular or unequal increments, the increment of movement
for any particular movement corresponding to a variable character-space* distance
equivalent to the various widths of the character* symbols
that were imprinted on the record-medium* just prior to the
need for backspacing.
| | (1)
Note. See the definition of character-space in the Glossary,
section III, for a discussion of the need for variable carriage
feed. This discussion is amplified in (1) Note to the definition
of subclass 306. In the typewriter of this subclass the backspace
distance is the same amount, but in the opposite direction, as the
variable character feed, and is for the purpose of returning the
carriage to exactly the same print-point* that the carriage
was before a particular character was imprinted. | |
| | |
| 310 | Including powered drive means: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 308. Subject matter wherein the carriage* is caused to
be moved by way of energy supplied to the typewriter by other than
the typist.
| | (1)
Note. The typewriter of this subclass is powered by such
energy as an electric motor, a solenoid, a continuously rotated power
roll the power of which is intermittently applied, etc. | |
| | |
| 311 | Including pawl and escapement wheel: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 308. Subject matter wherein the carriage* is caused to
be moved by the actuation of a key* element that moves
a pawl* that interengages with one of the teeth of a toothed
wheel to drive the carriage in a backspace direction. |
| | |
| 312 | Including pawl and escapement rack: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 308. Subject matter wherein the carriage* is caused to
be moved by the actuation of a key* element that moves
a pawl* that interengages with one of the teeth of a ratchet* rack
to drive the carriage in a backspace direction. |
| | |
| 313 | Carriage-return mechanism: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 283. Subject matter wherein the carriage* is caused to
be moved in a direction opposite to the typing (i.e., character-space*)
direction that enables the character* symbols to be imprinted in
succession, and wherein the movement in said opposite direction
is regulated to retrogress the carriage back to the beginning of
a print-line*.
| | (1)
Note. The carriage is usually returned until it is stopped
by a margin* regulator or margin-stop* element.
In some typewriters the carriage return may be modified to stop
at a preset position to permit the first character of a new print-line
to be indented from the margin*. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 34, | for carriage return in a flat-platen* typewriter. |
|
| | |
| 314 | With concurrent line-spacing: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 313. Subject matter wherein the record-medium* is moved
in a line-space* direction during approximately the same
time that the carriage* is returned to the beginning of
a print-line*.
| | (1)
Note. The line-spacing movement may occur at the beginning
or at the end or during the carriage-return movement. | |
| | |
| 314.2 | For selected number of line-spaces: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 314. Subject matter wherein the record-medium* is moved
in a predetermined number of line-space* increments during
the carriage-return movement, and wherein the predetermined number
may be changed at the will of the typist. |
| | |
| 314.3 | With disconnection of return by margin-stop: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 314. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to disablement
of the mechanism that returns the carriage* when the carriage
engages the margin* regulator that is located at the beginning
of a print-line*, wherein the carriage-feed drive may regain
control of the carriage movement.
| | (1)
Note. The term "margin regulator" is defined
in the definition of subclass 342. | |
| | |
| 314.5 | Initiated by actuator adjacent key-board: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 314. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to starting
return of the carriage* by movement by a typist of a key* element
on or near the key-board*.
| | (1)
Note. In most manually powered typewriters, the carriage
return is by way of a lever adjacent to the platen*. The
typewriter of this subclass is usually electrically powered, and
pressing of a key initiates the return. | |
| | |
| 314.6 | By return-clutch means: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 314. Subject matter wherein the carriage* return is powered
by way of a clutch mechanism that is provided in the typewriter
especially for carriage-return purposes.
| | (1)
Note. A "clutch" is a mechanism for intermittently
connecting a rotating driving shaft to a driven shaft by way of faces
that are connected, one face to each shaft, and intermittently connected
to one another. | |
| | |
| 315 | Responsive to carriage position: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 313. Subject matter wherein the carriage* return is initiated
as a result of the carriage having moved in the character-space* direction
to a predetermined location relative to the typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. The typewriter of this subclass is usually electrically
powered. | |
| | |
| 316 | Partial return (e.g., for start of paragraph, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 313. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a return
of the carriage* to a position short of the normal or usual
return to a margin* of the page*.
| | (1)
Note. The partial return is usually to a position where a
new paragraph will be started at a location on the record-medium* that
is indented from the margin of the text. | |
| | |
| 317.1 | For bidirectional drive: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 317. Subject matter wherein the carriage* is moved in
its return movement and in its feed movement by way of energy applied
to the mechanism other than energy supplied by the typist. |
| | |
| 317.2 | By spring-driven motor: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 317. Subject matter wherein the carriage is moved in its return
movement by way of energy that is stored in a resilient or yieldable
component connected to a drive train that moves the carriage.
| | (1)
Note. The power for winding the spring to store energy that
will subsequently be used during typing to return the carriage whenever
so desired by the typist maybe supplied by an electric motor or
may be supplied by the user of the typewriter. Disclosures of this
form of spring energy are properly classified herein because the
energy is stored and not applied by the typist at the time of carriage
return. | |
| | |
| 317.3 | Powered via engagement of a clutch: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 317. Subject matter wherein the carriage* is moved in
its return movement by way of energy that is applied by way of a
clutch connection.
| | (1)
Note. A "clutch" is a mechanism for intermittently
connecting a rotating driving shaft to a driven shaft by way of faces
that are connected, one face to each shaft, and intermittently connected
to one another. | |
| | |
| 319 | Carriage-feed mechanism (e.g., escapement, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 283. Subject matter wherein the carriage* is caused or
enabled to be moved in a direction that enables the character* symbols
to be imprinted in succession (i.e., the character-space* direction),
and wherein the movement in said direction is regulated to occur
in regular or equal increments of movement, each increment corresponding
to a character-space distance or a word-space* distance. |
| | |
| 320 | For carriage on which a type-head-carrier is mounted: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 319. Subject matter wherein the carriage* supports a type-head-carrier* for
movement of both the carriage and the type-head-carrier in said
direction that enables the character* symbols to be imprinted
in succession (i.e., the character-space* direction).
| | (1)
Note. As discussed in the Glossary, section III, under the
definition of carriage, in some typewriters the record-medium* is
held by a platen* that is mounted on a "platen
carriage" that is moved in said direction (i.e., the character-space
direction) thereby moving the record-medium for character-space
and word-space* distances. |
| |
In the typewriter of this subclass the record-medium does
not move during the imprinting of characters symbols. Instead the
type-face* elements are impacted against a record-medium
at a different print-point* for each character. The type-face
elements are on a type-head* that is mounted on a type-head-carrier
that is supported on a "type-head carriage" that
moves relative to the stationary record-medium, thereby moving the
successively impacted type-faces for character-space and word-space
distances. | |
| | |
| 320.1 | With concurrent movement of carriage for record-medium
and carriage for type-head-carrier: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 320. Subject matter wherein a typewriter is provided with two
carriage* mechanisms, one of which carriage (i.e., a "platen
carriage") supports a platen that holds a record-medium* for
movement of both the platen and the record-medium in a character-space* direction
and the other of which carriage (i.e., a "type-head* carriage") supports
a type-head-carrier* for movement of both the type-head
carriage and the type-head-carrier in a character-space direction.
| | (1)
Note. As discussed in the Glossary, section III, under the
definition of carriage, usually the direction of carriage feed for a
platen carriage is from right to left, whereas the direction of
carriage feed for a type-head carriage is from left to right (but
note the note exceptions discussed in that definition). | |
| | |
| 321 | With repeat spacing: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 319. Subject matter wherein the carriage* is urged to
be moved in successive increments of movement (the increments corresponding
to character-space* distances) a plurality of said increments
occurring upon the pressing of one key* element on the
key-board*.
| | (1)
Note. The typewriter of this subclass is usually one that
is electrically powered, thus enabling repeat spacing with one pressing
of a space key or space-bar*. | |
| | |
| 322 | By electric or magnetic power: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 319. Subject matter wherein the movement of the carriage* is
caused by electricity or magnetism.
| | (1)
Note. The electricity is supplied to an electric motor or
to an electromagnet (e.g., a solenoid) which effects carriage-feed
movements to the carriage. Also included in this subclass is a
typewriter wherein a spring motor is assisted by an auxiliary electric
motor. | |
| | |
| 323 | Carriage-feed in two directions (e.g., continuous typing
in both directions): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 319. Subject matter wherein the carriage* is urged in
a first direction and the movement in said first direction is regulated
as defined in subclass 319, and wherein said carriage is alternately
urged in a second direction that is opposite to said first direction
and the movement in said second direction is also regulated as defined
in subclass 319.
| | (1)
Note. A "print-line*" is usually
formed by imprinting successive characters* in the order
in which they are read. However, some typewriters are capable of imprinting
successive characters in reverse order, that is, the first character imprinted
is the last character of the print-line, the second character imprinted
is the next-to-last character of the print-line, etc. In the typewriter
of this subclass the first print-line may be imprinted in regular
order and the second print-line may be imprinted in reverse order,
the text being imprinted alternately from left to right, and then from
right to left in "continuous" typing action. | |
| | |
| 323.1 | In selected direction (e.g., for semitic language, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 323. Subject matter wherein one of said first or second directions
is chosen for the primary or significant direction of carriage* movement.
| | (1)
Note. The purpose of this mode of operation is to imprint
successive character* symbols in a character-space* direction that
is opposite to that which is used in the usual typewriter. In most
typewriters, characters are imprinted from left to right to conform
to most European languages, therefore a platen carriage that moves
the record-medium* effects movement of the platen carriage
from right to left whereas a type-head carriage that moves a type-head-carrier
effects movement of the type-head carriage from left to right.
Certain Semitic languages, e.g., Arabic and Hebrew, are written
from right to left, therefore in the typewriter of this subclass,
the carriage movement feed direction is selectively changed to be
reversed from the directions referred to above. | |
| | |
| 325 | By space-bar mechanism (e.g., separate connection to escapement),
or paragraph-indentation key: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 319. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
actuation of a carriage*-feeding movement as a result of
pressing a space-bar*-key* element, or wherein
significance is attributed to the actuation of a carriage-feeding movement
that moves the carriage a distance equivalent to a plurality of
character-space* increments as a result of pressing a single
key element.
| | (1)
Note. The distance referred to is that needed to start a
new paragraph in a text wherein the first letter of a paragraph
is indented from the margin* of the body of the text. | |
| | |
| 326 | With compensator for tilt of typewriter: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 319. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to mechanism
that counterbalances the force of gravity acting on a carriage* when
the typewriter is inclined to the horizontal.
| | (1)
Note. A typewriter is usually operated while it is in a horizontal
position. The carriage therefore moves horizontally, and the weight
of its mass does not affect its movement. However, if the typewriter is
tilted and its carriage is moved along a line that is inclined to
the horizontal, the weight of the carriage will affect its movement.
Disclosures in this subclass provided for means to compensate for the
weight of the carriage due to tilting of the typewriter. | |
| | |
| 327 | For diagonal print-line: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 319. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a mode
of operating a typewriter whereby successively imprinted character* symbols
form a print-line* that is inclined relative to the top
or bottom edge of a rectangular sheet.
| | (1)
Note. The diagonal print-line is usually formed by concurrently
feeding the carriage* and feeding the record-medium* between
successive imprints of characters. | |
| | |
| 328 | By force-feed or screw mechanism (e.g., direct drive, screw-biasing
carriage, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 319. Subject matter wherein the carriage* is caused to
be moved in a carriage-feed (i.e., character-space*) direction
by a mechanism that positively engages the carriage or a portion
affixed thereto and that positively moves in said direction to thereby
move the carriage therewith, or wherein the carriage is caused to
be moved in said direction by a helically threaded element that
is rotated and cooperates with another complementary element on
the carriage to move the carriage.
| | (1)
Note. In this subclass the carriage may be moved by a spring
that is biased or tensioned by a screw, or the carriage may be moved
by a pawl* engaging and moving a ratchet* wheel. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 305, | for force feed in a variable-feed carriage mechanism. |
|
| | |
| 328.1 | Including pawl and toothed rack: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 328. Subject matter wherein the carriage* is caused to
be moved by a pawl* that engages in a notch between two
teeth of a ratchet* rack, which rack is connected to the
carriage to cause movement of the carriage when the pawl moves while
in engagement with the rack.
| | (1)
Note. The term "rack" as used in this definition
is discussed under the definitions of pawl and ratchet in the Glossary, section
III. | |
| | |
| 329 | Carriage escapement controlled by pawl: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 319. Subject matter wherein the carriage* is urged by
a source of power to be moved in a direction for imprinting successive
character* symbols on the record-medium* (e.g.,
a character-space* direction), and the movement in said direction
is regulated by a mechanism that (a) restrains the carriage against
movement, and (b) releases the carriage momentarily to be urged
to move, and (c) again restrains the carriage against movement,
which mechanism includes a member or members having movement relative
to the carriage or to a portion connected thereto, the relative
movement between the member(s) and carriage effecting the restraint
and momentary release of the carriage to produce the increments
of movement corresponding to character-space and word-space* distances.
| | (1)
Note. The regulating mechanism defined above is usually a
pawl* and ratchet* mechanism as these members are
defined in the Glossary, section III. |
| | (2)
Note. Movement of the carriage during carriage feed is related
to movement of the type-face* element to the print-point* for
impressing the type-face against the record-medium*. These movements
occur in various terms applied in the typewriter art. In all the sequences
a typist initiates the operation by pressing a key* element
which causes movement of a type-face (e.g., a type-face on a type-bar*,
a type-face on a type-head*, etc.) from its rest position.
In "full-drop" escapement the sequence is (a)
the type-face is impressed at the print-point, (b) the carriage
starts its movement through a full character-space distance, and
(c) the carriage completes a character-space and stops. In a "half-drop" escapement
the sequence is (a) the carriage starts its movement but stops momentarily
approximately halfway in a character-space, (b) the type-face is impressed
at the print-point, and (c) the carriage continues its movement
through the remainder of the character-space. In "speed" escapement
(also known as "reverse" escapement) the sequence
is (a) the carriage starts its movement through a full character-space
distance, (b) the carriage completes a character-space and stops,
and (c) the type-face is impressed at the print-point. In all the sequences
the type-face is returned to its rest position and the key* is
also returned to its rest position. The differences between the
various sequences are primarily in the time available to enable a
type-bar (which carries the type-face element) to move from rest
position to print-point position and back to rest position (a) as
related to the time available for a next-actuated type-bar to perform
the same movements without interference from the previously actuated
type-bar, and (b) as related to the time available to move the carriage through
a carriage space. | |
| | |
| 329.1 | Means to ensure engagement of pawl at start of print-line
(i.e., overbanking control): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 329. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to structure
that will positively cause a pawl* of the regulating mechanism
to contact the carriage* or a portion (e.g., a ratchet*)
connected thereto whenever the carriage has been properly positioned
at the beginning of the print-line* (i.e., in most typewriters
at the left margin* or the print-point* proper
for the imprint of the first character* symbol of a print-line). |
| | |
| 329.2 | Carriage-feed initiated and completed during depression
of character key (e.g., "speed" or "reverse" escapement): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 329. Subject matter wherein a key* element that is used
to cause imprint of a character* symbol is pressed, the
pressing of said key element initiating (a) the movement of a type-face* from
its rest position to the print-point*, and (b) the movement
of the carriage* through a character-space* distance,
and wherein the movement of the carriage is started and completed
through a complete character-space before the type-face impacts
the print-point.
| | (1)
Note. The differences between "full-drop" escapement, "half-drop" escapement,
and "speed" or "reverse" escapement
are discussed in (2) Note to the definition of subclass 329 above. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 330.2, | for "half-drop" escapement and
see (1) Note above. |
|
| | |
| 329.3 | Pawl rocker spring regulating device: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 329. Subject matter wherein a pawl* is supported by a
component, which component is mounted for oscillation relative to
a carriage-rack* or to a ratchet* disc or wheel
and is urged into engagement with the teeth or notches of the carriage-rack
or the ratchet disc by a yieldable element, and wherein the force
with the yieldable element urges the component is adjustable. |
| | |
| 330 | Via ratchet wheel connected to pinion and carriage-rack: |
| | The regulating mechanism includes (a) a carriage-rack* affixed
to the carriage*, and (b) a rotatable gear having teeth
that are engaged with teeth or notches in the carriage-rack, and (c)
a ratchet* that is in the form of a rotatable disc or wheel
and is joined to the rotatable gear, and (d) a pawl* that
cooperates with the ratchet, the assemblage of parts cooperating
to effect the restraint and momentary release of the carriage. |
| | |
| 330.1 | And plural pawls: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 330. Subject matter wherein the regulating mechanism includes
more than one pawl* member.
| | (1)
Note. Usually two pawls are provided, one of the pawls disengaging
from between two adjacent teeth of a ratchet* momentarily,
and the other of the pawls holding the ratchet against movement
in excess of one increment. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 332.1, | for escapement mechanism having plural pawls and
one or more ratchet racks. |
|
| | |
| 330.2 | For half-drop escapement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 330.1. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to an
action of the pawl* and ratchet* mechanism that
restrains, momentarily releases, and again restrains the movement
of said carriage* to produce a "half-drop" escapement.
| | (1)
Note. The term half-drop escapement is discussed in (2) Note
to subclass 329 above, wherein the action of various forms of carriage
escapement (including "speed" escapement) is discussed
and compared. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 329.2, | for "speed" escapement and see
(1) Note above. |
|
| | |
| 330.3 | Mounted on pivotable pawl carrier or rocker: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 330.1. Subject matter wherein said pawl* members are supported
by a component, which component is mounted for oscillation relative
to said ratchet* disc or wheel to enable one or another of
the pawls to engage one or another of the teeth or notches of the
ratchet disc or wheel, whereby the disc or wheel, and thereby the
carriage*, is alternately restrained against movement,
released for movement, and restrained against movement. |
| | |
| 330.4 | Including pawl(s) fixed to rocker: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 330.3. Subject matter wherein one or more of said pawl* members
are integral with or fixedly secured to said component.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass includes some typewriters wherein the
component or rocker includes fixed offset pawls. | |
| | |
| 330.5 | And slidable pawl: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 330.4. Subject matter wherein at least one of said pawl* members
is mounted for rectilinear movement relative to said oscillatable
component. |
| | |
| 330.7 | Mounted on movable (e.g., rotatable, slidable) pawl carrier: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 330.1. Subject matter wherein said pawl* members are supported
by a component, which component is mounted for movement relative
to said ratchet* disc or wheel to enable one or another of
the pawls to engage one or another of the teeth or notches of the
ratchet disc or wheel, whereby the disc or wheel, and thereby the
carriage*, is alternately restrained against movement,
released for movement, and restrained against movement.
| | (1)
Note. The movement of the component or pawl carrier may be
reciprocation or rotation. | |
| | |
| 331.2 | Including cushioned escapement support (e.g., rocker, pawl
buffer, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 330. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
construction of the support for the pawl* member or of
the component on which the pawl is oscillatable, or of the ratchet* wheel
with which the pawl cooperates, which construction is characterized
in that it is provided with yieldable or resilient means.
| | (1)
Note. The support absorbs excess movement or the force or
shock of movement of the carriage* or its driving or escapement
mechanism. | |
| | |
| 332 | Via toothed rack: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 329. Subject matter wherein the regulating mechanism includes
(a) a ratchet* that is in the form of a bar having teeth
or notches along one of its sides, and (b) a pawl* that
cooperates with the ratchet, the assemblage of parts cooperating
to effect the restraint and momentary release of the carriage*.
| | (1)
Note. In a "platen-carriage" typewriter (see
the discussion of platen carriage in the definition of carriage
in the Glossary, section III), the ratchet is usually a carriage-rack*.
In a "type-head carriage" typewriter (see the
discussion of type-head* carriage in the Glossary, section III)
the ratchet [defined in (a) above] is usually
fixed to the frame of the typewriter. | |
| | |
| 332.1 | And plural pawls: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 332. Subject matter wherein the regulating mechanism includes
more than one pawl* member.
| | (1)
Note. Usually two pawls are provided, one of the pawls disengaging
from between two adjacent teeth of a carriage-rack* momentarily,
and the other of the pawls holding the carriage-rack against movement
in excess of one increment. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 330.1, | for escapement mechanism having plural pawls and
one or more ratchet* wheels. |
|
| | |
| 332.2 | Mounted on pivotable pawl carrier or rocker: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 332.1. Subject matter wherein said pawl* members are supported
by a component, which component is mounted for oscillation relative
to a carriage-rack* to enable one or another of the pawls
to engage one of the teeth or notches of the carriage-rack, whereby
the carriage* is alternately restrained against movement, released
for movement, and restrained against movement. |
| | |
| 332.3 | Mounted on movable (e.g., rotatable, slidable) pawl carrier: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 332.1. Subject matter wherein said pawl* members are supported
by a component, which component is mounted for movement relative
to said ratchet* bar to enable one or another of the pawls
to engage one or another of the teeth or notches of the ratchet
bar, whereby the ratchet bar, and thereby the carriage*,
is alternately restrained against movement, released for movement,
and restrained against movement.
| | (1)
Note. The movement of the component or pawl carrier may be
reciprocation or rotation. | |
| | |
| 333 | Universal-bar or actuator therefor: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 319. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
universal-bar* in the drive train of the carriage-feed
mechanism or of any other mechanism of the typewriter, or to a means
for moving the universal-bar.
| | (1)
Note. Included in this subclass is a typewriter wherein the
universal-bar is actuated by a key* lever. | |
| | |
| 333.1 | Connected to actuator for another function: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 333. Subject matter wherein the universal-bar* is part
of the drive train for a function* of the typewriter in
addition to the carriage*-feed function.
| | (1)
Note. The term "carriage feed" is defined
in the definition of subclass 319. The other function mentioned
above may be the vibrator* for the ink*-ribbon* feed,
or the ink-ribbon feed itself. | |
| | |
| 333.2 | Adjustable: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 333. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to means
for varying the relationship of the universal-bar* to the
drive train of which it is a part. |
| | |
| 334 | Carriage-feed-release mechanism: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 319. Subject matter wherein the carriage* is moved and
the movement is controlled by a movement-regulating mechanism that
engages the carriage or a portion affixed thereto, which mechanism
may be temporarily disconnected from the carriage to enable unregulated
movement of the carriage.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass provides for a disclosure wherein the
carriage may be disengaged from a carriage-feed spring which, per
se, is provided for in subclass 336. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 553, | for a line-space* actuator that also has an
effect on the carriage-feed release. |
|
| | |
| 334.1 | By disengagement of clutch between ratchet wheel and pinion: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 334. Subject matter wherein the regulating mechanism that enables
carriage feed includes a rotatable gear having teeth with teeth
or notches in a carriage-rack* and a ratchet* in
the form of a rotatable disc or wheel that is joined to the rotatable
gear, and also includes a clutch that connects the gear to the disc
wheel, and wherein significance is attributed to means for disconnecting
the clutch to disconnect the gear from the disc or wheel. |
| | |
| 334.2 | By disengagement of escapement pawl(s): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 334. Subject matter wherein the regulating mechanism that enables
carriage feed includes a pawl* or pawl members that engage
with teeth or notches in a carriage-rack*, and wherein
significance is attributed to means for disconnecting the pawl or
pawls from the carriage-rack to enable temporary unregulated movement
of the carriage*. |
| | |
| 334.3 | From carriage-rack: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 334.2. Subject matter wherein the means for temporarily disconnecting
the pawl* or pawl members from the carriage-rack* acts
by moving the carriage-rack away from the pawl or pawl members. |
| | |
| 336 | Spring-biasing carriage for feed: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 319. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a yieldable
element that urges the carriage* of a typewriter to be
moved in a carriage-feed (i.e., character-space*) direction, the
movement being regulated by a mechanism previously provided for
in this schedule. |
| | |
| 336.1 | Torsion spring in rotatable barrel: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 336. Subject matter wherein said yieldable element is in the
form of an elongated member wound in a plurality of spiral convolutions
housed within a hollow drum, one end of the member being fixed to
the drum to effect rotation of the drum when the yieldable element
is tensioned. |
| | |
| 337 | Carriage-retarder mechanism: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 283. Subject matter wherein the carriage* is caused to
be moved in either a character-space* direction or in a
direction opposite to said character-space direction, and the movement
in either of said directions in controlled to slow or decelerate
said movement or to maintain a uniform rate of movement whereby
acceleration is controlled. |
| | |
| 338.1 | Using centrifugal force: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 338. Subject matter wherein the regulator utilized the tendency
of a mass that is rotating about an axis to be impelled away from
that axis by the rotation, the action of the regulator being to control
the velocity of the carriage. |
| | |
| 339 | Using fluid or fluent-material retarder: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 337. Subject matter wherein said movement of the carriage* is
controlled by a regulator that utilizes the movement of a flowable
substance as a means to control the velocity of the carriage.
| | (1)
Note. The flowable substance used includes a gas, a liquid,
or a fluent material such as sand or small particles in a device
sometimes termed a "dashpot" or similar structure. | |
| | |
| 340 | Using frictional retarder (e.g., strap, disc, drum, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 337. Subject matter wherein said movement of the carriage* is
controlled by a regulator that utilizes the motion of two surfaces
in close contact with each other, and the consequent resistance
to such motion due to the close contact, as a means to control the
velocity of the carriage.
| | (1)
Note. Among the various structures used as friction retarder
or friction brake means are: a drum, a disc, a helically wrapped
spring, a strap, etc., any of which cooperate with a surface moving relatively
thereto for causing a frictional retarding force to be generated. | |
| | |
| 341 | Carriage-buffer stop or rebound control: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 337. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a regulator
that is located at the end of travel of a carriage* and
controls the stopping of the carriage when the carriage reaches
the end of its travel, or inhibits a tendency for the carriage to
bounce or retract from its stopping position when it reaches the
end of its travel. |
| | |
| 342 | Margin-regulator (e.g., adjustable margin-stop) mechanism: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 283. Subject matter wherein the carriage* is caused or
enabled to be moved in either a character-space* direction
or an opposite direction, and wherein significance is attributed
to a margin-stop* for controlling the movement of the carriage
in either of said directions by stopping the carriage at a preset
point, which point is adjustable relative to the typewriter, and
which point corresponds to either the left margin* or the right
margin of the record-medium* that is being typed on.
| | (1)
Note. In most typewriters the right-hand margin regulator
(i.e., of a typewriter that imprints successive character* symbols
from left to right) is usually combined with a mechanism to prevent further
typing on the print-line*, although the preventing mechanism
may be disengaged at the will of the typist to enable imprinting
of several additional characters on the same print-line. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 671+, | for a lock responsive to the end of a type print-line. |
|
| | |
| 343 | With intermediate margin-stop: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 342. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with one
margin-stop* for the left margin* and another
margin-stop for the right margin, and is further provided with a
third margin-stop between the one and the other margin-stops.
| | (1)
Note. The third margin-stop is used selectively. That is,
for a particular text, the typist may require the temporary use of
a margin-stop located at a margin other than the usual left-hand
or right-hand margin. The intermediate margin-stop is then used
for this temporary purpose. | |
| | |
| 344 | With other typewriter function controlled by margin-stop
(e.g., signal, line-space): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 342. Subject matter wherein said margin-stop* also regulates
the action or nonaction of another typewriter function*.
| | (1)
Note. In this subclass the margin-stop causes the ringing
of a bell or the actuation of a signal in response to the travel of
the carriage* to the end of a print-line* or the
margin-stop causes platen*-increment rotation for line-spacing
and the end of a carriage* movement to the end of a print-line. | |
| | |
| 345 | Carriage-arrest function (e.g., "overbank"): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 344. Subject matter wherein the carriage* is moved in
a carriage-return direction and the movement in that direction is
stopped in a controlled manner to prevent or inhibit shock to the
mechanism or rebound from the stopping position. |
| | |
| 346 | Print-line locking function: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 344. Subject matter wherein the carriage* is caused or
enabled to be moved in a carriage-feed (i.e., character-space*)
direction, and the movement in that direction is stopped by the
margin-stop* and also causes the key* elements
to be locked to prevent pressing any of the character* keys so
that no further character symbols may be imprinted on the record-medium*.
| | (1)
Note. The typewriter of this subclass is provided with a
margin-stop to stop the carriage at the end of its print- line*.
However, the margin stop may be released by a margin-stop-release
key on the keyboard*, the pressing of which key will disengage
the locking of the carriage and of the key elements so that several
more characters may be imprinted on the print-line. | |
| | |
| 347 | With multiple-pitch selector: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 342. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with means
to determine the pitch* of the character-space* distances
and to change the pitch by changing the carriage*-feed
mechanism for different character-space distances and wherein significance
is attributed to set the margin-stop* members in conformance
with different pitches used for a particular size or font* of
type-face*. |
| | |
| 348 | With release of margin-stop: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 342. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to selective
disengagement of one or another margin-stop* member from
its active carriage-stopping position, thereby to enable one or
more character* symbols to be imprinted on the record-medium* to
the right or to the left of the normal margin* of the text being
typed. |
| | |
| 349 | Conjointly set or centrally spring biased: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 342. Subject matter wherein the margin-stop* members
at opposite ends of the carriage* or at opposite ends of
the travel of the carriage are both moved to a new position at the
same time, or wherein the movement of one or both of the margin-stop
members is urged by a yieldable member toward the middle of the
carriage or toward the middle of movement of the carriage. |
| | |
| 350 | On record-medium table or paper-finger: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 342. Subject matter wherein the margin-stop* member
is mounted on the support that holds the record-medium* or
is mounted on the paper-finger* that helps to hold the
record-medium to the platen*. |
| | |
| 352 | Carriage, per se, or guideway therefor: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 283. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to structure
of the carriage* of the typewriter or to the structure
of the rail or track or component(s) that enable the carriage to
move relative to the typewriter during carriage feed, or carriage
return of carriage-backspace motion of the carriage.
| | (1)
Note. In many typewriters the carriage is a structure on
which the platen* is supported or mounted for intermittent
or incremental rotation of the platen to effect line-space* distances.
In such typewriters the platen carriage intermittently moves the
platen (and the record-medium* that is held thereto) along
the print-line* to effect character-space* and word-space* distances.
In other typewriters the type-head carriage* is a structure
on which a type-head-carrier* is supported or mounted for
movement of a type-head* that includes a multiplicity of
type-member* or type-face* elements. In such latter
typewriters the record-medium remains stationary during the imprinting
of a print-line, and the type-head carriage intermittently moves the
type-along the print-line to effect character-space and work-space
distances. | |
| | |
| 353 | Including auxiliary carriage: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 352. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with a
main carriage* that supports a platen* and is
also provided with a secondary or auxiliary carriage that supports
the same or an auxiliary platen in cooperative relationship therewith.
| | (1)
Note. A distinction should be made between the typewriter
of this subclass, wherein the main and the auxiliary carriages cooperate
in the same typewriter, and the typewriter of subclass 82 wherein
plural platens may be independently supported in an assemblage of typewriters. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 82, | and see (1) Note above. |
|
| | |
| 354 | Guideway or bearings for carriage: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 352. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
rail or track or component(s) associated with the carriage*,
which component(s) enables the carriage to move relative to the typewriter
during carriage feed, or carriage return, or carriage backspace
motion of the carriage, or wherein significance is attributed to the
journals, gudgeons, or assemblages that reduce the effects of friction
between moving parts. |
| | |
| 354.1 | Guideway cooperating with ball bearings or roller bearings: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 354. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
cooperative association of the rail or track with the journals,
gudgeons, or assemblages, which assemblages include a bearing known
as a ball bearing or a roller bearing.
| | (1)
Note. The form of bearing for this and indented subclasses
includes two annular members having an annular space therebetween,
in which annular space a plurality of rollers or balls are provided.
By this construction, one of the members is enabled to rotate relative
to the other member, the rollers or the balls revolving and rotating
within annular space. | |
| | |
| 354.2 | Including bearing holder geared to carriage: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 354.1. Subject matter wherein said bearings are provided with toothed
portions, and a part of the carriage* is provided with
other toothed portions, and wherein the toothed portions of the bearings
intermesh with the toothed portions of the carriage. |
| | |
| 354.3 | Including repositionable guideway: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 354.1. Subject matter wherein the rail or track for the carriage* may
be shifted or adjusted relative to the typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. This construction enables an operator to clean, or
align or adjust the parts of the typewriter. | |
| | |
| 356 | To nonprint position: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 355. Subject matter wherein the shift or adjustment is from a
position at which the platen* supported by the carriage* is
in an operative (i.e., typing) position, to a position at which
the platen, still supported by the carriage, is not in operative
position.
| | (1)
Note. This construction enables a carriage to be moved out
of the way to facilitate cleaning, inspection, or adjustment of
the interior of the typewriter. | |
| | |
| 357 | To detach carriage: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 355. Subject matter wherein the carriage* of the typewriter
may be readily removed from, and the same or another carriage may
be replaced in, the typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. This construction enables a carriage to be removed
to facilitate cleaning of the interior of the typewriter, or to replace
the carriage with one of a different size. | |
| | |
| 358 | To detach platen: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 355. Subject matter wherein the platen* of the typewriter
may be readily removed from, and the same or another platen may
be replaced in, the carriage. |
| | |
| 359 | HAVING TYPEWRITER-CONTROLLED RECIPROCABLE ELECTROMAGNETIC
DRIVE FOR TYPE-BAR ACTUATION IN SAME TYPEWRITER: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with one
or more magnetic* motors energized by electricity and movable
to-and-fro in a straight line, the magnetic motor(s) being used
for effecting the movement of any type-bar* member from
a rest position to a print-point* position and being initiated
by a typist who is typing on the typewriter that is being actuated.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 184, | for a typewriter having electromagnetic actuators
for plural functions*. |
|
| | |
| 361 | Including actuator to complete depression of selected key
or key lever: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 359. Subject matter wherein one or more of said magnetic* motors
is energized when a selected key* element or a selected
key lever is pressed by the typist, the energization of the magnetic motor
causing the continuance of movement of the selected type-bar* member
connected to said selected key or key lever has completed movement
from a rest position to a print-point* position.
| | (1)
Note. The term "selected" is discussed in
the definitions of case-shift* and type-bar assemblage
in the Glossary, section III, and the term "key lever" is
defined in subclass 472 below. |
| | (2)
Note. The typewriter of this subclass may include one magnetic
motor (i.e., "universal" actuator) that completes
the depression of any key or key lever, or may include a magnetic
motor (i.e., an individual solenoid) for each of the keys or key
levers. | |
| | |
| 362 | Including universal actuator to actuate selected type-bar
action: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 359. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with a
plurality of type-bar* members and a plurality of linkages
connected so as to join one linkage to one type-bar member, whereby
pressing of a selected key* element will cause movement
of a corresponding selected type-bar, and wherein one said magnetic* motor
is provided, which magnetic motor causes movement of any selected
type-bar member by way of a corresponding linkage. |
| | |
| 363 | And individual solenoids to connect the type-bar action
to be actuated: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 362. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with magnetic* motors
in addition to said one magnetic motor, which additional magnetic
motors are used to join one linkage to a corresponding type-bar*,
and wherein one additional magnetic motor corresponding to a selected
type-bar is energized to join the selected linkage to the selected
type-bar when said one magnetic motor is energized to cause movement
of the selected type-bar. |
| | |
| 364 | Including individual solenoids to actuate the selected
type-bar action: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 359. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with a
plurality of type-bar* members and with a plurality of
magnetic* motors, one such motor being effective to cause
movement of one type-bar, and wherein the pressing of a selected
key* element causes energization of a corresponding selected
magnetic motor to cause movement of its connected type-bar. |
| | |
| 365 | HAVING ROTATED POWER DRIVE INTERMITTENTLY APPLIED FOR TYPE-BAR
ACTUATION: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein mechanical energy is used to turn
a shaft, said shaft being the origin of the force needed to perform
any of the typing operations in a typewriter, and wherein said shaft
is caused to be connected temporarily to a force-transmitting member only
when an operation is to be performed, which operation includes the
movement of a type-bar* (i.e., having a type-face* element thereon)
from a rest position to a print-point* position for imprinting
a character* on a record-medium*, or the movement
of any element of a typewriter to perform a typing function*.
| | (1)
Note. The mechanical energy is usually supplied by a electric
motor that is powered to rotate continuously. The operation usually
performed is the intermittent (i.e., on demand of the typist) actuation of
a succession of type-bar members that are on a type-bar-segment*,
but is not limited to that operation. A typist using such an "electric
typewriter" needs to exert only as much force in depressing
a key* element as is needed to connect the force-transmitting
member to the shaft or to release the energy stored in a spring to
actuate an operation such as type-bar actuation, carriage feed,
carriage return, case-shift*, etc., the named operations being
only exemplary. The power may be applied directly via a power roll
of a linkage or may be applied indirectly via means to transfer
the power to an intermediate selectively operated actuator (e.g.,
such as a spring) capable of storing the power. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 192, | for a continuously rotated power drive intermittently
applied for ribbon* feed or vibrator* actuation. |
|
| | |
| 366 | Including jam-release means: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 365. Subject matter wherein a power-driven typewriter is provided
with means for freeing a blockage caused by two movable parts of
the typewriter tending to occupy the same space at the same time.
| | (1)
Note. The most frequent occurrence of a jam results from
two type-face* elements, each on its respective type-bar*, that
arrive at the print-point* at the same time. Since a print-point
accommodates only one type-face element, a jam will occur if two
such elements tend to occupy the print-point simultaneously. The
mechanism of this subclass inhibits the actuation of one of the
type-bars to prevent such an occurrence. In a typewriter that is
not provided with such preventing means, or in a typewriter in which
such a jam occurs despite said means, the mechanism effects the
release of such a jammed condition. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 425, | for other jam-release mechanism. |
|
| | |
| 367 | Interposed components driven by filter shaft: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 365. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is driven by a power
drive that includes said shaft and a second shaft, which second
shaft is rotated intermittently (i.e., when an operation is to be performed),
and has radial projections thereon one of which projections strikes
a member when the second shaft is rotated, which member is moved
substantially tangentially of the second shaft when struck, and
which member lies between the second shaft and a linkage that actuates
the operation to be performed.
| | (1)
Note. The operation that is performed is usually the selection
of a type-face* to be impacted against the record- medium* and
the actuation of the type-bar* that carries the selected
type-face. | |
| | |
| 368 | For repeat-type action: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 365. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is driven by a power
drive and is capable of an operation in which a typist presses one
particular character*-key* element and the type-face* corresponding
to said key will impact the record-medium* again and again
to produce a succession of character symbols during the one pressing
of the key element, all of which symbols are the same character.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 299, | for a typewriter capable of forming a succession
of character symbols, all of which symbols are the same character. |
|
| | |
| 369 | With prevention of repeat typing: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 368. Subject matter wherein said typewriter is capable of said
operation in which repeated typing of the same character* symbol
occurs, or is capable of inhibiting the repeated typing operation.
| | (1)
Note. A typewriter of this subclass includes a mechanism
that is either (a) particularly designed to prevent repeat typing
that might otherwise occur, or (b) capable of selectively inhibiting
the repeated typing operation. | |
| | |
| 370 | Via continuously rotated power roll: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 365. Subject matter wherein said shaft is turned uninterruptedly
(i.e., continuously rotated) and is fixed to a generally cylindrical
member for similar continuous rotation of the member, which cylindrical
member is positioned transversely of the type-bar* action
mechanisms and the key* lever mechanisms of the typewriter,
and is provided with surface modifications or characteristics intended
to be engaged temporarily with a component that is connected to
a type-bar action or to means for actuating a function* when
a typist depresses a selected key element that initiates said one
action or said one function*.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass includes a typewriter having (a) a plurality
of pulleys fixed on a continuously rotated drive shaft, each type-bar
action being selectively connected with its respective pulley by
a flexible band, or (b) a continuously rotated cam-shaped element
selectively engageable by each key lever to limit the rate of depression
of the key lever and to drive the selected key lever to its rest
position subsequent to impact of the type-bar against the record-medium*. |
| | (2)
Note. A power roll of this subclass (370) differs from a
drive shaft of subclass 365 in that a drive shaft is merely a continuously
rotated shaft, whereas a power roll is located in the typewriter
in a particular transverse relationship, has a surface that is particularly
modified to engage a selected component for movement of the component,
and cooperates with the selected component under control of the typist
by way of key lever elements. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 186, | for a continuously rotated power roll selectively
connected to plural functions. |
|
| | |
| 371 | And oscillatable cam: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 370. Subject matter wherein said continuously rotated cylindrical
member intermittently drives a component, which component has a cam
surface and pivots to-and-fro in an arc to move a lever on which
the component is mounted.
| | (1)
Note. A "cam surface" is defined as the edge
periphery of a disc that oscillates or rotates about an axis, the
radial distance from the axis to the periphery varying around the
periphery. The cam is mounted on a lever that is pivotally mounted
and is connected to the type-bar* action linkage. When
the cam is temporarily connected to the cylindrical member, the
cam oscillates about its axis, thereby pushing the lever through the
pivot axis of the cam. The resulting oscillation of the lever actuates
the type-bar linkage. | |
| | |
| 372 | And rotatable cam (e.g., single-lobe cam): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 370. Subject matter wherein said continuously rotated cylindrical
member intermittently drives a component, which component has a cam
surface and turns around an axis to move a lever on which the component
is mounted.
| | (1)
Note. A "cam surface" is defined as the edge
periphery of a disc that oscillates or rotates about an axis, the
radial distance from the axis to the periphery varying around the
periphery. The cam is mounted on a lever that is pivotally mounted
and is connected to the type-bar* action linkage. When
the cam is temporarily connected to the cylindrical member, the
cam rotates about its axis, thereby pushing the lever through the pivot
axis of the cam. The resulting oscillation of the lever actuates
the type-bar linkage. | |
| | |
| 373 | Including double-lobe cam: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 372. Subject matter wherein said cam surface is so configured
that it will effect two complete oscillatory movements of the lever
on which it is mounted during each rotation (i.e., through 360°)
of said component, a complete oscillatory movement comprising a
movement away from and a movement toward a rest or normal position. |
| | |
| 375 | Snatch roll: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 370. Subject matter wherein the surface characteristics of said
continuously rotated cylindrical member include toothlike projections
extending circumferentially around the member, each projection being
substantially parallel to the axis of rotation of the member to
form a longitudinally corrugated surface on the member, and wherein
said component is a pawl* or a star wheel (i.e., a rotatable
element having projections or teeth extending radially), which component
is temporarily engaged with said surface when an actuation of the
typewriter is desired. |
| | |
| 375.1 | Including plural coaxial snatch discs: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 375. Subject matter wherein said continuously rotated cylindrical
member is formed as a composite assemblage of elements rotating
on the same axis, each of which elements extends in an axial direction
to only part of the axial length of said member, but is otherwise
similar in configuration to said member as to its toothlike projections.
| | (1)
Note. The elements may be arranged so that the teeth of the
side by side discs form a composite projection that is parallel
to the axis, or may be arranged with the side by side discs rotationally
displaced so that the teeth form a composite projection that is
helical about the axis. | |
| | |
| 375.2 | With control of impact force: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 375. Subject matter wherein the cylindrical member and the component
cause a type-bar* together with its type-face* element
to be impressed against a record-medium* with a particular impetus,
and wherein the cooperation between the cylindrical member and the
component, or movement of the component itself, may be regulated
as to its impression impetus.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 376, | for impact control in a typewriter having a power
roll. |
|
| | |
| 375.3 | With electromagnetic control of pawl: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 375. Subject matter wherein said component is a pawl* that
engages a notch between the projection of said cylindrical member
when an actuation of the typewriter is desired, the pawl being moved
into engagement with the notch by the energization of an electromagnetically
driven element. |
| | |
| 375.4 | And star wheel: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 375. Subject matter wherein said component is a rotatable element
having projections or teeth extending radially from the axis of
rotation of the element, and wherein a projection or tooth of said
element engages a notch between the projections of said cylindrical
member when an actuation of the typewriter is desired. |
| | |
| 376 | With control of impact force: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 370. Subject matter wherein the member and the component cause
a type-bar* together with its type-face* element
to be impressed against a record-medium* with a particular
impetus, and wherein the cooperation between the cylindrical member
and the component, or the movement of the component itself, may
be regulated as to its impression impetus.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 375.2, | for impact control in a typewriter having a snatch
roll. |
|
| | |
| 377 | Via limited-rotation clutch: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 365. Subject matter wherein said continuously rotated shaft is
caused to be connected intermittently and temporarily to said force-transmitting
member by way of a clutch that is engaged for only a predetermined
number of degrees of rotation and disengaged after the predetermined
number of degrees of rotation has been transmitted.
| | (1)
Note. A clutch is a mechanism that includes a first element
rotatable with a first shaft and a second element rotatable to drive
a second shaft. The elements and shafts are rotatable about a common axis,
and at least one of the elements is movable relative to the other
element into nonslidable engagement therewith. When the elements
are in engagement the rotation of the first shaft will be transmitted
to the second shaft and when the elements are not in engagement
the second shaft will not be rotated by the first shaft. The rotation
of the continuously rotating shaft causes rotation of the first
shaft, which causes rotation of the second shaft by way of the intermittently engaged
elements, and the force-transmitting member is connected to the
second shaft to be intermittently driven thereby. | |
| | |
| 378 | Plural cams clutched to drive shaft: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 377. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with a
plurality of said second elements, each of which second elements
includes a cam surface that is connected by way of a cam-surface
follower to a force-transmitting member for a selected type-bar* action. |
| | |
| 379 | Via spring drive (e.g., spring-driven snatch roll): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 365. Subject matter wherein said shaft is caused to be connected
intermittently and temporarily to said force-transmitting member
by way of at least one resilient or yieldable component, which component
is stressed by rotation of the shaft, and the stress in the component
is released intermittently or selectively to actuate a selected
type-bar* action. |
| | |
| 380 | Including Individual spring for each type-bar action: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 379. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with a
plurality of said components corresponding to the number of type-bar* members
and the number of mechanisms that actuate the type-bars, one of
said components being connected to each one of said type-bars. |
| | |
| 381 | Including reciprocable common actuator: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 379. Subject matter wherein one force-transmitting member is
capable of being connected to any of a plurality of type-bar* action
mechanisms as selected by a typist, and wherein said force-transmitting
member moves to-and-fro to make such connection. |
| | |
| 382 | Via reciprocating common actuator: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 365. Subject matter wherein said shaft is caused to be connected
intermittently and temporarily to said force-transmitting member
by way of a component that moves to-an-fro, and wherein a plurality
of force-transmitting members are provided, each member effecting
movement of one of a plurality of type-bar* action mechanisms
as selected by a typist. |
| | |
| 383 | TYPE-BAR-ACTION MECHANISM OR TYPE-FACE ON TYPE-BAR OR TYPE-FACE
INKER: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to (a)
means for effecting movement of a type-bar* member from
its rest (i.e., normal or base) position to its print-point* (i.e., type-face* impacting)
position or to the close vicinity of the print-point position, or
(b) means for returning a type-bar from its print-point position
to its rest position, or (c) structure for enabling such movement
or for supporting a type-bar during such movement, or (d) a type-face
mounted on or supported by a type-bar, or (e) means for applying
ink* to a type-face before the type face is impacted against
the record-medium*, or (f) structure that is used in conjunction
with a type-bar.
| | (1)
Note. Although it is apparent that the movement of a type-bar
is ordinarily initiated by the pressing of a key* element by
a typist, none of the key, or key-board* or key-lever mechanisms
is included in the structure of this or indented subclasses. For
such key structure, see subclass 472. |
| | (2)
Note. This subclass is for a rear-strike typewriter wherein
significance is attributed to a typewriter in which the type-member* elements
impact against the platen* (and thereby impact against
a record-medium that is backed by the platen) at a print-point* located
adjacent to a rearmost part of the platen. This subclass is also
for a front-strike typewriter having structure not provided for in
the following subclasses wherein significance is attributed to a
typewriter in which the type-member elements impact against the
platen (and thereby impact against a record-medium that is backed by
the platen) at a print-point located adjacent to a foremost part
of the platen. | |
| | |
| 384 | Spring drive for type-bar action: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 383. Subject matter wherein the movement of a type-bar* from
its rest position to its print-point* position is caused
by the manual depression of a key* element by a typist
by way of a resilient or yieldable component that is stressed and
the stress is released intermittently or selectively to effect said
movement. |
| | |
| 385 | With added-motion mechanism for type-bar near print-point: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 383. Subject matter wherein a typewriter is provided with first
means for effecting movement of a type-bar* from its rest
position to a position close to (i.e., the vicinity of) the print-point* of the
typewriter, and is also provided with additional means for effecting
further movement of the type-bar from the close position to a print-point
position. |
| | |
| 386 | Including toggle-linkage: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 385. Subject matter wherein said additional means includes a
toggle-linkage* in the actuating mechanism at effects said
further movement. |
| | |
| 387 | Including momentum accumulator: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 385. Subject matter wherein said additional means includes a
mass or weight, the inertia of said mass providing the force that
effects said further movement. |
| | |
| 388 | Including hammer, roller, or presser mechanism: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 385. Subject matter wherein said additional means includes a
striker element that imparts a sudden impact, or includes a cylindrical
element that rolls against said type-bar*, or includes
a forcer element that urges the type-bar, any of which elements
is not directly connected to the type-bar, but which effects said
further movement of the type-bar.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass includes a typewriter wherein the first
means of subclass 385 effects rectilinear movement of a type-bar
from its rest position to a position close to the print-point* of
the typewriter. | |
| | |
| 388.1 | Type-bar pivotable to vicinity of print-point: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 388. Subject matter wherein the first means (i.e., of subclass
385) effects arcuate movement of a type-bar* from its rest
position to a position close to the print-point* of the
typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass includes a top-strike and bottom-strike
as well as front-strike typewriters. | |
| | |
| 389 | With power assist for mechanism: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 385. Subject matter wherein said additional means effects further
movement of the type-bar* with the help of electrical or
electromagnetic energy applied to the type-bar-actuator means. |
| | |
| 390 | With end-thrust mechanism for type-bar: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 383. Subject matter wherein a type-bar* of a typewriter
is an elongated member having a type-face* (or a type-die*)
element thereon located at one end of said member, said type-face
being positioned so that its surface is approximately perpendicular
to the elongated length of the member, and wherein the movement
of said type-bar is in the direction of its length as it moves from
a rest position to a print-point* position.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 459, | for a guide for a thrusted type-bar. |
|
| | |
| 391.1 | Driven by gear means: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 391. Subject matter wherein the movement of the type-bar* is
effected by way of at least two toothed members, the teeth of which
intermesh so that as one member is moved, another member is also
moved. |
| | |
| 391.2 | Driven by cam means: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 391. Subject matter wherein the movement of the type-bar* is
effected by way of a member having a cam surface connected to a
cam-surface follower.
| | (1)
Note. A "cam surface" is defined as the edge
periphery of a disc that rotates or oscillates about an axis, the
radial distance of the axis to the periphery varying around the
periphery. As the disc rotates or oscillates, the distance of a
follower that is in contact with the periphery will increase and
decrease relative to the axis of the disc, thus the rotation or
oscillation of the disc will effect substantially radial movement
of the follower. | |
| | |
| 392 | Including momentum accumulator: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 390. Subject matter wherein said movement of said type-bar* is
helped by a mass or weight, the inertia of said mass providing the
force that effects said movement. |
| | |
| 393 | For top-strike or bottom-strike typewriter: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 390. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter
in which type-face* elements impact against the platen* (and
thereby impact against a record-medium* that is backed
by the platen) at a print-point* located adjacent to an
uppermost part of the platen or at a print-point located adjacent
to an underneath part of the platen. |
| | |
| 394 | With type-bar pivot traveling during typing movement of
type-bar: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 383. Subject matter wherein a type-bar* of a typewriter
is mounted for oscillatory or arcuate movement about an axis while
the type-bar moves from its rest position to its print-point* position,
and wherein said axis also move from a first position to a second
position while the type-bar moves.
| | (1)
Note. The structure defined is directed to what is effectively
a "floating" type-bar. The pivot end of the type-bar
pivots about a first axis, and the first axis pivots about a second
axis, thus imparting a compound movement to the type-face* that
is affixed to the other end of the type-bar. | |
| | |
| 395 | Type-bar pivot on longitudinally movable carrier in top-strike
typewriter: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 394. Subject matter wherein the type-bar* is mounted
for oscillatory or arcuate movement about an axis, and the axis
is in a support that moves rectilinearly to-and-fro relative to
the print-point* position, and wherein the type-bar is
in a top-strike typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. The term "top-strike typewriter" is
defined in the definition of 415 below. |
| | (2)
Note. Many of the typewriters in this subclass also have
ink-pad means to apply ink* to the type-face* while
the type-bar is in a rest position. | |
| | |
| 396 | With ink pad on type-bar rest: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 394. Subject matter wherein said type-bar* or the type-face* element
carried thereby is supported while in its rest position by an element,
which element includes a block or mass of porous or absorbent material
that is impregnated with ink* whereby a type-face that
is resting on the element will be coated with ink in preparation for
the next impact of the type-face against a record-medium*.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass also includes an ink pad in a top-strike
or a bottom-strike type-writer. | |
| | |
| 397 | With disconnection of type-bar action during movement thereof: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 383. Subject matter wherein a type-bar* of a typewriter
is caused to move from its rest position to its print-point* position
by drive linkage that associates or joins a key*lever to
the type-bar so that movement of the key lever transmits movement
to the type-bar, and wherein the drive linkage is temporarily disassociated
or disjoined while the type-bar is moving to a print-point position
so that the type-bar may continue its movement without further typing movement
of the key lever.
| | (1)
Note. The structure defined permits the key lever to stop
its movement or to return to its rest position while the type-bar
is still moving to its print-point position. |
| | (2)
Note. The term "key lever" is defined in the
definition of subclass 472 below. | |
| | |
| 398 | With accelerated (e.g., motion amplifying) type-bar action: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 383. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed mechanism
that effects an increase in the rate of speed of a type-bar* as
it moves from its rest position to its print-point* position,
which mechanism includes a link or lever that pivots about a fulcrum
that shifts relative to the link or lever as the type-bar moves.
| | (1)
Note. It is, of course, inherent in any member that moves
from a rest position to a second position that acceleration from
zero velocity to a maximum velocity must occur during such movement, but
most disclosures of type-bar-action mechanism are silent as to acceleration.
In this and indented subclasses, the claimed disclosure of the
patents therein emphasize the structure of the action that produces
a type-bar movement which accelerates during all or part of its motion
from its rest position to its print-point position. | |
| | |
| 399 | By rolling contact between links: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 398. Subject matter wherein the mechanism includes one lever
or link that pivots with respect to an associated lever or link
on a fulcrum that rolls or turns at the point of association. |
| | |
| 399.1 | By key lever rolling on fulcrum: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 399. Subject matter wherein the lever or link that pivots with
respect to its associated lever or link is a key* lever.
| | (1)
Note. The term "key lever" is defined in the
definition of subclass 472. |
| | (2)
Note. Included herein are mechanisms in which a key lever
rolls on a frame or a fulcrum plate or a sublever, or in which a sublever
is pivoted on a key lever. | |
| | |
| 400 | By cam-engaging link: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 398. Subject matter wherein the mechanism includes a component
that rotates or oscillates about an axis, which component has an
edge periphery that varies in radius around the periphery and which
component is associated with a lever or link to provide the means
for shifting the fulcrum of the lever. |
| | |
| 401 | By breaking and straightening toggle-linkages: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 398. Subject matter wherein the mechanism includes at least two
toggle-linkage* assemblages associated with a lever for
moving the type-bar*, one of which toggle-linkages act
to move the lever when the toggle-linkage is straightened and the
other of which toggle-linkages act to move the lever when the toggle-linkage
is broken.
| | (1)
Note. The terms "broken" and "straightened" as
applied to a toggle-linkage are discussed in the Glossary, under
the definition of toggle-linkage. | |
| | |
| 402 | By breaking toggle-linkage (e.g., to pull type-bar to print-point): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 398. Subject matter wherein the mechanism includes a toggle-linkage* assemblage
associated with a lever for moving the type-bar*, which
toggle-linkage acts to move the lever when the toggle-linkage is
broken.
| | (1)
Note. The term "broken" as applied to a toggle-linkage
is discussed in the Glossary, under the definition of toggle-linkage.
In this subclass the type-bar is pulled to the print-point* as
the toggle-linkage is broken. | |
| | |
| 403 | By straightening toggle-linkage (e.g., to push type-bar
to print-point): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 398. Subject matter wherein the mechanism includes a toggle-linkage* assemblage
associated with a lever for moving the type-bar*, which
toggle-linkage acts to move the lever when the toggle-linkage is
straightened.
| | (1)
Note. The term "straightened" as applied
to a toggle-linkage is discussed in the Glossary, under the definition
of toggle-linkage. In this subclass the type-bar is pushed to the
print-point* as the toggle linkage is straightened. | |
| | |
| 404 | Including adjustment of toggle-linkage anchor position: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 398. Subject matter wherein the mechanism includes a toggle-linkage* assemblage
associated with a lever for moving the type-bar*, which
toggle-linkage includes one link pivoted to the typewriter frame
at a location that may be varied relative to the frame, whereby
the effect of the toggle-linkage on the lever may be varied. |
| | |
| 405 | By type-bar connecting link: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 398. Subject matter wherein the mechanism includes a lever or
bell crank or link that associates the type-bar* member
with the key* lever for moving the type-bar with an increase in
the rate of speed of the type-bar. |
| | |
| 405.1 | Including gear connection: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 405. Subject matter wherein the lever or bell crank or link is
provided with a toothed portion moving in the arc of a circle, the
teeth meshing with a toothed portion on the type-bar* member
to effect movement of the type-bar when the key* lever
moves the lever, bell crank, or link of the mechanism. |
| | |
| 406 | By pin and slot connection: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 398. Subject matter wherein the mechanism includes a lever or
link having a narrow, elongated aperture therein associated with
a lever or link having a short rod extending through the aperture,
the aperture and rod providing the means for shifting the fulcrum. |
| | |
| 407 | Including type-bar starter means: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 398. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to that
portion of the type-bar* moving mechanism that initiates
movement of the type-bar away from the rest position. |
| | |
| 408 | For bottom-strike typewriter: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 383. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter
in which the type-face* elements impact against the platen* (and thereby
impact against a record-medium* that is backed by the platen)
at a print-point* located adjacent to an underneath part
of the platen.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 32, | for a type-bar* action in a flat-platen typewriter. |
|
| | |
| 410 | With pivotally mounted platen carrier (e.g., for access,
etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 408. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with a
platen* for backing the record-medium*, which
platen is supported for movement of the platen relative to the typewriter during
typing operation, and wherein the platen support also enables movement
of the platen out of typing position being in the arc of a circle.
| | (1)
Note. The movement out of typing position enables the platen
to be taken out of the way so that access to the interior of the
typewriter is possible. | |
| | |
| 411 | Type-bar actuated by rack and gear: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 408. Subject matter wherein type-face* elements are carried
by respective type-bar* members and wherein each type-bar
is moved from a rest position to a print-point* position
by way of a reciprocable bar having teeth along one edge thereof
and a rotatable disc having teeth on the periphery thereof, the
teeth of the disc meshing with the teeth of the bar so that movement
of one toothed element causes movement of the other toothed element
which causes movement of the type-bar. |
| | |
| 412 | Including type-bar mounting arrangement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 408. Subject matter wherein type-face* elements are carried
by respective type-bar* members, and wherein significance
is attributed to structure for supporting the type-bars for movement from
a rest position to a print-point* position.
| | (1)
Note. The structure includes a mounting having discontinuous
arrangement of type-bars at front and rear of platen*,
a mounting for type-bars having an elongated pivot portion transverse
to the platen axis, and a mounting for type-bars pivoted for lateral
movement. | |
| | |
| 413 | With type-face inker (e.g., ink-pad rest): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 408. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with means
to apply ink* to the type-face* element.
| | (1)
Note. The inker is usually in the form of an ink pad having
ink thereon, the ink pad serving also as a rest to support the type-bar* member
with the type-face in contact with the ink pad, and may have means
for rotating the type-bar as it moves from the print-point* position (with
the type-face upwardly oriented) to the rest position (with the
type-face downwardly oriented). | |
| | |
| 414 | Including key or key-lever arrangement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 408. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
key* elements or the key-lever bars or to structure that
support the key elements of a bottom-strike typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. The term "key lever" is defined in the
definition of subclass 472 below. |
| | (2)
Note. Included in this subclass is key-lever structure for
moving an intermediate horizontal linkage transverse to the key
levers and type-bar* members, structure including a vertically
movable key lever, and a key that moves a horizontally movable draw
bar or link instead of a key lever. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 472+, | for a key-board* or keys of a standard typewriter. |
|
| | |
| 415 | For top-strike typewriter: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 383. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter
in which type-face* elements impact against the platen* (and
thereby impact against a record-medium* that is backed
by the platen) at a print-point* located adjacent to an
uppermost part of the platen.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 33, | for a type-bar* action in a flat-platen typewriter. |
|
| | |
| 416 | Including type-bars pivoted on both sides of, or above
and across, platen axis: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 415. Subject matter wherein the type-bar* members carrying
the type-face* elements of a type-set-assemblage* are
either (a) disposed into two groups, one group of type-bars being
oscillated about an axis (or axes) located in front of the platen* and
the other group of type-bars being oscillated about an axis (or
axes) located behind the platen, or (b) oscillated on one or more
type-bar axes, the axis of oscillation of each type-bar being disposed
over the platen and transverse to the length dimension of the platen.
| | (1)
Note. The disposition of the type-bars discussed in (a) of
the definition may be above and in front of, or above and behind,
the platen. The disposition of the type-bars discussed in (b) may
be in two groups on axes above and across the platen axis. | |
| | |
| 417 | With type-face inker (e.g., ink pad, roller, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 415. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with means
to apply ink* to the type-face* element.
| | (1)
Note. The inker is usually in the form of an ink-pad element
or an ink-roller element impregnated with ink. Contact of the type-face
with the inking element applies a coating of ink to the type-face for
subsequent application to the record-medium* as the type-face
is impressed against the record-medium. | |
| | |
| 418 | Type-bar pivoted by gear connection: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 415. Subject matter wherein the type-bar* member is
oscillated from a rest position to a print-point* position,
the oscillation being effected by a toothed portion on the type-bar,
the teeth of the type-bar being intermeshed with teeth on a toothed
component that is caused to rotate or oscillate. |
| | |
| 419 | Type-member or type-bar pivoted and rotatable (e.g., for
selection of type-face): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 415. Subject matter wherein a plurality of type-face* elements
are carried on a type-member* or carried by a type-bar*,
which type-bar is an elongated member that is oscillatable from
a rest position to a print-point* position about a pivot,
and wherein either the type-member or the type-bar may be turned
or oscillated about an axis that is substantially perpendicular
to the pivot axis of the type-bar, whereby one of the plurality
of type-faces on any type-member or type-bar may be positioned or
oriented to be impressed against the record-medium* when the
type-bar is oscillated to the print-point.
| | (1)
Note. The structure provides for selection of one of a plurality
of type-faces from the limited number of type-faces available on
one type-member. For a typewriter wherein a type-head* includes
a plurality of type-faces comprising a type-set-assemblage*,
see subclass 139 above. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 139+, | and see (1) Note above. |
|
| | |
| 420 | Type-bar pivoted by push link: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 415. Subject matter wherein the type-bar* member is
oscillated from a rest position to a print-point* position,
the oscillation being effected by a component that is connected
to the type-bar and is moved in a direction along its length dimension
with force that tends to compress the length dimension. |
| | |
| 421 | Type-bar pivoted by cam: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 415. Subject matter wherein the type-bar* member is
oscillated from a rest position to a print-point* position,
the oscillation being effected by a component that rotates or oscillates
about an axis, which component has an edge periphery that varies
in radius about the periphery and which component is associated
with the type-bar to cause the type-bar to move toward the print-point
as the component oscillates or rotates. |
| | |
| 422 | Type-bar action: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 383. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to mechanism
for effecting the movement of a type-bar* from its rest
(i.e., normal or base) position to its print-point* (i.e.,
type-face* impacting) position. |
| | |
| 423 | Including selectively disengageable type-bar action to
render action inoperable: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 422. Subject matter wherein said mechanism includes links or
components normally connected together for enabling the mechanism
to effect movement of a type-bar* from its rest position
to its print-point* position, and wherein one or more of
the links or components may be temporarily disconnected at the will
of the typist, whereby the mechanism is made ineffective.
| | (1)
Note. The purpose of this mechanism is to enable the typist
to prevent unauthorized use of the typewriter while the typist is
away from the typewriter. | |
| | |
| 424 | With type-face pivoted on type-bar for rolling contact
with platen: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 422. Subject matter wherein the type-bar* member supports
a type-face* element for arcuate movement relative to the
type-bar, the movement being on an axis that is parallel to the
axis of the platen* to which the type-bar is moved for
impression of the type-face at the print-point* and wherein
the type-face rolls against the platen by moving the type-face-element axis
around the platen axis when the type-face is adjacent to the print-
point. |
| | |
| 425 | Including jam-release means: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 422. Subject matter wherein a typewriter having type-bar* members
that are movable from a rest position to a print-point* position
is provided with means for freeing a blockage caused by two type-bars
tending to occupy the same space at the same time.
| | (1)
Note. The tendency for jamming is enhanced because all of
the type-bars impress against the same print-point. Rapid typing
will increase the probability that a previously impressed type-face*
element will not have cleared the print-point before the succeeding
type-face reaches the print-point, or the possibility that two type-face
elements reach the print-point simultaneously. The resulting jammed
condition is released by the means of this subclass. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 366, | for other jam-release means. |
|
| | |
| 426 | Including type-bar return before release of key lever: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 422. Subject matter wherein the type-bar* is moved from
a rest position to a print-point* position and from a print-point
position back to a rest position, and at least the movement from
rest to a print-point is accomplished as a result of a typist pressing
a key* element on the key-board* of the typewriter,
and wherein the movement of the type-bar from a print-point back
to a rest position may be accomplished while the key element is
still pressed by the typist. |
| | |
| 427 | Including yieldable link in type-bar action: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 422. Subject matter wherein said mechanism includes a resilient
component as part of the drive train that causes the movement of
the type-bar* member from a rest position to a print-point* position.
| | (1)
Note. In this subclass the yieldable link is part of the
drive train. This yieldable link is different from the return spring
of subclass 436 below. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 436+, | and see (1) Note above. |
|
| | |
| 428 | Including means to limit type-bar movement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 422. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to means
for regulating the movement of the type-bar* member in
its movement from a rest position to a print-point* position
or its movement from a print-point position to a rest position,
said means being part of said mechanism for effecting said movement.
| | (1)
Note. The means is within the mechanism itself rather than
being the platen* at the print-point. The means may include
a toggle-linkage*, or may control the impact force, or
the velocity of the type-bar. | |
| | |
| 429 | Type-bar pushed or pulled by hooklike cam: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 422. Subject matter wherein the type-bar* movement is
effected by a mechanism that includes an elongated component that
is pivoted adjacent to one end thereof, said one end being configured
as a curved extension that extends into a concavity of a cooperating
member that is included in said mechanism, the curved extension
also having a side edge periphery that varies in radius around the
periphery whereby as the component pivots its periphery extending
into the concavity will cause movement of the cooperating member. |
| | |
| 430 | Type-bar pulled to print-point: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 422. Subject matter wherein the type-bar* member is
moved from a rest position to a print-point* position by
a component that is part of the type-bar-action mechanism, which
component is itself under tension as the type-bar is moved to the
print-point. |
| | |
| 430.1 | By cam means (e.g., slotted cam, helix, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 430. Subject matter wherein said component oscillates or rotates
about an axis and is provided with a periphery that engages a cooperating element
and causes movement of the cooperating element (and thus causes
movement of the type-bar*-action mechanism) as the component periphery
is caused to be rotated or oscillated. |
| | |
| 430.3 | With movable type-bar-segment: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 430. Subject matter wherein the type-bar* members of
the typewriter are mounted on a type-bar-segment*, which
type-bar-segment is mounted so as to be movable.
| | (1)
Note. The movement of the type-bar-segment is often for the
purpose of enabling case-shift* movement and the type-bar-action
mechanism is modified to enable such movement. | |
| | |
| 431 | Type-bar moved to print-point by gear drive: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 422. Subject matter wherein said mechanism includes at least
two components having teeth or notches thereon, the teeth of one
component intermeshing with the teeth of the other component whereby
the movement of one component is transmitted to the movement of
the other component, and the components being associated in the
type-bar*-action mechanism. |
| | |
| 432 | Type-bar moved to print-point by cam means: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 422. Subject matter wherein said mechanism includes a component
that is rotated or oscillated about an axis, which component has
an edge periphery that varies in radius about the periphery, and
which periphery contacts an element in the type-bar*-action
mechanism that is moved by the rotation or oscillation of the component. |
| | |
| 434 | Including connecting link or joint: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 422. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to one
or more of the components in the structure of said mechanism that
effects the movement of a type-bar* from its rest position to
its print-point* position, or wherein significance is attributed
to structure that joins said components to enable movement to occur between
the components. |
| | |
| 434.1 | Adjustable (e.g., in length, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 434. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to structure
of said component for varying the component as to its position,
dimensions, or effectiveness in the mechanism. |
| | |
| 435 | Type-bar rebound preventer (e.g., via latch, brake, linkage,
etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 383. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to means
for retarding movement of a type-bar* that is returning
from its print-point* position to its rest position, whereby
the type-bar will not spring back from its rest position.
| | (1)
Note. The intent of rebound control is to prevent or minimize
a second movement from its rest position to its print-point position
so as to prevent multiple images. Rebound control includes structure
such as a latch, a brake, and an arrangement of linkages similar
to a toggle-linkage* assemblage, which structure tends
to prevent rebound in spite of the force with which the type-bar
is returned to its rest position. | |
| | |
| 436 | Type-bar return spring connected to type-bar action linkage: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 383. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a resilient
or yieldable means for effecting the movement of a type-bar* from
its print-point* position to its rest position, said means being
part of or joined to means for effecting movement of the type-bar
from its rest position to its print-point position. |
| | |
| 437 | For impact control: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 436. Subject matter wherein a type-bar* member is moved
from its rest position to its print-point* position to
impress a type-face* by force against a record-medium* backed
by a platen* at the print-point, and wherein significance
is attributed to regulating or governing said force by said resilient
or yieldable means. |
| | |
| 438 | With adjustment means (e.g., for "touch" control,
etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 436. Subject matter wherein a type-bar* member is moved
from its rest position to its print-point* position, the
movement being caused by the pressing of a key* element
on a key-board* by a typist exerting force on the key,
and wherein significance is attributed to changing the amount of
force exerted by the typist for pressing the key element.
| | (1)
Note. The "touch" control of this subclass
is intended to modify the typewriter to the needs of various typists
who might use the same typewriter. Some typists use a light or
lesser touch, striking the keys with little force. The same typewriter,
if subsequently used by a typist with a heavy touch who strikes
the keys with great force, might have its platen* damaged.
The touch control tends to prevent this. | |
| | |
| 438.1 | Including an indicator: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 438. Subject matter wherein the typewriter that is provided with
said force-changing attribute is also provided with a device for
showing the typist an indication of how much force is required to
press the key* elements of the typewriter. |
| | |
| 440 | Attached to key lever (e.g., tension spring): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 436. Subject matter wherein said resilient or yieldable means
is fastened to the key* lever of the typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. The term "key lever" is defined in the
definition of subclass 472 below. |
| | (2)
Note. The typewriter of this subclass is usually provided
with a tension spring (i.e., a spring which exerts force when its ends
are pulled apart). | |
| | |
| 440.1 | Compression spring: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 440. Subject matter wherein the resilient or yieldable means
is a component that exerts a returning force when the opposite ends
thereof are pushed together. |
| | |
| 440.2 | Cantilever spring (e.g., torsion, hairpin, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 440. Subject matter wherein the resilient or yieldable means
is an elongated component having two ends, one of the ends being
fixed to the frame of the typewriter and the other of the ends being
movable to exert a returning force.
| | (1)
Note. The spring may be configured as a leaf spring or a
torsion spring or a hairpin spring, these being only exemplary of
the configurations used. | |
| | |
| 441 | Type-bar pivot support: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 383. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to structure
that holds a fulcrum or axis, on which fulcrum or axis a type-bar* oscillates during
its movement from its rest position to print-point* position
and its return from its print-point position to its rest position. |
| | |
| 442 | For plural groups of type-bars: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 441. Subject matter wherein the type-bar* members of
a typewriter are arranged in two or more sets, each set including
only part of the full type-set-assemblage* of the typewriter,
and each set of type-bars being supported on a separate pivot support
that is common to all the type-bars of that set. |
| | |
| 443 | Ring support: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 441. Subject matter wherein each type-bar* member is
mounted for oscillation in a pivot support that has a circular or
annular configuration.
| | (1)
Note. Usually this form of support (i.e., ring support) is
used in a top-strike typewriter or a bottom-strike typewriter. | |
| | |
| 445 | Type-bar-segment (e.g., wire journal): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 441. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to said
structure being configured as a type-bar-segment.
| | (1)
Note. In the typewriter of this subclass a wire or thin elongated
member is usually the common bearing or journal for all the type-bar* members. | |
| | |
| 445.1 | With guide for movement of segment: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 445. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with means
associated with the type-bar-segment* that constrains the
type-bar-segment to motion along a predetermined path.
| | (1)
Note. The guide means of this subclass is usually for constraining
case-shift* movement of the type-bar-segment. | |
| | |
| 445.2 | Including hanger for individual type-bar: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 445. Subject matter wherein the type-bar-segment* is
provided with a plurality of components, each component being affixed
to or dependent from the type-bar-segment, and each component serving
to support one type-bar* member for oscillation of the
type-bar. |
| | |
| 445.3 | And bearing for type-bar: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 445.2. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a part
in or on said component in which a pivot or journal or gudgeon that
is connected to the type-bar* member turns or oscillates
relative to said component.
| | (1)
Note. The bearing of this subclass may be a ball bearing,
a roller bearing, a conical bearing, etc., these forms of bearing being
only exemplary of those found herein. | |
| | |
| 445.5 | With type-bar anvil: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 445. Subject matter wherein the type-bar-segment* is
provided with a component located adjacent to the position at which
the type-bar* member stops when the type-face* element
has reached the print-point* position, which component acts
to stop the type-bar at the print-point.
| | (1)
Note. In most typewriters the type-bar has some momentum
when its type-face is at the print-point. To prevent damage to
the platen* by repeated impacts of the type-face against
the platen. The anvil of this subclass is provided to absorb the momentum
of the type-bar rather than the platen absorbing the momentum of the
type-bar. | |
| | |
| 446 | Interconnected (e.g., nested) support bearings: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 441. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a part
in or on said structure, in which part of a pivot or journal or
gudgeon that is connected to the type-bar* member turns
or oscillates relative to said structure, and which part of one
type-bar is held partly within the confines of a similar part of
an adjacent type-bar. |
| | |
| 447 | Ball-and-socket bearing for type-bar (e.g., universal joint): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 441. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
form of bearing that enables the type-bar* member to oscillate
from its rest position to its print-point* position and
return, the bearing including a spheroidal part that is partially
enclosed in a concavity that at least partially surrounds the spheroidal
part. |
| | |
| 448 | Roller bearing or ball bearing for type-bar: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 441. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
form of bearing that enables a type-bar* member to oscillate
from its rest position to its print-point position and return to
its rest position, the bearing being a roller bearing or a ball
bearing.
| | (1)
Note. A form of bearing for this subclass includes two annular
members having an annular space therebetween, in which annular space
a plurality of rollers or balls are provided. By this construction,
one of the members is enabled to rotate relative to the other member,
the rollers or the balls revolving and rotating within the annular
space. | |
| | |
| 449 | Adjustable bearing for type-bar: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 441. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to structure
that holds the pivot or axis on which the type-bar* member
oscillates, which structure may be varied in its location or effect on
the oscillation of the type-bar.
| | (1)
Note. In the typewriter of this subclass the type-bar bearing
is adjustable as to its position, its frictional characteristics, or
resistance to oscillation of the type-bar, etc. | |
| | |
| 450 | Pin support for type-bar: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 441. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to structure
on which the type-bar* member oscillates, which structure
comprises a short rodlike component that is provided for each of
the type-bar members. |
| | |
| 451 | Wire support for type-bars: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 441. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to structure
on which the type-bar* member oscillates, which structure
comprises a slender, elongated component that serves as a pivot
for all the type-bars. |
| | |
| 452 | Type-bar structure: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 383. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
type-bar* member itself or to the portions of the type-bar
that are integral therewith. |
| | |
| 453 | With type-face movable in plane of type-bar movement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 452. Subject matter wherein the type-bar* member is
moved from its rest position to its print-point* position
along an imaginary surface, and wherein the type-face* element
is carried by the type-bar so as to be moved by the type-bar and
also to be moved relative to the type-bar, both movements of the
type-face elements occurring along said imaginary surface.
| | (1)
Note. The type-face element is usually pivoted to the type-bar,
but may be attached to the type-bar by a leaf spring. | |
| | |
| 454 | Type-bar rest or rest support: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 383. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to that
portion of a typewriter that holds or supports the type-bar* in
its rest or normal or inactive position, or wherein significance
is attributed to structure that holds said portion on the typewriter. |
| | |
| 456 | Type-bar or type-member guide structure: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 383. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to means
located on the frame of the typewriter or located adjacent to the
print-point* of the typewriter, which means serves to confine the
movement of a type-bar* member that is approaching the
print-point into a path that will insure the correct positioning
of a type-member* (i.e., a type-face* element
or a type-die* element) relative to the print-point.
| | (1)
Note. In this subclass the guide means is located in the
vicinity of the pivot axis of the type-bar. | |
| | |
| 457 | Including resilient means for energy absorption or kickback: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 456. Subject matter wherein the guide means is provided with
a yieldable element that is engaged and partially displaced by the
type-bar* member print-point*, the displacement
of the yieldable element storing the force of movement of the type-bar
and/or the return of the yieldable element to its original
condition serving to initiate the return of the type-bar to its
original rest position. |
| | |
| 459 | For thrusted type-bar: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 456. Subject matter wherein the type-bar* member that
is guided is an elongated member having a type-face* element
(or a type-die* element) thereon located at one end of
said member, said type-face being positioned so that its surface
is approximately perpendicular to the elongated length of the member,
and the movement of said type-bar is in the direction of its length
as it moves from its rest position to its print-point* position.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 390+, | for means for moving a thrusted type-bar member. |
|
| | |
| 460.1 | Including rollers or balls: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 460. Subject matter wherein said guide means is provided with
a pair of cylindrical elements or a pair of spheroidal elements
to facilitate the guiding of the type-bar* element or the
type-bar* member to the print-point*.
| | (1)
Note. Usually the rollers or balls are located one on each
side of the type-face* element or the type-bar member at the
print-point, and reduce the friction between the guide and the element
or member. | |
| | |
| 460.2 | Including pin or collar: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 460. Subject matter wherein said guide means includes a projection
on the type-face* element or the type-bar* member
that enters into an aperture in the guide means at the print-point*, or
includes a projection on the guide means that enters into an aperture
in the type-face element or the type-bar member when the element or
member is at the print-point. |
| | |
| 461 | Adjustable guide: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 456. Subject matter wherein the guide means includes parts that
may be varied in their relationship to the typewriter or the print-point*. |
| | |
| 462 | Type-member structure: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 383. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
type- member* (i.e., the type-face* element or
the type-die* element) itself or to a portion of the type-member
that is integral therewith. |
| | |
| 463 | Removable type-member: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 462. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a type-member* which
may be disconnected from the type-bar* member and/or
the same or a different type-member replaced on the type-bar. |
| | |
| 464 | Rotatable on type-bar: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 462. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a type-member* which
is turnable on any axis relative to the type-bar* member
on which the type-member is mounted. |
| | |
| 465 | Pivotable on type-bar: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 462. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a type-member* which
is oscillatable on a axis relative to the type-bar* member
on which the type-member is mounted. |
| | |
| 466 | Type-face or type-die configuration (e.g., reverse image,
boldface, piercing, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 462. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
shape or physical characteristics or character* imprinting
characteristics of a type-face* element or of a type-die* element.
| | (1)
Note. Among the forms of type-face or type-die found in this
subclass are such exemplary elements as: a type-face for typing
a reverse-image character, a piercing type-die, and embossing type-die,
a type-face for boldface (i.e., thick line) imprinting, a type-face
for erasing or obliterating by overprinting, a self-cleaning type-face,
a stencil-cutting type-die, a miniature or an oversized type-face,
etc. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 210, | for a ribbon* used for boldface typing. |
|
| | |
| 467 | Dust guard for type-bar action mechanism: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 383. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to structure
on a typewriter, which structure serves to protect the moving parts
of a type-bar* action from the effects of foreign matter
which could harm the action if introduced thereinto.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 496, | for a dust guard for a key*-lever pivot. |
|
| | |
| 469 | Attachment to type-bar for imprinting extra character: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 383. Subject matter wherein a typewriter is provided with a full
type-set-assemblage* of type-face* elements carried
by type-bar* members, and wherein significance is attributed
to the addition to one of the type-bars of an added type-face element
that imprints an additional character* on the record-medium*. |
| | |
| 470 | Ink-impregnated type-face or inker for type-face: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 383. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to means
for applying ink* to the type-face* element prior
to impressing the type-face against the record-medium* directly
(i.e., without the use of an interposed inking ribbon*).
| | (1)
Note. In this subclass the type-face carries its own supply
of ink in the form of ink that is impregnated into the type-face element. | |
| | |
| 471 | Including stationary ink pad for inking type-face directly: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 470. Subject matter wherein ink* is applied to the type-face* element
by an ink-impregnated block of absorbent material, which block is mounted
on the typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. Usually the ink-impregnated block also serves as the
type-bar* rest that is contacted by the type-face in its rest
position. | |
| | |
| 471.1 | And a wick for feeding pad from reservoir: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 471. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with a
receptacle containing liquid ink* and a conduit including
fibrous material, which conduit leads from the receptacle to the
ink-impregnated block to transfer ink therethrough by capillary
action. |
| | |
| 472 | KEY-BOARD OR KEY-LEVER-ACTUATING MECHANISM: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to (a)
the key-board* of a typewriter, or (b) one or more of the
key* elements of the typewriter, or (c) a key lever, which
key lever is a fulcrumed bar that is moved by the pressing of a
key element is connected to a mechanism that causes relative movement
between a type-face* or a type-die* and a record-medium* to
effect record-medium, or which bar is connected to a mechanism to
initiate or cause the operation of a function* of the typewriter,
or (d) means for effecting the pressing of one or more key elements.
| | (1)
Note. Mechanism which locks the key-board or key lever against
movement will not be found in this or the indented subclasses.
Such mechanism is provided for in subclass 414 under appropriate titles. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 100+, | for a typewriter having a permutative key-board. |
| 414+, | for a key element or a key lever on a bottom-strike
typewriter. |
| 663+, | for lock mechanism, and see (1) Note above. |
|
| | |
| 473 | Including mechanism (e.g., auxiliary key-board) for activating
keys: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 472. Subject matter wherein a typewriter is provided with means
that cause the key* elements of a typewriter key-board* to
be pressed successively.
| | (1)
Note. A distinction is made between a key-board having keys
that are contacted by the fingers of a typist, and an auxiliary
or additional key-board having elements that in effect substitute
for the fingers of a typist. The auxiliary key-board may be used
when it is desired to use a typewriter having a standard key-board
arrangement by overlying the standard key-board with the auxiliary key-board
having a different key-board arrangement. The auxiliary key-board converts
the pressings of the keys thereon into pressings of the keys of
the standard key-board so that a typist familiar with the arrangement
of the auxiliary key-board will be able to use a standard key-board
typewriter. The auxiliary key-board may also be used to a) convert
the key-board of a manually powered typewriter to the key-board
of a power-operated typewriter (e.g., an "input" typewriter),
(b) provide the keyboard of a manually powered typewriter with the capability
of sending electrical signals (e.g., an "output" typewriter,
(c) convert the key-board of a cryptographic typewriter, or (d)
provide a standard key-board for the typist when the keyboard of
the typewriter is not standard. | |
| | |
| 474 | Electromagnetic key-board-drive mechanism: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 473. Subject matter wherein said means includes components that
are moved by electromagnetic force to press the key* elements
successively.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass is for an auxiliary key-board* wherein
pressing the key elements of the auxiliary key-board causes electromagnetic
components to press the corresponding key elements of the typewriter.
See subclass 479.2 for a keyboard wherein pressing of the key elements
moves an electromagnetic component to effect movement of a corresponding
key lever. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 479.2, | and see (1) Note above. |
|
| | |
| 475 | Operated by user"s leg (e.g., foot, knee, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 473. Subject matter wherein said means is energized by a lower
limb of the typist.
| | (1)
Note. A typewriter of this subclass is usually intended to
increase typing speed by giving the typist the capability of actuating
such functions* as carriage* return, case-shift*,
word-space*, etc., by a key* element that is pressed
by action of a foot, knee, etc., rather than pressed by a finger.
A typewriter for a handicapped person is found in subclass 87 above. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 87, | and see (1) Note above. |
|
| | |
| 476 | For actuating function key only: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 473. Subject matter wherein said means causes only a function*-key* element
to be pressed.
| | (1)
Note. As discussed in the Glossary, section III, a function
is an operation other than the impressing of a type-face* against
a record-medium* to imprint a character*. The
auxiliary mechanism of this subclass therefor causes pressing of, for
example, a tabulator key, a backspace key, a line-space* key,
etc. | |
| | |
| 477 | Including means generating a signal for type selecting
or other typing function: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 472. Subject matter wherein a typewriter is provided with means
for producing a pulse or code indication whenever a key* element
is pressed.
| | (1)
Note. The key element may be one that is pressed to select
a character* or one that is pressed for case-shift* or
one that is pressed to perform any function* of the typewriter. |
| | (2)
Note. Included in this subclass are disclosures wherein the
pressing of a key causes a light to pass to a photoelectric cell,
for example, to generate a signal. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 100+, | for a typewriter having a permutative key-board*,
and wherein pressing of different permutations of keys generates
signals to type different character symbols. |
|
| | |
| 478 | Via slidable code bars: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 477. Subject matter wherein the code indication is produced by
rectilinearly movable members having notches or grooves in one surface
of the members, the members being moved in accordance with the particular
key* element that has been pressed, and the signal being
generated in accordance with the relative relationship of the notches
in the members. |
| | |
| 479 | Via electrical component (e.g., switch, stylus, etc.) in
or with key-board: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 477. Subject matter wherein the pulse is produced by a device
in an electrical circuit, which device completes the circuit whenever
a key* element is pressed.
| | (1)
Note. In the typewriter of this subclass the electrical circuit
may include a rodlike element (i.e., stylus) held in a hand of the
typist, which element is manually moved to contact a particular
key element to complete the circuit. | |
| | |
| 479.2 | Electromagnetic-responsive switch: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 479. Subject matter wherein the device that completes the electric
circuit is one that embodies the electrical phenomenon known as "magnetism" that
is energized by electricity. |
| | |
| 480 | Including control of key action (e.g., buffer, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 472. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
regulating or governing of the movement or speed of movement or
stopping of a key* element or said fulcrumed bar (i.e.,
a key lever) of a typewriter key-board*.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass provides for a buffer that absorbs some
of the kinetic energy imparted to the keys of the typewriter by the
typist. | |
| | |
| 482 | For stenographic typewriter: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 472. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter
key-board* that is used in a stenos:graphic typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. The term "stenographic typewriter" is
defined and discussed in the definitions and notes of subclasses
91+. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 91+, | and see (1) Note above. |
|
| | |
| 483 | For Braille typewriter: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 472. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter
key-board* that is used in a Braille typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. The term "Braille typewriter" is defined
and discussed in the definition and note of subclass 109.1. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 109.1, | and see (1) Note above. |
|
| | |
| 484 | For foreign-language typewriter: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 472. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter
key-board* that is a foreign-language typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. The term "foreign-language" typewriter
is defined and discussed in the definition and note of subclass
109. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 109+, | and see (1) Note above. |
|
| | |
| 485 | Key-board having multiple-character, multiple-movement
keys: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 472. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a key-board* having
key* elements that are movable in a plurality of directions
as pressed by a typist, each of which directional movements of a
key element effecting the imprinting of a different character* symbol
on the record-medium*.
| | (1)
Note. In most typewriters a typist presses an individual
character key to imprint either the upper-case* or the lower-case* form
of a letter, and certain of the character keys are usable to imprint
either a number or a particular symbol. The choice of symbols imprinted
by pressing a particular key is limited to one of two symbols in
such typewriters. In a typewriter of this subclass, a key element
is pressed and moved in the plane of its face, and the direction
of its movement will effect typing of a different character. | |
| | |
| 486 | Key-board arranged according to character location: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 472. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
positioning relative to one another of the key* elements
that are each pressed to effect imprint of a particular character* symbol.
| | (1)
Note. The vast majority of typewriters are manufactured
so that their key-board* arrangements are the same or standard.
This standard arrangement permits any typist familiar with the
standard key-board to type on any typewriter without looking at
the individual keys. In the typewriters of this subclass the arrangement
of the keys and characters thereon is emphasized (and is usually other
than standard) for various purposes. The standard key-board is
also known in the industry as a "qwerty" key-board,
and is so called because of the arrangement of letters along one
row of keys in that key-board. | |
| | |
| 487 | Color-coded key-board: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 486. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
color or tint of the key* elements that are positioned
on the key-board*, the elements being grouped in accordance
with color. |
| | |
| 488 | Key-board including row of keys having different heights: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 472. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
positioning of the key* elements of a key-board* in
accordance with the distances from the topmost surface of each key
element to a common base.
| | (1)
Note. In most typewriters, the key elements are arranged
in a plurality of rows, each row extending transversely across the
front of the key-board and one row of keys higher or lower than
another. This arrangement conforms to the design and manufacturing
requirements of most of the industry. In the typewriter of this subclass,
the height of one key in a particular row will be different than
the height of another key in the same row to conform to the natural
shape and reach of the typist"s fingers. | |
| | |
| 490 | Key-cap or key-stem structure: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 472. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a key* cap,
which key cap is that part of a key element that is engaged by a
finger of the typist during pressing of the key or is visible to the
typist and bears a character* symbol corresponding to the
character that will be imprinted on the record-medium* when
the key is pressed, or wherein significance is attributed to a key
stem, which key stem is that part of a key element that connects
the key cap to the key lever. |
| | |
| 491 | Including cushioning means (e.g., yieldable surface): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 490. Subject matter wherein either said key* cap or said
key stem includes means that tends to absorb some of the force exerted
by the typist"s fingers as the key elements are pressed
during typing.
| | (1)
Note. In this subclass the cushion is usually a yieldable
or resilient pad. | |
| | |
| 491.3 | With sensory indicator (e.g., sound, tactile response,
etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 491.2. Subject matter wherein said means also includes a member
that stimulates one of the senses of the typist to enhance the awareness
of the typist to the act of typing.
| | (1)
Note. Included in this subclass is a device to produce an
audible "click" when the key* element
is pressed, or indicate to the sense of touch a slight, temporary
pause in the movement of the key lever. | |
| | |
| 492 | Adjustable in plane of key(s) (e.g., to facilitate reach,
rotatable, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 490. Subject matter wherein said key* element has the
topmost surface of its key cap lying in a particular plane, and
wherein the position of said key cap relative to the key-board* may
be varied while the top surface of the key cap remains in said particular
plane.
| | (1)
Note. Included herein are typewriters wherein a key cap may
be rotated about an axis that is perpendicular to its top surface,
or wherein a key cap or a key element may be adjusted to-and-fro
or sidewise to fit the reach of a typist"s fingers. | |
| | |
| 493 | Including character-bearing disc on key cap: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 490. Subject matter wherein said key* cap is provided
with a thin, flat, circular component mounted on the top surface
of the key cap, which component bears on its top surface an indicium
representing the character* symbol that will be imprinted
on the record-medium* when the key element bearing said
key cap is pressed. |
| | |
| 493.2 | With slot for exchanging disc: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 493.1. Subject matter wherein said element is provided with an
elongated hole therein, through which hole the component may be
removed from the key* cap and through which hole the same
or another component may be inserted onto the key cap. |
| | |
| 494 | Having raised or recessed character: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 490. Subject matter wherein said key* cap is provided
with an indicium representing the character* symbol that
will be imprinted on the record-medium* when a key element
bearing said key cap is pressed, which indicium projects above the
top surface of the key cap or is formed as a groove in the top surface
of the key cap. |
| | |
| 495.1 | By spring means: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 495. Subject matter wherein the connection between said key* cap
or key includes a yieldable or resilient member. |
| | |
| 496 | Key lever or space-bar mounting structure (e.g., dust guard,
buffer, pivot, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 472. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a fulcrumed
bar that is moved by pressing of a key* element or a space-bar* element on
a key-board* element on a key-board*, or to the
fulcrum of said bar, or to structure that serves to protect said
fulcrum from the intrusion of foreign matter to said fulcrum or
to a component that serves to support or stop the movement of said
fulcrumed bar.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass provides for the key lever, per se, or
the space-bar lever, per se, or the dust guard adjacent to the pivot or
the buffer or rest for the lever, etc. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 467+, | for a dust guard for a type-bar* action mechanism. |
|
| | |
| 497 | WITH CONTROL OF "CARBON PAPER" FOR TYPING
PLURAL SIMULTANEOUS COPIES BY SINGLE IMPRESSION (E.G., ON "MANIFOLD
SET"): |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein one typewriter, using one set of
key* elements and one type-set-assemblage*, types
one "original copy" and at least one "carbon
copy", the carbon copy being produced by use of "carbon
paper" adjacent to the carbon copy, and wherein significance
is attributed to the use of, movement of, or position of, carbon
paper in the typing of the carbon copy.
| | (1)
Note. The term carbon paper is a typewriter industry term
for a transfer-medium* coated on one of its surfaces with
a substance containing carbon or other pigment, this form of transfer-medium
having the property that a character* symbol imprinted
therewith is easily erased. In contrast to an ink* that impregnates
the fibers of a record-medium* or adheres tightly to the
surface thereof, a carbon paper includes a pigment that lightly
coats the surface of a record-medium and can be easily removed from
said surface. In the early technology of carbon paper manufacture, it
was made using carbon as the pigment of the coating, therefore its
name, despite recent development which has produced carbon paper
having other colors and pigments and made without carbon. In use,
a sheet or web or ribbon* of carbon paper is placed with
its coated surface adjacent to a surface of a record-medium (which
is to be the carbon copy) and its uncoated surface adjacent to the undersurface
of the record-medium which is to be the "original copy".
The impact of a single type-face* will effect the imprint
of a corresponding character on both copies. To produce additional carbon
copies, a corresponding number of pieces of carbon paper and record-medium
are used underlying the first of the carbon copies. |
| | (2)
Note. A manifold set is an assemblage that includes at least
one piece of carbon paper with its coated surface adjacent to a
surface of one piece of a record-medium that is to be the carbon
copy. To produce an original copy a piece of record-medium must
be placed over the assemblage, and to produce additional carbon
copies, other assemblages may be placed under the first-mentioned
assemblage. |
| | (3)
Note. Use of carbon paper to produce one or more carbon copies
is found in this and the indented subclasses. However, other subclasses
found higher in the schedule reflect the use of carbon paper for
other purposes. One of these subclasses is subclass 190 wherein
carbon paper is used to type on the reverse surface of a record-medium.
Another of these subclasses is subclass 206.1 wherein carbon paper
in the form of a narrow elongated ribbon is used. Also in subclass
227 a narrow carbon ribbon which is usually a carbon-ink film, but may
be a carbon-paper ribbon, is fed by a ribbon-feed mechanism. |
| | (4)
Note. The typewriter of this subclass includes a structure
for changing the feed direction of a sheet or web of carbon paper. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 37+, | for a flat-platen* typewriter for typing on
a manifold set. |
| 190, | 206.1 and 227+, and see (3) Note above. |
| 204+, | for typing of plural original copies simultaneously. |
|
| | |
| 499 | On record-medium wound around platen together with carbon
paper: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 497. Subject matter wherein one record-medium* for said
original copy, and at least one record-medium for said carbon copy,
and at least one of said carbon papers is interleaved as a manifold
set, and said manifold set is coiled around the platen* in
plural convolutions as typing on the record-medium progresses.
| | (1)
Note. In some of the disclosures of this subclass the carbon
paper is attached to the platen. | |
| | |
| 500 | With means for causing slack in web of manifold set: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 497. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is to type on a manifold
set comprising a plurality of webs of record-medium* material
and at least one web or sheet of carbon paper interleaved with the
record-medium, webs, the assemblage being under tension as a result
of being fed through the typewriter by the platen*, and wherein
the tension in the assemblage is relieved whereby accurate feeding
is accomplished.
| | (1)
Note. The term "manifold set" is defined
in (2) Note of subclass 497, the term "web" is
defined as a piece of material having a determinate width and an indeterminate
length, and the term "sheet" is defined as a piece
of material having a determinate width and a determinate length. | |
| | |
| 501 | By arcuate movement of carbon paper carrier: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 500. Subject matter wherein said webs or sheets of carbon paper
are supported by or mounted on a member, which member is oscillated
while in contact with the webs or sheets whereby to relieve the
tension in said webs or sheets and said assemblage. |
| | |
| 502 | By clamp on carbon paper carrier: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 500. Subject matter wherein said webs or sheets of carbon paper
are supported by or mounted on a member, which member includes means
for firmly gripping said webs or sheets and moving them relative
to the typewriter whereby to relieve the tension in said webs or
sheets and said assemblage. |
| | |
| 503 | By use of other than rectangular sheet carbon paper (e.g.,
disc, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 497. Subject matter wherein said carbon paper is configured to
have a shape that is not a sheet of determinate length and determinate
width or not a web of indeterminate length and determinate width.
| | (1)
Note. In this subclass the carbon paper is usually a disc
of circular configuration, and see subclass 504 below wherein the
carbon paper is configured as an endless band that is not considered
to be a web of indeterminate length. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 504, | for an endless band piece of carbon paper. |
|
| | |
| 504 | Endless-band carbon paper: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 503. Subject matter wherein said carbon paper is configured as
a closed-loop strip of material having a determinate width, but
the length of which is interminable due to its closed-loop configuration. |
| | |
| 505 | By multicolor carbon paper: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 497. Subject matter wherein said carbon paper is formed having
a plurality of colors or pigments thereon, whereby the carbon copy
imprinted therewith may have character* symbols imprinted
in selected colors. |
| | |
| 507 | Including means for creep feed of carbon paper: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 497. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to means
for ensuring that said carbon paper will be fed through the typewriter
at the platen* at a rate of feed less than the feed rate of
the record-medium* for an original copy or the feed rate
of the record-medium for a carbon copy. |
| | |
| 508 | Including spool or support for roll of carbon paper: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 497. Subject matter wherein said carbon paper is in the form
of a web (i.e., indeterminate length) of material that is coiled
in convolutions on a reel, and wherein significance is attributed
to said reel or to means for mounting the reel on the typewriter. |
| | |
| 509 | Including a flat roll or core therefor: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 508. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
configuration of the coiled convolutions being compressed in a first
diametral dimension and expanded in a second diametral dimension
at right angles to the first dimension, or wherein significance
is attributed to a reel on which a coil of said configuration has been
wound. |
| | |
| 510 | And guide for changing feed direction: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 508. Subject matter wherein said carbon paper is advanced from
the wound roll to a platen* where the carbon paper is used,
the carbon paper being advanced along a path that is not a straight
line, and wherein significance is attributed to a member which ensures
that the carbon paper will follow the bends of the path along which
the carbon paper advances. |
| | |
| 511.1 | Responsive to return of carriage: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 511. Subject matter wherein the carriage* of a typewriter
is moved from a location at which the last character* of
a print-line* has been imprinted to a location at which
the first character of a succeeding print-line is to be imprinted,
and wherein significance is attributed to said advancing of said
carbon paper under control of said carriage movement. |
| | |
| 511.2 | With retraction of carbon paper for reuse thereof (e.g.,
by slidable carrier): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 511. Subject matter wherein said carbon paper is advanced from
a wound roll in a first direction toward the platen* for
use in typing carbon copies, and wherein said carbon paper is drawn back
in a second direction opposite to the first direction so that the
carbon paper may be used again in a subsequent typing operation
while it is advanced in the first direction for use in typing carbon
copies.
| | (1)
Note. The retraction of the carbon paper usually occurs at
the completion of one page* (e.g., one form of a plurality
of business forms) on the record-medium* web and is for
the purpose of repositioning the carbon paper between the next forms
to be typed. When the pigment on the carbon paper is depleted,
the worn portion of carbon paper is torn off and a fresh supply
pulled from the wound roll of carbon paper. In this subclass the
carbon paper roll is mounted on a slidable carrier and the movement
of the carrier effects advancement and retraction of the carbon
paper. | |
| | |
| 511.3 | Carbon paper rewound for retraction: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 511.2. Subject matter wherein said carbon paper that is drawn back
in the second direction is coiled again onto the same coil from
which it was unwound during the advancement in the first direction. |
| | |
| 512 | And support for roll of record-medium: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 508. Subject matter wherein the record-medium* that
is to be typed on is also in the form of a web (i.e., indeterminate
length) of material that is coiled in convolutions on a reel mounted
on the typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. The typewriter of this subclass may also have a support
for a roll of carbon paper. | |
| | |
| 513 | Including relative movement between carbon paper and record-medium: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 497. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with means
for moving the record-medium* and with means for moving
said carbon paper, and wherein significance is attributed to mechanism
that causes the carbon paper to move at a rate of movement different
from that of the record-medium or in a different direction, whereby
the carbon paper and the record-medium are moved with respect to
each other. |
| | |
| 514 | Including positioning of auxiliary record-medium: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 513. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is normally used to
type on a manifold set that comprises a record-medium* and
at least one piece of carbon paper and at least one other record-medium,
and wherein significance is attributed to the insertion into the
typewriter of an additional record-medium for typing thereon.
| | (1)
Note. The additional record-medium may be inserted from the
front of the platen* or from the rear of the platen. | |
| | |
| 515 | Including front insertion of carbon paper or record-medium: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 513. Subject matter wherein either said carbon paper or the record-medium* is
fed into the typewriter by guiding the leading edge of a piece of
carbon paper or record-medium directly between the platen* and
the print-point* of the typewriter via structure that is positioned
between the platen and the typist.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 595+, | for insertion of a sheet for "condensed-billing*" from
front of platen. |
|
| | |
| 516 | By simultaneously advancing record-medium and retracting
carbon paper: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 513. Subject matter wherein the record-medium* is moved
in a direction to line-space* the record-medium, and said
carbon paper is moved in the opposite direction at the same time,
both movements occurring after typing of one page* of text
and before typing on a subsequent page of text.
| | (1)
Note. The movements referred to above do not occur during
typing on a particular page of text. Rather during the typing of
a page both the record-medium and carbon paper materials move in
the same direction, and the specified movements occur between successive
pages. | |
| | |
| 517 | By means to arrest advance of carbon paper: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 513. Subject matter wherein the record-medium* is moved
in a direction to line-space* the record-medium, and wherein
the relative movement between the record-medium and said carbon paper
is effected by means for preventing the carbon paper from moving,
the relative movement occurring after the typing of one page* of text
and before typing on a subsequent page of text.
| | (1)
Note. During the typing of a page the record-medium and carbon
paper materials are line-spaced together. The action described above
occurs between pages, when the record-medium is advanced and the
carbon paper remains stationary. | |
| | |
| 518 | Carbon paper carrier(s) respositionable relative to platen: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 513. Subject matter wherein said carbon paper is held to and
moved by a member (i.e., a carrier) that is movable on the typewriter
with respect to the platen* thereof.
| | (1)
Note. In this and indented subclasses the carbon paper is
usually in the form of one or more sheets supported on a carrier usually
movable on horizontal rails toward and away from the platen. Movement
in the record-feed direction is usually by the platen and a feed-roller*.
Retraction of the carbon paper for the purpose of repositioning
the carbon paper usually is by manually pushing the carrier away
from the platen after the feed mechanism has released the record-medium* and
carbon paper material. | |
| | |
| 518.1 | Plural carriers disposed side-by-side for selective use
singly or simultaneously: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 518. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with two
or more of said carriers, and wherein each of said carriers is mounted
on the typewriter for movement with respect to the platen* along
a path, and the path for each of the carriers is parallel one to
the others, whereby any of the carriers is movable along its own
path individually or any of the carriers are movable together or
at the same time. |
| | |
| 518.2 | Plural carriers for serial retraction of plural carbon
papers: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 518. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with two
or more of said carriers, and wherein each of said carriers is movable
with respect to the platen* in a return direction opposite
to the line-space* direction of the record-medium*,
and wherein the carriers are moved in said return direction one
by one in sequence.
| | (1)
Note. As plural manifold sets of carbon paper and record-medium
are typed on, there in a tendency for the carbon paper to stick
to the record-medium, which makes it difficult to retract the carbon paper
from the platen. The construction provided for in this subclass
permits one carbon paper to be retracted, then another, thus facilitating
the retraction of the carbon papers despite the tendency to stick
together. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 519.2+, | for another construction for this purpose. |
|
| | |
| 518.3 | With means to imprint selectively on one or more media
(e.g., by holding selected media away from print-line): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 518. Subject matter wherein a typewriter normally is used to
type an original copy and several carbon copies simultaneously,
and wherein a typist is enabled to type one or more character* symbols
on one or more of the copies without typing those character symbols
on the other copies.
| | (1)
Note. Usually the original copy and/or one or more
of the carbon copies that is/are not to be imprinted are
moved to a position away from the print-point* so that
a type-face* will not impact there-against. An alternative
structure to perform this operation is the provision of a second
platen* member positioned to shield some of the copies
and enable imprinting on the other copies. | |
| | |
| 518.4 | Including retraction of carbon paper and record-medium
and subsequent advance of record-medium: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 518. Subject matter wherein said carbon paper and the record-medium* is
moved on the typewriter with respect to the platen* thereof
in a return direction that is opposite to the line-space* direction
of the record-medium, and wherein the record-medium is then moved
in the line-space direction.
| | (1)
Note. The retraction and subsequent advance is for the purpose
of repositioning the carbon paper relative to the next page* or
form to be typed, and occurs after the preceding page or form has been
typed. | |
| | |
| 519 | Carbon paper carrier movable rectilinearly: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 518. Subject matter wherein said carrier for said carbon paper
is movable along a straight line.
| | (1)
Note. The path of movement of the carrier is usually along
a line that extends at right angles to the axis of the platen* and substantially
tangent to the circumference of the platen. The support for the carrier
may extend to the rear of the typewriter in a substantially horizontal disposition
or may extend substantially vertically from a member fixed at the back
of the typewriter. | |
| | |
| 519.1 | With means to hold record-medium against retraction: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 519. Subject matter wherein said carbon paper carrier is moved
in a return direction that is opposite to the line-space* direction
of the record-medium*, and wherein the typewriter is provided
with means to ensure that the record-medium will not move in said
return direction as the carbon paper moves in that direction. |
| | |
| 519.2 | Including means to reduce binding of carbon paper during
retraction: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 519. Subject matter wherein said carbon paper carrier is moved
with respect to the platen* in a return direction opposite
to the line-space* direction of the record-medium*,
and wherein a tendency for the carbon paper to stick to the record-medium,
is lessened.
| | (1)
Note. As plural manifold sets of carbon paper and record-medium
are typed on, there is a tendency for the carbon paper to stick
to the record-medium, which makes it difficult to retract the carbon paper
from the platen. The construction provided for in this and indented
subclasses enables the separation of the carbon paper from the record-medium,
thus facilitating the retraction. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 518.2, | for another construction for this purpose. |
|
| | |
| 519.3 | Including lifting of platen for retraction of carrier: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 519.2. Subject matter wherein the original copy and the manifold
set(s) of carbon paper and carbon copy record-medium* are
normally disposed to be fed from the rear of the platen*,
underneath the platen, and to the front of the platen to the print-point*,
and wherein the platen is raised from its normal position to a position
above and clear of its normal position to enable the carbon paper
carrier (and the carbon paper held thereby) to be moved in said
return direction. |
| | |
| 519.4 | With guard over settable parts (e.g., denominational jacks,
etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 519.2. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a structure
on the typewriter that serves to protect various movable components
from being moved unintentionally as the platen* is lifted.
| | (1)
Note. The components that are apt to be moved unintentionally
are usually located at the rear of the typewriter, near the path
of movement of the manifold sets that are being fed to the platen,
and are usually the denominational-stops* of the typewriter. | |
| | |
| 519.7 | Carbon paper carrier on endless member: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 518. Subject matter wherein said carrier for said carbon paper
is moved by a component that is trained around two or more pulleys
and is in the form of a closed-loop band.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass also provides for mechanism for adjusting
the endless member laterally of its direction of movement and for
mechanism for adjusting the carrier relative to the endless member. | |
| | |
| 520 | Carbon paper holder (e.g., loading board, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 497. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a means
for supporting one or more pieces of said carbon paper, or to means
for enabling a typist to associate carbon paper with record-medium* pieces
or align a set of associated pieces with the typewriter for proper
subsequent feed of the pieces to the platen*. |
| | |
| 521 | FOR TYPING ON CARD IN CARD HOLDER: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter
provided with means for supporting or retaining a relatively stiff piece
of record-medium* material while the typewriter is being
used to imprint character* symbols on the record-medium.
| | (1)
Note. Due to the stiffness of the record-medium (i.e., card)
it does not readily conform to the periphery of the cylindrical
platen* around which the card is partially wrapped during
typing. This causes problems, especially during the typing of a
print-line* near the top or bottom edge of the card. Other
problems in typing on a card are due to the size of the card, which
is often smaller in length and width than a sheet. Disclosures
in this and the indented subclasses are directed to means for over-coming
the problems caused by typing on a card. This subclass provides
for a retaining means that may be removed from and replaced on the
typewriter easily. | |
| | |
| 522 | Flexible holder fed around platen with single card: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 521. Subject matter wherein the retaining means comprises a sheet
of material into which or onto which one record-medium* card
is temporarily secured so that during typing no relative movement
occurs between the record-medium and the retaining means, which
retaining means is sufficiently bendable to be partially wrapped
around a cylindrical platen* together with the record-medium
secured thereto, whereby both the retaining means and the record-medium
are moved in line-space* increments during typing on the
record-medium.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass is also for a disclosure wherein one
manifold set [which term is defined in (2) Note of subclass 497] is
temporarily secured to a flexible retainer or holder. | |
| | |
| 523 | On card pierced or indented to aid holding: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 521. Subject matter wherein the retaining means has projections
thereon that enter into, or cause the formation of, holes or depressions
in the surface of the record-medium* card, whereby the card
is more securely retained by the retaining means. |
| | |
| 524 | Holder movable responsive to case-shift: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 521. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with a
case-shift* mechanism having relatively movable parts,
and wherein the retaining means is moved when the case-shift parts
are moved. |
| | |
| 526 | And actuated in response to platen rotation: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 525. Subject matter wherein the platen* is incrementally
turned for line-space* movements during operation of the
typewriter, and wherein the retaining means includes a device for
contacting the record-medium* card and holding the card
to the retaining means, which device moves toward the card for holding
thereof as the platen starts its turning movement. |
| | |
| 527 | With platen surface modified for card: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 525. Subject matter wherein the platen* of the typewriter
is a cylinder having a periphery that is altered from a circular
periphery, the alteration being made for the purpose of accommodating the
record-medium* card or the retaining means for the card. |
| | |
| 527.1 | Including card gripper on platen: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 527. Subject matter wherein the alteration is made for the purpose
of accommodating a device that is movable to closely contact the
card and hold it to the platen*.
| | (1)
Note. In some typewriters the card gripper is pivotable with
respect to the platen. | |
| | |
| 529 | Holder attached via pins on holder or via adhesive attachment: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 525. Subject matter wherein the retaining means is supported
by the platen* by way of projections on said retaining
means that interfit into depressions on or in the surface of the
platen, or wherein the retaining means is supported by the platen* by
way of a device that adheres said retaining means to the surface
of the platen. |
| | |
| 531 | Including line-spacing of holder or card: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 521. Subject matter wherein the record-medium* card
is moved by the retaining means in a direction to feed the card
in line-space* distances to enable imprint of successive
print-line* rows.
| | (1)
Note. In this or indented subclasses the card may be line-spaced
by moving it together with its holder, or may be line-spaced by
moving the card relative to a stationary holder. | |
| | |
| 532 | Variable line spacing (e.g., platen creep): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 531. Subject matter wherein the distance that the retaining means
moves between successive print-line* rows is changed.
| | (1)
Note. The typewriter of this subclass sometimes has a platen* moved
with "platen creep", (i.e., increment of platen rotation
smaller than usual line-space* increment). | |
| | |
| 533 | In a curvilinear path: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 531. Subject matter wherein the retaining means is moved with
the record-medium* card thereon along a line that is continuously
bending and without angles. |
| | |
| 534 | By pinion and rack: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 531. Subject matter wherein the retaining means is moved with
the record-medium* card thereon by way of two members,
one member being a toothed wheel or disc that is rotated and the other
member being a toothed, elongated bar that is connected to the retaining
means, and wherein the teeth of the two members intermesh, whereby
the rotation of the toothed wheel effects movement of the toothed
bar and the retaining means. |
| | |
| 535 | Including support engaging bottom edge of card: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 521. Subject matter wherein the means for retaining the record-medium* cards
includes a member having an upwardly oriented surface, which surface
is used as a rest for the lowermost edge of a vertically upstanding
card. |
| | |
| 536 | Card holder mounted on typewriter frame: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 521. Subject matter wherein the retaining means is supported
by a stationary portion of the typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. In this and indented subclasses the card holder usually
includes an element similar to a paper-finger* that is
closely adjacent to the surface of the platen* and that
tends to urge the record-medium* card toward the platen. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 543, | for similar structure that is mounted on the carriage* of
the typewriter. |
|
| | |
| 538 | Transparent card holder: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 536. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a retaining
means that is made of a material through which light may pass, whereby
a typist is enabled to see the print-line* on the record-medium* as
the character* symbols are being imprinted. |
| | |
| 539 | Including finger movable away from holding position: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 536. Subject matter wherein the retaining means includes a member
that tends to urge the record-medium* card against the
surface of the platen*, which member may be moved away from
the platen to a location at which it does not urge the card to the
platen. |
| | |
| 540 | Spring urged to holding position: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 539. Subject matter wherein the retaining means includes a yieldable
element that provides the force to urge the record-medium* card
against the surface of the platen*.
| | (1)
Note. The typewriter of this subclass sometimes is provided
with a second element that provides additional force to urge the
record-medium card against the surface of the platen. | |
| | |
| 541 | Including a feed-roller: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 521. Subject matter wherein the retaining means includes a feed-roller* that
cooperates with the platen* to feed a record-medium* card. |
| | |
| 542 | Card holder mounted on platen-carriage frame: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 521. Subject matter wherein the retaining means is supported
on the structure that also supports a carriage* that moves
a platen* relative to the typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. The typewriter of this subclass includes a feed-roller* shaft
that supports the card holder, or the card holder is supported on
an element pivotable about an axis located behind the platen. | |
| | |
| 543 | Including gripper or means urging card against platen: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 521. Subject matter wherein the retaining means includes two
members, each of which members has a surface that faces the surface
of the other member, and wherein the surfaces are spaced apart a
distance corresponding to one of the dimensions of the record-medium* card, whereby
the card will fit between and be held by the two surfaces, or wherein
the retaining means includes a member that tends to urge the record-medium
card against the surface of the platen*.
| | (1)
Note. The urging of this subclass is usually mounted on the
carriage* of the typewriter. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 536+, | for similar structure that is mounted on the frame
or a fixed part of the typewriter. |
|
| | |
| 544 | Backing for stencil cutting (e.g., celluloid strip, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 521. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a retaining
means that holds a record-medium* card, or to a protecting
means that protects the platen* from damage by the impacting
type-face* elements while the typewriter is being used
for cutting a stencil.
| | (1)
Note. As referred to herein, a "stencil" is
a card or sheet having a surface that is normally impervious to
the passage of ink* from one surface to the opposite surface.
However, when the stencil is impacted by a type-face element, the
surface is modified along the line that represents the character* symbol corresponding
to the type-face, the modification being such as to permit ink to flow
from one surface to the opposite surface. The card or sheet that
has had its surface so modified is then usable in a "Mimeograph" printing
machine. (The term Mimeograph is a trademark.) The operation of
typing on the stencil material is known as "cutting" the
stencil. | |
| | |
| 545 | FOR LINE-SPACING BY INCREMENTAL ROTATION OF PLATEN: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein a typewriter is provided with a cylindrical
platen* and wherein significance is attributed to the turning of
said platen in step by step manner to effect line-space* distances
to a piece of record-medium* that is held to and backed
by said platen.
| | (1)
Note. As discussed in the definition of "line-space" in
the Glossary, section III, line-space is usually effected in units
of one, two or three line-spaces, and sometimes effected in half
spaces (e.g., one-half, one and one-half or two and one-half), but
rarely more than three line-spaces in any single unit of movement.
In some typewriters provision is made for multi-incremental line-spacing, which
is the rotation of a platen through increments greater than three
line-spaces, usually for the purpose of quickly moving a sheet of
record-medium out of the typewriter, or for the purpose of effecting
a line-space distance between the end of one paragraph of text and
the start of another paragraph, which distance is greater than normal. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 44+, | for line spacing of a flat platen. |
|
| | |
| 546 | To facilitate condensed-billing (i.e., by determining a
desired limit or amount of retrograde or advance platen movement): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 545. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter
that is capable of performing a condensed-billing* operation
by regulating the increments (i.e., the step by step turning movements)
of rotation of the platen* that cause the record-medium* to
move in a line-space* direction and regulating increments of
rotation of the platen that cause the record-medium to move in a
direction opposite to the line-space direction.
| | (1)
Note. As discussed in the Glossary, section III, the term "condensed-billing" is used
in the typewriter industry to refer to an operation wherein one
record-medium (e.g., a bill or financial statement) contains information
(e.g., an address) and a second record-medium is to contain only
a summary of the information. The line-spacing mechanism of this
and indented subclasses facilitates the production of the condensed-billing record. | |
| | |
| 547 | Including stop structure (e.g., traveling stop, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 546. Subject matter wherein the incremental rotation of the platen* is
regulated by the contact of one movable abutment with another stationary
abutment, one of said abutments being on or connected to the platen
and the other of said abutments being on or connected to the typewriter
frame, whereby the platen rotation is positively halted by such
contact. |
| | |
| 547.1 | For arresting platen at limit of both retrograde and advance
movement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 547. Subject matter wherein the incremental rotation of the platen* in
a direction that causes record-medium* movement in a line-space* direction
is halted by contact of a movable and a stationary abutment, and
wherein platen rotation in an opposite direction is also halted
by contact of a movable and a stationary abutment.
| | (1)
Note. Rotation of the platen in either direction may be stopped
by the same or different abutments. | |
| | |
| 547.3 | By lever or push-rod drive for platen: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 547.1. Subject matter wherein the rotation of the platen* in
both of said directions is caused by a movable arm that is moved
to-and-fro with reciprocatory or oscillatory movement, the movement
of the arm in both directions being limited by contact of said abutments
to correspond the arm movement to a desired degree of rotation of
the platen in either direction. |
| | |
| 547.4 | Via gear drive: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 547.3. Subject matter wherein the movable arm is connected to the
platen* by way of intermeshed coacting rotatable toothed
members. |
| | |
| 547.6 | Including relatively adjustable coaxial gear segments: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 547.4. Subject matter wherein the connection of the movable arm
to the platen* includes a rotatable toothed wheel coacting
with an assemblage of toothed members, which assemblage comprises
a plurality of toothed elements, each element being an arcuate portion
of a toothed wheel, the elements being disposed side by side to
rotate about a common axis and being repositionable one with respect
to the other(s) about the common axis so as to vary the peripheral
extent of the teeth of the assemblage that coacts with the rotatable
toothed wheel, whereby the number of teeth of the assemblage that
is in mesh with the toothed wheel may be varied to vary the platen
rotation. |
| | |
| 547.8 | With spring motor: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 547.7. Subject matter wherein said ratchet* is joined to
the platen* by way of a resilient component, a portion
of which component is moved to tension the component, and another
portion of which component is moved by the tension in the component
to rotate the platen.
| | (1)
Note. The spring motor of this subclass may be used to rotate
the platen in a direction to feed the record-medium* (i.e.,
move it in line-space* direction) or to retract the record-medium
(i.e., move it in a direction opposite to line-space direction). | |
| | |
| 548 | With graduated scale (e.g., on drum periphery): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 546. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with a
device that facilitates the positioning of the condensed-billing* record-medium*, which
device includes a measuring instrument calibrated in units that
indicate the extent to which the platen* should be rotated
in either direction of its rotation to correspond to the desired
location of said record-medium.
| | (1)
Note. The measuring instrument (i.e., scale) may be on the
circumference of a circular member or drum. | |
| | |
| 549 | Actuated by key on key-board: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 545. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with mechanism
to effect incremental rotation of the platen* in response
to a depression of a key* on the key-board* of
the typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. In most typewriters having a key-operated line-space* mechanism
the power to effect the line-spacing is electrical power from an
external source. A non-electric or manual typewriter is usually
provided with a line-space lever that is powered by the hand of
the typist. | |
| | |
| 550 | For multi-incremental rotation (e.g., "platen sweep"): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 545. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with mechanism
to effect a plurality of increments of rotation greater than three
such increments in one stroke of an actuating lever.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass provides for mechanism to facilitate
rapid line-spacing* and is often termed "platen* sweep" in
the typewriter industry. It is used, for example, to feed a record-medium* piece
into position for typing the first print-line* thereon
after insertion of the piece into the typewriter, or for spacing
a greater than usual distance between the last print-line of one
paragraph and the first print-line of a succeeding paragraph. The
number of platen-sweep increments are usually variable within a
range or, for example, four increments to about 18 increments or
more. | |
| | |
| 551 | For line-spacing in forward or reverse direction: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 545. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with mechanism
for effecting line-space* distances to a piece of record-medium* in
the usual direction of record-medium feed or in a direction opposite
to said usual direction. |
| | |
| 552 | With "floating" platen: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 545. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with a
platen* that is supported in its typing position solely
by platen-supporting rollers underlying the platen, and wherein
incremental rotation of the platen is effected by incrementally
rotating said platen-supporting rollers that are in frictional contact
with the platen.
| | (1)
Note. This form of platen support does not require bearings
and carriage* structure to support the ends of the platen, thereby
making it possible to type on a record-medium* piece that
is wider than the length of the platen. For feeding of such a piece,
see subclass 623. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 623, | and see (1) Note above. |
|
| | |
| 553 | Via line-space/carriage-feed-release actuator: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 545. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to structure
on the typewriter that performs the following operations substantially concurrently:
(a) the platen* is caused to be turned through one or
more increments, and (b) the carriage* is enabled to be
moved in a carriage-return direction opposite to the character-space* direction,
and (c) the structure that normally engages a portion of the carriage
to move the carriage in the character-space direction is temporarily
disengaged, whereby the carriage-return movement is made relatively
quiet.
| | (1)
Note. In the typewriter of this subclass the structure is
directed to means for line-spacing* which also, by some
connection to the carriage feed, effects release of the carriage
feed for purposes as stated in the definition. For structure to
cause carriage feed release, see subclasses 334+ above. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 334+, | and see (1) Note above. |
|
| | |
| 554 | For facilitating even wear of platen surface (e.g., by
irregular increments, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 545. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
movement or adjustment of a platen* for the prevention
of damage or deterioration to the platen by reason of the repeated impacting
of type-face* elements on the same locations on the surface
of the platen.
| | (1)
Note. Many of the disclosures of this subclass include mechanisms
for irregular line-spacing* to insure that successive print-line* rows
will not be impacted against the same longitudinal paths of the
platen, thus the longitudinal depressions in the surface of the
platen that would otherwise be formed are distributed over the entire
surface of the platen. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 555+, | for structure to adjust the platen for irregular
increments. |
|
| | |
| 555 | By irregular increments of platen rotation (e.g., for adjustment
of platen relative to its actuator, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 545. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with a
first mechanism for effecting normal increments of platen* rotation
that correspond to normal line-space* distances for the
feeding of record-medium* between successive print-line* rows,
and wherein significance is attributed to a second mechanism that effects
or enables rotation of the platen in other than normal increments
that correspond to other than normal line-space distances for irregular
feeding of record-medium.
| | (1)
Note. The irregular platen rotation increment may enable
imprinting of successive print-lines that are spaced apart by distances
that are greater than or less than normal line-space distances,
or may enable imprint of subscript or superscript character* symbols. | |
| | |
| 556 | Including disconnecting ratchet wheel from platen (e.g.,
declutching ratchet, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 555. Subject matter wherein said first mechanism for effecting
normal increments of platen* rotation includes a ratchet* in
the form of a disc or wheel that is joined to or engaged with the
platen, and wherein said second mechanism for effecting other than
normal increments unjoins or disengages the ratchet from the platen,
thereby enabling rotation of the platen relative to its ratchet. |
| | |
| 556.1 | Via relatively displaceable pin and slot members: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 556. Subject matter wherein the ratchet* wheel and the
platen* (i.e., the two components referred to below in
this definition) are normally joined or engaged by way of at least
one projection on one of said components that interfits with at least
one aperture on the other of said components, and wherein the unjoining
or disengaging occurs by moving the projection to disengage it from
the aperture. |
| | |
| 556.2 | Via toothed ring and locking member(s): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 556. Subject matter wherein the ratchet* wheel and the
platen* (i.e., the two components referred to below in
this definition) are normally joined or engaged by way of a first
member on one of said components and a second member on the other
of said components, which first member has notches extending along
an arc and which second member is a projection that interfits with
one of the notches in the first member, and wherein the unjoining
or disengaging occurs by moving the two said members apart. |
| | |
| 557 | Via ball or roller clutching member(s): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 556. Subject matter wherein the ratchet* wheel and the
platen* (i.e., the two components referred to below in
this definition) are normally joined or engaged by way of a spherical
or cylindrical member, the surface of which member frictionally
engages a surface of each of said two components, and wherein the
unjoining or disengaging occurs by moving the surface of the member
away from a surface of either or both components. |
| | |
| 558 | Via binding jaws gripping annular flange between jaws: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 556. Subject matter wherein the ratchet* wheel and the
platen* (i.e., the two components referred to below in
this definition) are normally joined or engaged by way of a first
member which is on one of said components and is a radially projecting
rim or ring having parallel radial faces on opposite sides of the
rim, and a second member which is on the other of said components
and includes two parts that straddle the rim of the first member,
the two parts of the second member being movable toward each other
with the rim therebetween to frictionally engage the radial faces
of the first member, and wherein the unjoining or disengaging occurs
by moving the parts of the second member away from each other and
the corresponding radial faces of the first member. |
| | |
| 559 | Via friction plate members engageable by axial displacement
(e.g., pressure plate, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 556. Subject matter wherein the ratchet* wheel and the
platen* (i.e., the two components referred to below in
this definition) are normally joined or engaged by way of a first
member connected to one of the components and a second member connected
to the other of the components, both of which components and both
of which members are rotatable on a common axis, and wherein said
members are positioned one relative to the other so that a substantially
radial surface of one member faces a substantially radial surface
of the other member and one member is movable relative to the other
along the common axis, whereby movement of one member toward the
other into nonslidable contact with the other effects joining or
engagement of the members and of the components connected thereto
for normal incremental rotation of the platen by the ratchet*,
and movement of one member away from the other effects unjoining
or disengagement of the members. |
| | |
| 559.1 | Friction members have cooperating conical surfaces: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 559. Subject matter wherein the substantially radial surface
of each of said members is modified so that the surface of one member
is like the exterior surface of a cone and the surface of the other
member is like the interior surface of a cone, the facing surfaces
of the members corresponding one to the other. |
| | |
| 560 | Via frictional engagement of periphery of cylindrical member: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 556. Subject matter wherein the ratchet* wheel and the
platen* (i.e., the two components referred to below in
this definition) are normally joined or engaged by way of a first
member connected to one of the components and a second member connected
to the other of the components, which first member has a cylindrical
circumferential surface and which second member has a surface that
is movable toward the circumferential surface to be in nonslidable
contact therewith for normal incremental rotation of the platen,
and wherein the second member is movable away from the circumferential
surface for unjoining or disengaging the members. |
| | |
| 560.1 | Friction member(s) acting on inner periphery of drum: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 560. Subject matter wherein said first member is hollow and has
an interior circumferential surface and said second member contacts
said interior surface for joining or engaging the components or
moves away from the interior surface for unjoining or disengaging
the components. |
| | |
| 560.2 | Pivotable member(s): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 560.1. Subject matter wherein said second member is movable toward
and away from the interior surface in a path that is an arc of a
circle about an axis, the axis being a fixed or movable axis. |
| | |
| 561 | Expandable band or split ring: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 560.1. Subject matter wherein said second member is a circular
or coiled element having a periphery that may be enlarged to conform
to or mate with the interior surface of said first member to make
nonslidable contact therewith, or may be diminished to unjoin or
disengage the members. |
| | |
| 562 | Including settable stops: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 555. Subject matter wherein said second mechanism includes means
for rotating the platen* and two or more abutments, a first
of which abutments is stationary relative to the platen and a second of
which abutments is connected to the platen so that as the platen
rotates the second abutment will move toward the first abutment
until contact of the abutments is made and platen rotation will
cease, and wherein the distance between the abutments prior to platen
rotation may be varied. |
| | |
| 563 | Including plural detents selectively engageable with ratchet
wheel: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 555. Subject matter wherein said first mechanism includes a first
ratchet* in the form of a disc or wheel having teeth protruding
from a peripheral edge thereof and notches between the teeth, and
also includes a first arm having a protrusion that meshes with one
of the notches in the ratchet disc to restrain rotation of the disc,
and wherein said second mechanism includes a second arm having a
protrusion that meshes either with notches in the first ratchet disc
or with notches in a second ratchet disc, and wherein the first
arm is used for normal incremental rotation of the platen* or
the second arm is used for other than normal rotation of the platen.
| | (1)
Note. In the device defined above, if one ratchet wheel is
used with two detents that are alternately engaged with the ratchet
wheel, the space between the detents in the circumferential dimension of
the ratchet wheel is such as to provide irregular increments of
detented ratchet-wheel position. If two ratchet wheels are used
with two detents, one of the ratchet wheels is provided with teeth
having a circumferential spacing different from the other, and one
detent is used with one of the ratchet wheels for normal incremental
rotation, and the other detent is used with the other ratchet wheel
for other than normal incremental rotation. | |
| | |
| 564 | Including a drive member engageable with line-space ratchet
wheel: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 555. Subject matter wherein said first mechanism for effecting
normal increments of platen* rotation includes a ratchet* disc
having teeth and notches on the peripheral edge thereof and being
connected to the platen, a first pawl* that engages in
one of the notches between the teeth and moves to rotate the platen
incrementally, and a detent (i.e., an arm having a protrusion that
meshes with one of the notches to restrain rotation at the incremental
position), and wherein said second mechanism for effecting other
than normal increments includes either (a) a second pawl that engages
in one of the notches of the ratchet and moves to rotate the platen
to the extent of a partial increment, or (b) and additional means
to move said first pawl to the extent of a partial increment. |
| | |
| 564.1 | Via displaceable detent: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 564. Subject matter wherein said second mechanism includes means
to move said detent (i.e., of said first mechanism) while it is
in mesh with one of the notches of said ratchet* disc in
an arcuate path to the extent of a partial increment, thereby rotating
the platen* to a similar extent. |
| | |
| 565 | Detent-release structure: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 555. Subject matter wherein said first mechanism for effecting
normal increments of platen* rotation includes a ratchet* disc
having teeth and notches on the peripheral edge thereof and being
connected to the platen, a pawl* that engages in one of
the notches between the teeth and moves to rotate the platen incrementally, and
a detent (i.e., and arm having a protrusion that meshes with one
of the notches to restrain rotation at the incremental position),
and wherein said second mechanism includes means for moving the
protrusion of said detent out of mesh with any of the notches, and wherein
significance is attributed to structure that effects or enables
the movement of the detent. |
| | |
| 566 | With friction brake for platen: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 565. Subject matter wherein said second mechanism also includes
means for restraining rotation of the platen* while the
detent is out of mesh with the notches of the ratchet* disc,
which means includes a first surface on or connected to the platen
and a second surface nonrotatably associated with the platen and
relatively movable into nonslidable contact with the first surface
to prevent platen rotation. |
| | |
| 566.1 | With simultaneous disengagement of drive pawl: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 565. Subject matter wherein said second mechanism also includes
means to move said pawl* (i.e., of said first mechanism)
out of contact or engagement with any of the notches of the ratchet* disc
at the same time that said detent (i.e., of said first mechanism)
is out of mesh with any of the notches in the ratchet disc. |
| | |
| 567 | Including gear (e.g., differential gear, etc.) structure: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 555. Subject matter wherein said second mechanism includes at
least two intermeshing and coacting toothed members that connect
said first mechanism with the platen*.
| | (1)
Note. Usually the gear drive, for example, a differential
drive or a planetary gear arrangement, is used to connect the platen
ratchet* wheel and the platen so as to provide for adjustment
of the platen relative to the ratchet wheel. | |
| | |
| 568 | By electric-power drive: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 545. Subject matter wherein the incremental rotation (i.e., step-by-step
turning) of the platen* is accomplished with the help of
force derived from electrical energy.
| | (1)
Note. The forms of electrical power used include: an electromagnet,
a stepping motor (i.e., an electric motor operated incrementally),
a rotating electric motor, etc., the named devices being only exemplary
of those that may be used. | |
| | |
| 569 | By gear train (e.g., including a clutch): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 545. Subject matter wherein the incremental rotation of the platen* is
accomplished by way of a plurality of toothed members, the teeth
of which members intermesh to cause movement of one member when
another member is moved, one of said members being connected to
the platen.
| | (1)
Note. Included in this subclass are disclosures in which
a differential gear train or a planetary gear train is used, or
in which a clutch device is used to connect a gear train to the
platen. | |
| | |
| 570 | By double-cam drive: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 545. Subject matter wherein the incremental rotation of the platen* is
accomplished by way of an element or an assemblage of elements, which
element or assemblage is moved to-and-fro by two cam surfaces that
act together on the same rotating member, and which element or assemblage
is connected to the platen.
| | (1)
Note. A "cam surface" is defined as the edge
periphery of a disc that rotates about an axis, the radial distance
from the axis to the periphery varying around the periphery. As
the disc rotates, the distance of a follower that is in contact with
the periphery will increase and decrease relative to the axis of
the disc, thus the rotation of the disc will substantially effect
radial movement of the follower. The cam surfaces may be on separate
disc elements or may be on a single member having separate cam surfaces. | |
| | |
| 571 | By friction drive (e.g., including regulation of increments): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 545. Subject matter wherein the incremental rotation of the platen* is
accomplished by way of two members, each member having a surface in
nonsliding contact with the other, one of which members is connected
to the platen and the other of which members is connected to an actuator
that is moved when platen rotation is desired.
| | (1)
Note. In some typewriters of this subclass a predetermined
extent of movement of the actuator effects a predetermined number
of degrees of rotation of the platen, which number of degrees comprises
a predetermined number of steps or increments of platen rotation,
and the number of such steps effected by any movement of the actuator
may be changed from one predetermined number of steps to a different predetermined
number of steps, whereby a change may be made in the number of degrees
of platen rotation that is accomplished by an extent of actuator
movement. The change may be accomplished by changing the amount
of actuator movement, or by changing the range of actuator movement
over which the actuator is effective to cause platen rotation. | |
| | |
| 572 | By pawl and ratchet wheel drive: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 545. Subject matter wherein the incremental rotation of the platen* is
accomplished by way of a ratchet* disc connected to the
platen that is intermittently rotated step-by-step by a pawl* that
is moved by an actuator when platen rotation is desired. |
| | |
| 573.1 | And resilient drive: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 573. Subject matter wherein the actuator is connected to the
pawl* or to the ratchet* by way of a yieldable
connection that enables a different extent of actuator movement
than is imparted to the pawl by the actuator. |
| | |
| 574 | Including pawl carrier coaxial with ratchet wheel: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 572. Subject matter wherein the platen* is incrementally
rotated about an axis that extends lengthwise of the platen, and
the ratchet* disc is connected to the platen to rotate
about the same axis, and wherein said actuator effects to-and-fro
oscillation of a member about said axis, said pawl* being
mounted on said member for corresponding oscillation of the pawl
so that the pawl engages a notch of the ratchet disc at a first
location relative to the typewriter and moves the ratchet and the
platen through a first predetermined number of degrees of platen
rotation. |
| | |
| 574.1 | And means to regulate pawl engagement or drive: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 574. Subject matter wherein a predetermined extent of movement
of the actuator effects a predetermined extent of movement of said
member and the pawl* mounted thereon to move the ratchet* disc
and the platen* connected thereto through a first predetermined
number of degrees of platen rotation that correspond to a first
predetermined number of steps of platen incremental movement, and
wherein the number of steps effected by a movement of the actuator
may be changed by changing the location at which said pawl engages
a notch of said ratchet disc to a second location relative to the typewriter
so that a second predetermined number of degrees of rotation of
the platen will be caused, that will correspond to a second predetermined
number of steps of platen incremental movement. |
| | |
| 575 | Including means to regulate pawl engagement or drive: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 572. Subject matter wherein a predetermined extent of movement
of the actuator effects movement of the pawl* to engage
a notch in the ratchet* disc at a first location relative
to the typewriter and moves the ratchet and the platen* through a
first predetermined number of degrees of platen rotation that correspond
to a first predetermined number of steps of platen incremental movement,
and wherein the number of steps effected by movement of the actuator
may be changed so that a second predetermined number of degrees
of platen rotation will be caused that will correspond to a second
predetermined number of steps of platen incremental movement. |
| | |
| 575.1 | By movable ratchet-wheel shield: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 575. Subject matter wherein the change in the number of steps
effected by movement of the actuator is caused by an element having
a surface with which the pawl* or a portion connected thereto
is in contact until the pawl is moved to said first location, which
element is movable so that the pawl is in contact with the surface
until the pawl is moved to a second location, at which second location
the pawl will engage a notch in the ratchet* disc to effect
a second predetermined number of steps of platen incremental movement. |
| | |
| 575.2 | By stop adjustable to limit movement of actuator: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 575. Subject matter wherein the extent of movement of the actuator
is predetermined by an abutment that is contacted by the actuator
at the end of its movement, and wherein the change in the number
of steps effected by movement of the actuator is caused by changing
the position of the abutment relative to the actuator. |
| | |
| 576 | Via foldable line-space actuator: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 545. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to an
actuator for effecting the step-by-step increments of platen* rotation,
which actuator includes an elongated bar that is moved by the hand
of a typist when incremental platen rotation is desired, the bar
being formed of at least two pieces hinged together so that the
bar may be extended to the length of the pieces or may be doubled,
one alongside another, to occupy a lesser length, or the bar being
hinged at its mounting so that the bar may be placed into operative
position or placed into an inoperative position where it may be stored
in a compact relationship with the typewriter. |
| | |
| 578 | SHEET OR WEB (E.G., RECORD-MEDIUM) FEEDING MECHANISM: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to movement
of a record-medium* relative to a typewriter, which relative
movement is necessary for typing a print-line* and occurs
in a direction generally coinciding with the direction in which
line-space* movement occurs, or wherein significance is
attributed to structure which facilitates, or contributes to, or enables
said record- medium movement.
| | (1)
Note. For a discussion of the difference between line-space
movement and record-medium movement, see the definition of line-space
in the Glossary, section III, and for a discussion of the difference
between a sheet and a web, see the definition of record-medium,
also in the Glossary. |
| | (2)
Note. This and indented subclasses relate to the feeding
of a sheet or web from a supply to the typewriter, or to the movement
within the typewriter for line-space or similar purposes, or to
the delivery of a sheet or web from the typewriter to a receiver
of the sheet or web. To be properly placed as an original patent
into this or the indented subclasses, the claimed disclosure of
such patent should describe the typewriter by more than its name. |
| | (3)
Note. Typewriters of this subclass include such structures
as: a stationary sheet table or apron*, a conformation that
prevents a sheet having an irregularity or hole thereon from being
torn at the hole as the sheet moves through the typewriter, or a
typewriter with plural stationary tables or an auxiliary support. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 226, | Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses for feeding of web material. |
| 271, | Sheet Feeding or Delivering, appropriate subclasses for feeding or delivering
of sheet material. |
|
| | |
| 579 | Including skew correction responsive to position of sheet
or web: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 578. Subject matter wherein a piece of record-medium* is
intended to be moved in a direction parallel to one of the side
edges of the piece, the movement being caused by a record-medium
feed means, and wherein the action of said feed means is regulated
so that if there is a tendency for the record-medium to move sidewise
or other than in the intended direction, the feed means will be
adjusted to overcome the tendency, the adjustment being made as
a result of a sensing of the tendency toward sidewise movement.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 619+, | for a means for positioning the side edge of a web. |
|
| | |
| 580 | Including forming indicia on record-medium during typing
to find next line to be typed: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 578. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to (a)
the imprinting or formation of a mark on the record-medium* while
a print-line* is being typed thereon, and (b) the use of said
mark during a subsequent reinsertion of the record-medium into the
typewriter, the mark effecting the stopping of the feed of the reinserted
record-medium in a position proper for the imprinting of a new print-line.
| | (1)
Note. In the typewriter of this and indented subclasses,
a typist will usually type one print-line of text, remove the record-medium
from the typewriter, and then will reinsert the record-medium to continue
the typing of one (or more) print-lines. Each occasion for removal and
reinsertion of the record-medium will be reason to imprint or form
a mark which will subsequently be used to stop the feed of the record-medium
when the record-medium has been fed to the position where a new
print-line is to be typed. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 583.3, | for a programmed-control-system* wherein
indicia on the record-medium are part of the program to control
the feeding of the record-medium. |
|
| | |
| 581 | To find last-produced slit or hole or notch in sheet: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 580. Subject matter wherein the record-medium* is in
sheet form and said mark on the sheet is formed thereon by (a) piercing
the sheet without removing material therefrom, or by (b) perforating
the sheet through both opposite surfaces thereof, or by (c) cutting
out a portion of the edge of the sheet, and wherein any of the marks
described is made concurrently with the typing of the print-line* that
is to be used as a reference location of a new print-line that the typist
wishes to type. |
| | |
| 583.2 | Program is indicia on rotatable disc or drum: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 583. Subject matter wherein the instructions are markings or
openings or projections in or on a platelike or cylindrical member
that turns about its own axis.
| | (1)
Note. The markings or indicia may be magnetically or electrically
conductive strips applied to the plate or cylinder in a particular
pattern, or may be openings arranged to pass light to a photocell
in a particular pattern. | |
| | |
| 583.3 | Program is indicia on record-medium: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 583. Subject matter wherein the instructions are markings or
openings on the record-medium* itself.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 580+, | for a typewriter wherein markings on the record-medium
control feed of the record-medium to the next print-line* to
be typed. |
|
| | |
| 584 | Including feed of plural record-media arranged side-by-side
(e.g., fed independently of platen): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 578. Subject matter wherein movement of at least two record-medium* pieces
occurs, and wherein the pieces are placed so that a side edge of
one piece is adjacent to an opposite side edge of another piece,
or wherein one of the record-medium pieces is moved by structure
other than the platen*.
| | (1)
Note. In many typewriters the record-medium material is partially
wrapped around a cylindrical platen so it does not lie in a plane,
but the arrangement of the sheets in the patents of this and indented subclasses
is such that if the record-medium material did lie in a plane, the plural
pieces would lie in the same plane to be side by side. |
| | (2)
Note. In some typewriters a platen effects line-space* movement
of one of the record-medium pieces and a feed-roller* couple
that is spaced from the platen along the line of movement effects
line-space movement of the other record-medium piece. | |
| | |
| 585 | By divided platen: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 584. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with at
least two platen* elements for supporting or backing a
corresponding number of record-medium* pieces, which platen
elements are coaxial one with the other(s).
| | (1)
Note. In this subclass the platens are coaxial but mounted
on the same typewriter carriage* so that two pieces or record-medium
may be independently moved in the same typewriter. See the patents
of subclass 82 above for a typewriter having two or more separate
and independently mounted platens. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 82, | and see (1) Note above. |
|
| | |
| 585.1 | With positive clutch for simultaneous rotation of platen
sections: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 585. Subject matter wherein the plurality of platen* elements
are connected one with the other(s) by means that enables one to
be disconnected from the other(s) or enables one to be connected
to the other(s) whereby all the elements may turn at the same time.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass also provides for a typewriter wherein
the plural platen sections may be turned at different rotational
speeds. | |
| | |
| 586 | Including feed of tally strip record-medium (e.g., plural
tally strips): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 578. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
movement of a tally strip relative to the typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. The term "tally strip" is a typewriter
industry or "art" term for an elongated, relatively
narrow piece of record-medium* that is used in a typewriter
in addition to the record-medium ordinarily used. The tally strip
is fed separately from the ordinary record-medium and is used to
record thereon a summation of information. On a tally strip information that
can be recorded includes for example, the sum of a column of numbers,
a number representing the total items shipped during a particular
day, a listing of bills of lading for a particular period of time,
words identifying a particular document, and similar subject matter summarizing
activities recorded by a typist using the typewriter. Due to the dimensions
of a tally strip, it is handled in a typewriter (often an accounting machine)
in a manner that is different from the way ordinary record-medium
is handled. Disclosures for this and indented subclasses are distinguished
in that the handling of one or more tally strips is significant. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 43, | for a flat-platen* typewriter for typing on
a tally strip. |
|
| | |
| 587 | And feed of endless transfer-medium: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 586. Subject matter wherein a transfer-medium* is also
moved relative to the typewriter, which transfer-medium is in the
form of a closed-loop band, and is for use with a tally strip. |
| | |
| 588 | On plural-platen (e.g., divided platen) typewriter: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 586. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with at
least two platen* elements.
| | (1)
Note. The plural platens may be in the form of a divided
platen for side by side record media as in subclass 585 above, or
may be separate platens. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 585+, | and see (1) Note above. |
|
| | |
| 589 | With locking or interlocking mechanism (e.g., line lock,
etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 586. Subject matter wherein a typewriter is provided with locking
mechanism or with interlocking mechanism.
| | (1)
Note. The terms "locking" mechanism and "interlocking" mechanism
are defined and discussed in the definition and notes of subclass
663 below. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 663+, | for other locking or interlocking mechanism. |
|
| | |
| 590 | Including feed varied for amount of tally strip on spool: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 586. Subject matter wherein the tally strip is an elongated tape
wound onto a reel and wherein the distance that the tally strip
is moved for feeding thereof is dependent upon the diameter of the
wound reel of tally strip.
| | (1)
Note. In this subclass the feed of the tally strip is adjusted
in accordance with the change in diameter of the tally-strip spool
so that the line-space* distances between print-lines* on
the tally strip will remain constant. | |
| | |
| 593 | With cutting or spring tensioning of tally strip: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 586. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with means
for severing a portion of the tally strip from the supply of tally
strip, or wherein the tally strip is tautened during its movement
by a yieldable element contacting the tally strip, or wherein the
tally strip is wound on a supply spool or a takeup spool and the
tally strip is tautened by a yieldable element cooperating with
either of said spools. |
| | |
| 594 | Including structure or mounting or adjustment of tally-strip
roll: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 586. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a wound
reel of tally-strip material, or to a support for a wound reel of
tally-strip material, or wherein the typewriter is provided with
a carriage* that supports a platen*, and wherein
the support for the wound reel of tally-strip material is carried
by the typewriter or by a typewriter portion other than the carriage,
or wherein the support for the wound reel of tally-strip material
is provided with means for varying the position of the wound reel
relative to the typewriter. |
| | |
| 594.1 | And roll for transfer-medium: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 594. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is also provided with
a wound reel of transfer-medium* material and a support
for the wound reel of tally-strip material. |
| | |
| 595 | Including insertion of sheet from front of platen (e.g.,
for "condensed-billing", via sheet guide, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 578. Subject matter wherein movement of a record-medium* sheet
occurs, and wherein a sheet is fed into the typewriter by guiding
the leading edge of a sheet directly between the platen* and
the print-point* via structure that is positioned between
the platen and the typist.
| | (1)
Note. This mode of inserting the sheet is usually for the
purpose of facilitating a condensed-billing*-typing operation. |
| | (2)
Note. In some typewriters insertion via the front of the
platen is facilitated by moving the platen rearwardly to form a larger
throat. Subclass 649, which relates to platen movement, should be
considered. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 515, | for insertion of "carbon paper" from front
of platen. |
|
| | |
| 596 | Including feed responsive to presence of sheet: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 595. Subject matter wherein the movement of the record-medium* sheet
occurs as a result of inserting the sheet into the typewriter to
a predetermined point in the typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. The insertion of the sheet is usually manual, by the
typist manually guiding the sheet to the platen*, and the
feed of the sheet subsequent to insertion thereof is usually typewriter
actuated, by a motorized mechanism that is responsive to a control
initiated by the sheet insertion. | |
| | |
| 598 | With digitally selected, typewriter-actuated feed to selected
line to be typed (e.g., via "dialing disc", etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 595. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with a
mechanism that causes movement of the record-medium* sheet
for any of a plurality of determinate distances to a determinate position
relative to the typewriter, the position being that at which the
typist desires to imprint a print-line*, which mechanism
includes a movable component (or components) bearing indicia thereon
representing said distances, which component is moved by the typist
in accordance with the desired distance, the movement of the component
effecting the movement of the sheet to the determinate position.
| | (1)
Note. The component is similar to a telephone dial in appearance,
and is moved in a similar manner (i.e., by the typist"s
finger) to cause the typewriter to move the sheet. | |
| | |
| 600 | Via feed throat having gate (e.g. actuated by power, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 595. Subject matter wherein a record-medium* sheet is
led into the typewriter by way of a passageway that includes a movable
barrier, which barrier may be positioned so that it prevents movement
of the sheet or may be positioned so that it enables movement of
the sheet into the typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. In this subclass the "gate" is opened
and closed by a power-actuated means. | |
| | |
| 600.1 | With platen repositioned for sheet insertion: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 600. Subject matter wherein the platen* of the typewriter
is movable to a position at which it enables movement of the record-medium* sheet
into contact with the platen.
| | (1)
Note. In this subclass the platen together with a feed-roller* effectively
form a "gate" in the feed throat that prevents insertion
of the record-medium when the platen and feed-roller are engaged.
In this condition the leading edge of the record-medium is stopped
at the platen. The repositioning of the platen away from the feed-roller
effectively opens the gate so that the record-medium can be fully
inserted into the throat, usually until the leading edge of the
record-medium engages a stop. The throat is then closed by moving
the platen back into engagement with the feed-roller, the record-medium
being located therebetween. At this time the record medium is properly
located relative to the intended print-line* and may be
moved in line-space* direction by rotation of the platen and
the feed-roller. | |
| | |
| 600.2 | With feed-roller repositioned for sheet insertion: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 600. Subject matter wherein the platen* cooperates with
a feed-roller* to feed a record-medium* sheet,
which feed-roller is movable to a position at which it enables movement
of the sheet into proper location relative to the platen.
| | (1)
Note. In this subclass the "gate" is opened
by moving the feed-roller away from the platen. | |
| | |
| 600.3 | And sheet feed by additional feed-roller couple: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 600.2. Subject matter wherein feed movement of a record-medium* sheet
is assisted by a feed-roller*, cooperating with another
feed roller, the two cooperating feed-rollers forming a roller couple
that is added to the feed-roller of subclass 600.2. |
| | |
| 600.4 | Coincident to pivoting of sheet guide: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 600.2. Subject matter wherein a record-medium* sheet is
led into the typewriter by way of a passageway that is movable in
an arc, and wherein the movement of the passageway is concurrent with
the movement of said feed-roller.
| | (1)
Note. The passageway (i.e., "sheet guide")
of this subclass (600.4) may be separate from the passageway (i.e., "feed throat")
of subclass 600 or may be an extension of the feed-throat passageway. | |
| | |
| 601 | With laterally movable sheet holder (e.g., having concurrent
feed movement): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 595. Subject matter wherein a record-medium* sheet is
carried or supported for feeding movement by a guide member, which
member is movable in a direction substantially perpendicular to
the direction of sheet feed, or wherein the guide member is also
movable with the sheet in a sheet-feeding direction, such movement
occurring at the same time as the perpendicular movement. |
| | |
| 602 | With sheet ejector: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 595. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is also provided with
means to remove a record-medium* sheet from the typewriter. |
| | |
| 603 | Via chute(s) or feed-roller couple (e.g., plural chutes): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 595. Subject matter wherein a record-medium* is led
into the typewriter by way of a member that extends in the direction
of sheet feed and at least partly surrounds the width and thickness dimensions
of the sheet, or wherein feed movement of a record-medium sheet
is caused by a feed-roller* cooperating with another feed-roller,
the two cooperating feed-rollers forming a roller couple.
| | (1)
Note. Two or more of such members may be provided, or each
of said members may have its position relative to the typewriter
changed in a direction substantially perpendicular to the direction of
sheet feed. |
| | (2)
Note. The member (i.e., chute) may guide the leading edge
of a record-medium* sheet to the rear of the platen* (i.e.,
a position relative to the platen that is diametrically opposite
to the print-point* of the platen). | |
| | |
| 605 | For feeding plural record-media concurrently or selectively: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 578. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to means
associated with a typewriter for moving two or more record-medium* pieces, either
all of the pieces at the same time or one of the pieces relative
to the other(s) in a manner as desired by a typist or other operator.
| | (1)
Note. The record media to be moved may include, for example,
plural webs, or plural sheets, or an assemblage of sheet and web
material. Transfer-medium* (e.g., "carbon" paper)
may also be included within the assemblage of material to be fed,
but if significance is attributed to the function* of the
transfer-medium, a search for disclosures thereof should include
subclasses 497+. |
| | (2)
Note. This subclass also includes a device for keeping one
of the record-medium pieces separate from the other(s) as the pieces
are fed through the typewriter. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 497+, | for feeding of "manifold sets" and
see (1) Note above. |
|
| | |
| 606 | Plural webs superimposed and aligned to each other during
typing: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 605. Subject matter wherein two or more webs or record-medium* are
positioned in a surface-to-surface relationship (i.e., a top surface
of one web adjacent to a bottom surface of another web) and the
webs are further positioned so that their corresponding side edges
are located adjacent to one another or so that a particular indicium
that occurs along the length dimension of one web is located adjacent
to a corresponding indicium that occurs along the length dimension
of another web that is in a surface-to-surface relationship therewith.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 42, | for aligning and feeding of plural webs in a flat-platen* typewriter. |
|
| | |
| 607.2 | By insertion of additional record-medium: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 607. Subject matter wherein one sheet or web of record-medium* is
fed into the typewriter by guiding the leading edge of the sheet
or web to a position relative to the platen* of the typewriter
that is diametrically opposite to the print-point* of the
platen. |
| | |
| 607.3 | With concurrent feed-roller and line-spacing control: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 607. Subject matter wherein the typewriter includes a feed-roller* cooperating
with a platen* to feed two record-medium* pieces
of material, one of which pieces is intended to remain in the typewriter
while the other piece of material is removed, and wherein, to aid
in the removal of the other piece, the feed-roller is moved out of
cooperation with the platen (i.e., away from the platen) while at
the same time the piece remaining in the typewriter is moved a line-space* distance.
| | (1)
Note. The record-medium that is removed could be a bill or
financial statement, whereas the record-medium that remains in the
typewriter could be a tally strip. | |
| | |
| 608 | With clamp for holding one record-medium stationary: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 607. Subject matter wherein the relative movement of one sheet
or web of record-medium* with respect to a second sheet
or web of record-medium is caused by firmly gripping one of the sheets
or webs to restrain its movement while the other sheet or web is
moved. |
| | |
| 608.1 | Selectively engageable feed-rollers or feed-roller brakes: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 608. Subject matter wherein the sheet or web record-medium* that
is to be restrained is firmly gripped by a member that is normally
a feed-roller*, or wherein the feed-roller is prevented
from rotating.
| | (1)
Note. Normally a feed-roller cooperates with a platen* so
that incremental rotation of the platen causes feed of the record-medium
because the feed-roller presses the record-medium against the platen.
However, if the platen does not rotate and the feed-roller presses
the record-medium against the stationary platen, the record-medium
will also remain stationary. In this subclass the record-medium
is firmly gripped between the feed-roller and the stationary platen
to restrain movement of the record-medium, or the record-medium
is firmly gripped between a stationary platen and a stationary feed-roller
to restrain movement of the record-medium. | |
| | |
| 608.2 | By auxiliary feed-roller or platen section (e.g., separate
feed of sheets): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 607. Subject matter wherein the feed movement of one sheet or
web of record-medium* is effected with the aid of one feed-roller* and
the feed movement of another sheet or web or record-medium is effected
with the aid of a second feed-roller, or wherein each feed-roller urges
a separate sheet or web record-medium against a separate platen*.
| | (1)
Note. In this subclass one feed-roller may cooperate with
a platen and the second feed-roller cooperates with another feed-roller
forming a feed-roller couple, or the separate platens may be coaxial. | |
| | |
| 608.3 | By retrograde movement of one record-medium: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 607. Subject matter wherein the relative movement of one sheet
or web of record-medium* with respect to a second sheet
or web of record-medium is caused by reversing the usual feed direction
of one of the sheets or webs in a direction opposite to the usual
line-space* direction. |
| | |
| 609 | Mount for plural web rolls: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 605. Subject matter wherein the pieces of record-medium* are
in the form of web material (i.e., each is a piece of material of
indeterminate length), and each web is a spirally convoluted roll,
and wherein each spirally convoluted roll is supported on an axis
associated with the typewriter.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 613+, | for a mount for a single web roll. |
|
| | |
| 610 | Including sheet-associating attachment (e.g., pin-band-encircling
platen): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 605. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to structure
which facilitates or contributes to the movement of two or more
sheets or webs of record-medium*, which structure includes
means whereby one sheet or web is enabled to be positioned with
respect to another sheet or web in a particular location relative
to the typewriter so that both sheets or webs will be moved into
or out of the typewriter as desired by a typist or other operator.
| | (1)
Note. Included herein is a typewriter having a rear collating-table* with clamps
or an indicator. | |
| | |
| 610.1 | With table or frame (e.g., collating-table): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 610. Subject matter wherein the means for positioning the sheets
or webs of record-medium* includes a platform attached
to the typewriter and closely adjacent to the platen*,
on which platform the sheets or webs are assembled prior to insertion
of the assemblage into the typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. The platform is usually a collating-table* and
usually includes means to align the front edges of the sheets. | |
| | |
| 610.2 | Front collating-table with sheet-holding means (e.g., clamps): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 610.1. Subject matter wherein the platform includes a collating-table* that
is located on the typewriter so as to lead the assembled sheets
or webs of record-medium* to a position adjacent to the
print-point* of the platen*, and also includes
means to temporarily secure the assembled sheets or webs to the
platform. |
| | |
| 610.3 | Including pin-holding means: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 610.2. Subject matter wherein the securing means includes an element
that has a relatively slender, elongated configuration, one end
of which engages the sheets or webs of record-medium*. |
| | |
| 610.4 | Including indicator: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 610.2. Subject matter wherein the platform includes a marking or
sign to show the positioning of the sheets or webs of record-medium* relative
to the platform. |
| | |
| 611 | For feeding web record-medium: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 578. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to means
associated with a typewriter for moving a web of record-medium* relative
to the typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. The term "web" is discussed in the
definition of "record-medium", in the Glossary,
section III. |
| | (2)
Note. The movement of the web in this and indented subclasses
is that which causes the web to enter or exit the typewriter, or
to move in a line-space* direction or to move relative
to a moving carriage*. Movement of the web (or any record-medium)
by and with a moving carriage will be found in subclasses relating
to the carriage, subclasses 283+. |
| | (3)
Note. The typewriter of this subclass may have a magnetic
clutch drive for effecting web feed. | |
| | |
| 612 | Feeding web or sheet in perpendicular directions: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 611. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
movement of a piece of web material (or of a piece of sheet material)
record-medium* in either (a) a line-space* direction, or
(b) a character-space* direction, the two directions being
transversely related to each other, and the movement in either direction being
caused by means other than a moving platen*.
| | (1)
Note. The two directions noted above are referred to in the
typewriter art as "x" direction, (i.e., the line-space
direction) and "y" direction, (i.e., the character-space
direction). | |
| | |
| 613 | With web supply or takeup or mount therefor (e.g., web
cartridge, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 611. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with means
for holding a source of web material to be typed on, or with means
for holding the web material that has been typed on and is being
removed from the typing zone of the typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. Either the supply or the makeup can be a convoluted
roll of web material, but the subject matter of this and indented
subclasses is not limited to a web roll. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 609, | for a mount for plural web rolls. |
|
| | |
| 613.1 | Including insertion of leading edge of web: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 613. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to means
for facilitating the entry of a web into the typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. The subject matter of this subclass also provides for
the reentry of a web that has been torn or separated from itself,
thus causing a new "leading edge" to be formed,
and also provides for a "dolly" to facilitate
insertion of the web. | |
| | |
| 613.3 | With web smoother: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 613.2. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to means
for flattening a configuration in the web material that was caused
by doubling the material upon itself. |
| | |
| 613.4 | Holder for fan-folded web mounted to move with carriage: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 613.2. Subject matter wherein the web of material has an indeterminate
length dimension and is folded upon itself transversely of said
dimension, the direction of folding alternating along said dimension,
and wherein said web is supported by a receptacle or container,
is supported on the carriage* or is supported on a portion
of the typewriter that partakes of carriage movement.
| | (1)
Note. The web of material may be record-medium* material
or may be transfer-medium* material (e.g., "carbon paper")
that is handled as record-medium material, and the typing of simultaneous
copies is not included in the claimed disclosures. | |
| | |
| 614 | Including web rewind: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 613. Subject matter wherein the web of record-medium* that
has been typed on and is being removed from the typing zone of the
typewriter is convoluted spirally into a roll. |
| | |
| 614.1 | Connected to platen drive: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 614. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with a
platen* and means to rotate the platen, and wherein said
rotating means also rotates said roll to convolute the removed web onto
the roll. |
| | |
| 615 | Mounted on typewriter having transversely moving carriage: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 613. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with a
carriage* that is movable in carriage feed and carriage
return directions and wherein said web material is supported relative to
said carriage.
| | (1)
Note. In this subclass the web material is supported on a
mounting that is fixed relative to the typewriter, but the web is guided
to follow the movements of the carriage as the carriage moves in
carriage feed and carriage return directions. |
| | (2)
Note. The term "carriage feed" is defined
in subclass 319, and the term "carriage return" is
defined in subclass 313. | |
| | |
| 615.1 | Mounted to move with carriage: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 615. Subject matter wherein said roll is supported on means that
is fixed to the carriage*, whereby the roll partakes of
carriage feed and carriage return movements. |
| | |
| 615.2 | For feeding tape in direction of print-line (i.e., transverse
feed): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 613. Subject matter wherein the web of record-medium* is
in the form of an elongated but relatively narrow strip of material
that is mounted to be moved so that its length dimension moves parallel
to the direction in which a print-line* is typed.
| | (1)
Note. The width dimension of the strip is usually approximately
equal to or only slightly greater than the height of a character* symbol. | |
| | |
| 616 | By pin-feed means (e.g., reciprocating pin, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 611. Subject matter wherein the means for moving a web of record-medium* includes
at least one short, slender element that is configured to enter
into a hole in the web and is moved in a direction parallel to the
line-space* direction to thereby move the web.
| | (1)
Note. In this subclass the pin reciprocates to-and-fro, engaging
the web in one of its movements and disengaging from the web in
the return movement. | |
| | |
| 616.1 | Including laterally adjustable bands (e.g., tractor feed,
etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 616. Subject matter wherein the means for moving a web of record-medium* includes
at least two closed loop flexible members that move in a direction
parallel to the line-space* direction, and each of which
members includes one or more of said elements, and wherein the position
of either or both of the members relative to the web can be varied
in a direction perpendicular to the line-space direction.
| | (1)
Note. In some typewriters of this subclass the position of
two of said members relative to the web is varied at the same time,
and both bands are moved oppositely in equal distances. This is termed "tractor
feed". | |
| | |
| 616.2 | Pin feed on endless band: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 616. Subject matter wherein the means for moving a web of record-medium* includes
at least one closed loop flexible member that moves in a direction
parallel to the line-space* direction, which member includes
one or more of said elements. |
| | |
| 616.3 | Pin wheel (e.g., on platen cylinder): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 616. Subject matter wherein the means for moving a web of record-medium* includes
a circular member that rotates so that its periphery moves in a
direction parallel to the line-space* direction, which
member includes one or more of said elements.
| | (1)
Note. In some typewriters of this subclass the circular member
is the platen* or the element(s) is/are associated
with the platen to rotate therewith. | |
| | |
| 617 | By friction-feed means (e.g., reciprocating finger or gripper
or pinch roller, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 611. Subject matter wherein the means for moving a web of record-medium* includes
one or more members that closely contact the surface(s) of the record-medium
adjacent thereto and move relative to the typewriter in a direction
parallel to the line-space* direction while the surface(s) of
the member(s) do not slide relative to the surface(s) of the record-medium,
thereby moving the record-medium in said direction.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 634+, | for friction-feed means usually applied to a sheet,
and see (1) Note to that subclass. |
|
| | |
| 618 | With web tensioning or braking: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 611. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with means
for moving a web of record-medium* relative to the typewriter
and is also provided with means for resisting the movement of the
web, whereby the web is tautened or slowed in movement, or wherein
the resisting means tends to effect stoppage in the movement of
the web of record-medium. |
| | |
| 619 | Including web guiding or aligning (e.g., laterally, relative
to print-line, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 611. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to means
for positioning a web of record-medium* relative to a particular
location on the typewriter or leading the web to said location.
| | (1)
Note. The web may be positioned transversely of the direction
of line-space* movement or may be positioned with respect
to the print-line*. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 579, | for skew correction of a web. |
|
| | |
| 620 | Including web shifting to view print-line: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 611. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a movement
of the web of record-medium* that has been typed on, which
movement is for the purpose of enabling a typist to see the character* symbols
that have been typed on the print-line*. |
| | |
| 621 | With web cutter (e.g., tear bar, wire tool, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 611. Subject matter wherein a typewriter is provided with means
to sever one portion of a web of record-medium* from another
portion of that web.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass includes a cutter that has an edge against
which the web is torn. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 83, | Cutting, appropriate subclasses for a cutter not associated
with a typewriter. |
|
| | |
| 621.2 | And gauge for tear-off length: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 621. Subject matter wherein the severing means comprises an element
having a sharp edge, against which edge a web of record-medium* is
moved by the user of a typewriter to sever the web, and wherein
the typewriter is provided with an indicator that helps the typist
to determine the amount of web to be severed from the body of the
web. |
| | |
| 622 | With holder for single sheet (e.g., clip, backing sheet,
etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 578. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
use of a support in addition to a platen*, which support
holds one sheet of record-medium* during typing on the
sheet, or wherein significance is attributed to a relatively thin
piece of material having length and width dimensions corresponding
to the length and width of a sheet of record-medium*, which piece
of material lies between the sheet of record-medium and the platen* and
holds the record-medium thereto while typing is performed on the
sheet of record-medium. |
| | |
| 623 | Mounted on carriage (e.g., for extra-wide sheet, cylindroidal
holder, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 622. Subject matter wherein said support is held by the carriage* of
a typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass is also for a support in the shape of
a hollow cylindroidal member that substantially surrounds the platen* or
for a support for a sheet of record-medium* that has a
width dimension (i.e., a dimension that extends in a direction
perpendicular to the line-space* distance), which width
dimension is greater than the corresponding length dimension of
the platen that backs the record-medium. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 552, | for a "floating" platen capable
of feeding such an extra-wide sheet. |
|
| | |
| 624 | For feeding sheet from stack or pack holder: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 578. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to means
associated with a typewriter for removing one sheet of record-medium* from
a pile consisting of a plurality of such sheets regularly arranged
in a support or receptacle, or to means for moving such a sheet
into the typewriter for typing thereon.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 271, | Sheet Feeding or Delivering,
subclass 145 and other appropriate subclasses for sheet feeding
means not associated with a typewriter. |
|
| | |
| 625 | Add delivering to sheet receiver (e.g., by roller couple): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 624. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with means
to move the sheet of record-medium* that has been typed
on out of the typewriter and onto a support or receptacle.
| | (1)
Note. In this subclass a "roller couple" (defined
in subclass 636) may be used to move a sheet of record medium into
a typewriter for typing thereon or out of a typewriter after typing,
thereon. | |
| | |
| 626 | By engaging between flap and body of envelope: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 624. Subject matter wherein the record-medium* to be
typed on is a folded sheet or a wrapper having a folded portion
adjacent to a main portion, and wherein the feed means is an element
that moves between the folded portion and the main portion to engage
the sheet or wrapper at the fold to thereby move the sheet or wrapper.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 271, | Sheet Feeding or Delivering,
subclass 2 for an envelope feeder not associated with a typewriter. |
|
| | |
| 627 | By pneumatic means: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 624. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with means
for moving the sheet of record-medium*, which means includes
a gaseous fluid medium under subatmospheric or above-atmospheric
pressure.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 271, | Sheet Feeding or Delivering,
subclasses 90+ for a pneumatic sheet feeding means not associated
with a typewriter. |
|
| | |
| 628 | By reciprocating of oscillating member: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 624. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with means
for moving the sheet of record-medium*, which means includes
an element that moves to-and-fro in a straight line or an arcuate
path and engages the sheet for movement thereof.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 271, | Sheet Feeding or Delivering,
subclasses 44+ for a reciprocating sheet feeding means not associated
with a typewriter. |
|
| | |
| 629 | By endless-band or rotating (e.g., feed-roller) member: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 624. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with means
for moving the sheet of record-medium*, which means includes
a flexible element orbiting in a closed loop and that engages the
sheet for movement thereof, or wherein the typewriter is provided
with means for moving the sheet of record medium, which means includes
a surface or element that, turns about an axis and that engages
the sheet for movement thereof.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 271, | Sheet Feeding or Delivering,
subclasses 34+ for an endless sheet feeding means not associated
with a typewriter; and subclasses 109+ for a rotating sheet
feeding means not associated with a typewriter. |
|
| | |
| 630 | Including aligning of sheet edge prior to typing: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 578. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to structure
for positioning or locating a sheet of record-medium* with
respect to some part of a typewriter, which structure is used before
any of the character* symbols are imprinted on the sheet
and is used by positioning a border of the sheet against the structure.
| | (1)
Note. In most typewriters a sheet is inserted adjacent to
the platen* and moved in a line-space* direction.
The "leading" edge of the sheet is that edge which
is parallel to a print-line* (i.e., perpendicular to the
line-space direction) and enters the typewriter first. The "side" edge
of the sheet is that edge which is parallel to the line-space direction.
The structure of this and indented subclasses ensures that either
or both of the edges will be properly aligned with the print-lines
so that the typed text will have a pleasing appearance on the page*. | |
| | |
| 631 | Aligner moved to operate concurrently with disengagement
of feed means: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 630. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with means
to move a sheet through the typewriter, which means is shiftable
into a first position at which it will not move the sheet or into
a second position at which it will move the sheet, wherein the aligning
structure is shiftable into a first position at which it will align the
sheet or into a second position at which it will not align, but
instead permit the sheet to be moved through the typewriter, and
wherein the first position of the moving means coincides with the
first position of the aligning means whereby the sheet will be aligned
when the sheet moving means is not operative. |
| | |
| 632 | Including leading-edge aligner located past print-point: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 630. Subject matter wherein the aligning structure is located
in a position at which it will engage and align the leading edge
of the sheet after the leading edge has been moved beyond the print-point* of
the typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. The term "leading" edge is defined
in subclass 630 in (1) Note thereto. | |
| | |
| 633 | Side-edge aligner (e.g., adjustable, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 630. Subject matter wherein the aligning structure is located
in a position at which it will engage and align the side edge of
a sheet.
| | (1)
Note. The term "side" edge is defined in subclass
630 in (1) Note thereto. | |
| | |
| 633.1 | On rear sheet table or apron: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 633. Subject matter wherein the aligning structure is mounted
on a support for holding a sheet of record-medium* adjacent
to a typewriter, which support is positioned adjacent to the back
side of the platen*. |
| | |
| 633.2 | Adjustable aligner (e.g., with lock): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 633.1. Subject matter wherein the aligning structure is mounted
so as to permit variation in the position of the aligning structure
relative to the support.
| | (1)
Note. The aligner may be provided with means for latching
the structure to the support to prevent relative movement thereof. | |
| | |
| 634 | Including friction-feed means (e.g., band): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 578. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to movement
of a record-medium* in a line-space* direction,
which movement is caused by one or more members having a surface
or surfaces that closely contact the surface(s) of the record-medium
adjacent thereto and move relative to the typewriter in a direction
parallel to the line-space direction while the surface(s) of the
member(s) do not slide relative to the surface(s) of the record-medium, thereby
moving the record-medium in said direction.
| | (1)
Note. In this subclass a flexible feed band cooperates with
a platen* to feed a sheet of record-medium lying between the
band and the platen. |
| | (2)
Note. In amplification of the phrase "in a direction
parallel to the line-space direction", the following should
be noted. Two members having surfaces that face one another with
the record-medium therebetween may comprise a roller couple, wherein
each of the feed-roller* elements rotate about a fixed
axis in opposite rotational directions, but the two peripheral portions
of the roller surfaces that are closest to each other are tangent
to substantially the same line and the rotation is such as to move
the tangent roller surfaces in the line-space direction. Similar
members may move along a line perpendicular to their axes without
rotation of the rollers, thus moving the record-medium that is therebetween,
and return along the same line but in opposite direction, but during
the return movement the rollers rotate so as not to return the record-medium;
or, two nonrotatable members may close onto the record-medium and
move in the line-space direction, but open out of contact with the
record-medium for return of the members. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 617+, | for friction feed of a web by a reciprocating-gripper
couple or a reciprocating-pinch-roller couple. |
|
| | |
| 635 | By endless-feed band: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 634. Subject matter wherein one of said members is a flexible
strip of material having a closed-loop or continuous configuration.
| | (1)
Note. Usually the endless band cooperates with the platen* to
feed a sheet lying between the band and platen. | |
| | |
| 636 | By roller couple (e.g. rotatable pinch rollers, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 634. Subject matter wherein at least one member contacts one
surface of the record-medium* and at least another member
contacts the opposite surface of the record-medium, and wherein each
member is a cylinder or a cylindroid rotatable in opposite rotational
directions with the record-medium therebetween.
| | (1)
Note. In this subclass a roller couple comprises two counter-rotating
rollers with record-medium therebetween, neither of which rollers
is a platen*. In the subclasses indented hereunder, the
platen is cylindrical or cylindroidal and is rotatable to feed record-medium
frictionally engaged thereby, and the other roller is a pressure
roller that urges the record-medium into frictional contact with
the platen. The roller couple of the indented subclasses thus comprises
a platen and a pressure roller cooperating to feed record-medium
lying therebetween. The pressure roller is termed a "feed-roller" even
though it may not be driven other than by frictional contact with
the platen or the record-medium. | |
| | |
| 636.1 | With typewriter-actuated control or feed-roller position: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 636. Subject matter wherein a feed-roller* is movable
into a first position at which it is in contact with a platen* or
is movable into a second position at which it is not in contact
with the platen, and wherein either movement of the feed-roller
results from or is concurrent with movement of a mechanism of the
typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. The term typewriter-actuated-control* is intended
to refer to a control or regulator that is actuated by the typewriter
itself or a part thereof that is moved by other than directly manually triggered
operation. In most manual typewriters a typist presses various
key* elements to effect a particular typing operation.
The key-pressed operation is not typewriter actuated, but if that
operation in turn effects second operation without further intervention
by the typist, the second operation is typewriter actuated. | |
| | |
| 636.3 | Including feed-roller having equalizing or pressure-adjusting
means: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 636. Subject matter wherein a feed-roller* is urged (or
a plurality of feed-rollers are urged) toward an associated platen* by
a mechanism, which mechanism is regulated so that (a) the force with
which the feed-roller is urged (or any of the feed-rollers are urged)
may be varied, or (b) the force with which either end of the feed-roller
is urged (or either end of any of the feed-rollers is urged) may
be varied so as to cause the ends of the feed-roller(s) to be urged
with equal force.
| | (1)
Note. In a pressure-adjusting mechanism the purpose is to
adjust the spring force by which one feed-roller (or a plurality
of feed-rollers) is biased against the platen or another feed-roller
to increase or decrease the force over the platen. In a pressure-equalizing
mechanism the purpose is to enable the feed-roller (or a plurality
of feed-rollers) to be applied with equal force over the platen. | |
| | |
| 637 | Including lower feed-roller(s) (e.g., pressure roller,
etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 636. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to one
or more feed-roller* elements that are located relative
to the associated platen* adjacent to the underneath surface
of the platen.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass is for a typewriter wherein the lower-feed-rollers
are disposed along a single axis. | |
| | |
| 637.1 | Including concurrent control for disengagement of upper
and lower feed-rollers: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 637. Subject matter wherein a typewriter is provided with one
or more feed-rollers* that are located adjacent to the
underneath surface of an associated platen* and is further
provided with one or more feed-rollers located adjacent to the topmost
surface of said platen, and wherein both the underneath feed-rollers
are simultaneously moved toward the platen or simultaneously moved
away from the platen. |
| | |
| 637.2 | Mounted on apron: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 637. Subject matter wherein said feed-rollers* are supported
adjacent to the platen* on the apron* of the typewriter. |
| | |
| 637.3 | Mounted on plural roller carriers: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 637. Subject matter wherein two or more lower feed-rollers* are
provided, and wherein at least one of the feed-rollers is supported
on one member, and at least another of the feed-rollers is supported
on another member. |
| | |
| 637.6 | Mounted on single carrier having pivot intermediate front
and rear lower feed-rollers: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 637. Subject matter wherein two or more lower feed-rollers* are
provided, at least one feed-roller being supported on a member to
be adjacent to an associated platen* in a location below
an forward of the platen axis, and at least another feed-roller
being supported on the same member to be adjacent to said platen
in a location below and rearward of the platen axis, and wherein
said member oscillates about an axis that is movable toward and
away from the platen and is located between said feed-rollers. |
| | |
| 638 | Including feed or pressure roller mounted on "paper-finger": |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 636. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a feed-roller* that
is supported by a paper-finger* associated with a platen*.
| | (1)
Note. In this subclass the "paper-finger" may
be supported on a "paper bail" that is adjacent
to the topmost surface of the platen with which the paper bail is
associated. The term paper bail is defined in subclass 639.1 below. | |
| | |
| 639.1 | Mounted on "paper bail": |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 639. Subject matter wherein the upper feed-roller(s)* is/are
supported by a paper bail which term is discussed and defined in
(1) Note below.
| | (1)
Note. The term "paper bail" is the term used
by the typewriter industry to refer to a particular structure that
holds a paper sheet to a platen*. It usually includes
a bar that extends along the length of the platen parallel to the
axis thereof. An arm is affixed to each end of the bar, and the
other ends of the two arms are pivoted about a common axis parallel
to the platen axis, whereby the paper bail is hinged so that its
bar overlies the platen. When a record-medium* is fed between
the platen and the paper bail, the paper bail holds the record-medium
to the platen. | |
| | |
| 639.2 | Disengaged from platen by compound movement of bail (e.g.,
on double-pivoted mount): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 639.1. Subject matter wherein the "paper bail" is
normally closely adjacent to the platen* with which it
is associated, but where the paper bail is supported so as to be
moved out of its closely adjacent position, the movement being such
as to combine two or more kinds of motion.
| | (1)
Note. In this subclass the movement usually combines a reciprocatory
motion with an oscillatory motion. In some typewriters, the paper
bail is supported on an oscillatable member, which member is in
turn supported on a second oscillatable member. | |
| | |
| 640 | With cooperating scale: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 636. Subject matter wherein the roller couple feed means is associated
with a measuring instrument that is calibrated in units corresponding
to character-space* distances. |
| | |
| 641 | Feed-roller structure or brake or spacer therefor: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 636. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
construction of a feed-roller*, or wherein the feed-roller
includes means to retard its rotational movement or includes means
to connect the feed-roller with a drive means for the feed-roller,
or wherein significance is attributed to a feed-roller construction including
a plurality of such feed-rollers on a single axis and means for
separating one feed-roller from other feed-rollers along said axis. |
| | |
| 642 | Including sheet guide (e.g., for sheet insertion, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 578. Subclass matter wherein significance is attributed to structure
on or attached to a typewriter, which structure contributes to or
facilitates the movement of a sheet of record-medium* through
the typewriter in its intended or necessary path for proper typing
on the record-medium. |
| | |
| 643 | Platen-encircling band: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter wherein the structure includes a relatively
narrow member that substantially surrounds a platen* and
guides the sheet for movement around the platen. |
| | |
| 644 | Sheet stripper (e.g., for preventing reentry, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter wherein the structure includes a member that
is closely adjacent to a platen* around which a sheet of
record-medium* is partially wrapped during typing on the
sheet, which member is located relative to the platen in a position
to engage the leading edge of the sheet as that leading edge exits
from the platen and guide that leading edge out of contact with the
platen. |
| | |
| 645 | Sheet holddown member (e.g., "paper finger",
end-of-page holddown, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter wherein the structure includes a member that
is closely adjacent to a platen* around which a sheet of
record-medium* is partially wrapped during typing on the
sheet, which member engages a surface of the sheet and urges the
sheet into contact with the platen, or wherein significance is attributed
to the member engaging the surface of a sheet when the end of a
page* is adjacent to the member. |
| | |
| 645.1 | With aperture or notch (e.g., for typing therethrough,
etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 645. Subject matter wherein the member has a hole therethrough
or a portion cut out of an edge thereof, which hole or cut-out portion
is located adjacent the print-point* of the typewriter
and serves to permit a type-face* to impact the record-medium* through
the hole or cutout portion. |
| | |
| 645.2 | On or with erasing plate or signal or indicator: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 645. Subject matter wherein the member is mounted on or is part
of a support that is used to support a record-medium* while
a record-medium has an eraser applied thereto, or wherein the member
is mounted on or is part of a measuring instrument that is calibrated
in units corresponding to character-space* distances, or wherein
the member is provided with means to alert the typist to a condition
of the typewriter.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 698, | for an erasing table. |
|
| | |
| 645.3 | Moveable mounted on movable finger carrier: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 645. Subject matter wherein the member is supported by a structure
on the typewriter, and wherein the structure may be moved relative
to the typewriter and the member may be moved relative to the structure.
| | (1)
Note. In some typewriters of this subclass either the structure
or the member may be moved in a path that extends around the platen* with
which the structure and the member are associated. | |
| | |
| 645.4 | Pivotally mounted holddown: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 645. Subject matter wherein the member is supported for oscillatory
or arcuate movement about an axis related to the axis of the platen*.
| | (1)
Note. In some typewriters of this subclass the axis of the
member is substantially perpendicular to the axis of the platen. | |
| | |
| 645.5 | Mounted in front of platen axis: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 645. Subject matter wherein the member is supported relative
to the platen* on a structure that is located adjacent
to the platen and between the platen and a typist. |
| | |
| 646 | Sheet table at delivery side of platen: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter wherein the typewriter includes a platen* around
which a sheet of record-medium* is partially wrapped during
typing on the sheet, and wherein the support is located relative
to the platen in a position to receive the sheet as that sheet exits
from the platen after being typed thereon. |
| | |
| 647 | Movable sheet table or apron (e.g., detachable, extensible,
etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter wherein the structure includes a support
for holding a sheet of record-medium* adjacent to a typewriter
or includes an apron* for holding a sheet adjacent to the
platen* of a typewriter, which support or apron is capable of
being moved with respect to the platen with which it is associated.
| | (1)
Note. The support may be removed from and replaced on some
typewriters without disassembly of other parts of the typewriter,
or may be made larger or smaller. | |
| | |
| 648 | PLATEN OR PLATEN-MOVING MECHANISM: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
platen* of a typewriter or to means for moving the platen.
| | (1)
Note. The platen moving mechanism or the patents for this
portion of the schedule is that platen movement which is not caused
by carriage* feed or carriage return and similar carriage
movements, or which is not caused by case-shift*, or which
is not caused by line-space* mechanism. For such movements,
other portions of this schedule are more properly appropriate. |
| | (2)
Note. A flat platen of a typewriter is provided for in subclasses
23+ of this schedule. This subclass (648) and the subclasses
indented hereunder provided for a cylindrical platen or a platen
having a configuration other than significantly flat. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 23+, | and see (2) Note above. |
|
| | |
| 649 | For movement of platen other than for line-spacing: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 648. Subject matter wherein a platen* is moved for a
purpose other than to effect a line-space* distance.
| | (1)
Note. The movement of the platen is the typewriter of this
subclass is often to enable an extra-thick "manifold set" to be
inserted between the platen and the apron* associated therewith,
or to move the platen so that typing on the record-medium* may
be more readily seen by the typist, or to enable adjustments to
be made to the record-medium relative to the platen, etc. | |
| | |
| 650 | Cylindrical platen adjustable to facilitate compactness: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 649. Subject matter wherein a platen* has extreme ends,
one of which ends is movable relative to the other.
| | (1)
Note. The purpose of this adjustment is to enable a platen
to be extended or compressed in length, or to enable the turning
knob of a platen to be moved along the axis of the platen. | |
| | |
| 653 | By eccentric mounting for platen: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 649. Subject matter wherein the platen* is rotatable about
a first axis, and the first axis is rotatable about a second axis
on the carriage* and parallel to the first axis. |
| | |
| 655 | Mounted on movable carrier: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 654. Subject matter wherein the character-size platen* is
supported on a mechanism that enables movement of the platen relative
to the typewriter. |
| | |
| 656 | Bar (i.e., line size) platen: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 648. Subject matter wherein a platen* has a length dimension
equal to or greater than the length of a print-line* on
a record-medium*, and has a height dimension approximating
the height of a character*. |
| | |
| 657 | Mounted on cylindrical member: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 656. Subject matter wherein a bar platen* has (as defined
in subclass 656 above) is included in or on the surface of a cylindrical
plate (as defined in subclass 659 below). |
| | |
| 658 | Semicylindrical platen: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 648. Subject matter wherein a platen* is an arcuate plate
extending peripherally approximately 180° about an axis
and extending along the axis for a dimension approximately equivalent to
the width of a record-medium* supported by said platen. |
| | |
| 659 | Cylindrical platen: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 648. Subject matter wherein a platen* has a surface that
is generated by a line revolving about an axis parallel to the line.
| | (1)
Note. Although the definition of "cylinder" stated
above would produce only a smooth-surfaced "right cylinder",
it is not intended that a cylindroidal member having minor surface
roughness be barred from any of the subclasses indented hereunder.
Such minor surface variations are in fact found in the platen members
found in subclasses 661.3+, 661.4, or 662 below. | |
| | |
| 660 | Detachably secured to platen carriage: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 659. Subject matter wherein a platen* is mounted on a
carriage* for movement with the carriage by structure that
enables the platen to be removed from and replaced on the carriage
without disassembly of other parts of the typewriter. |
| | |
| 660.1 | By axially displaceable supporting shaft: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 660. Subject matter wherein the structure includes a rod on which
the platen* is mounted for rotation of the platen about
an axis coincident with the platen and the rod, which rod is movable along
its axis for removal of the platen mounted on the rod. |
| | |
| 660.2 | By pivoted member overlying platen shaft: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 660. Subject matter wherein the structure includes a rod on which
the platen* is mounted for rotation of the platen about
an axis coincident with the platen and the rod, which rod is held
to the carriage* by a member that is over the rod and is
oscillatable away from the rod for removal of the rod and platen
mounted thereon. |
| | |
| 660.3 | By disengageable platen sectors: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 660. Subject matter wherein the platen* is formed of a
plurality of segments surrounding the axis of rotation of the platen
and wherein the platen is removed from the carriage* by
disassembling the segments. |
| | |
| 661 | With sound-muffling means: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 659. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a platen* that
is provided with means for eliminating or reducing the noise produced by
the impact of a type-member* against the surface of the
platen.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 689+, | for other means for muffling the noise produced
by a typewriter. |
|
| | |
| 661.1 | Including plural layers of varying hardness: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 661. Subject matter wherein the platen* is formed of a
plurality of thicknesses of material substantially concentrically
arranged, and wherein the outermost thickness of material is of
a different firmness than the innermost thickness.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 662, | for a platen having surface portions of varying
hardness. |
|
| | |
| 661.3 | Including cylindrical sections or rings (e.g., of character-space
width): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 661. Subject matter wherein the platen* is formed of a
plurality of annular elements each having a circular dimension equal
to the diameter of the platen cylinder and a width dimension extending
axially of the platen.
| | (1)
Note. In some typewriters each of the annular elements may
have a width dimension equal to the width of a character*. | |
| | |
| 661.4 | Including a wound member: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 661. Subject matter wherein the platen* is formed of a
plurality of convolutions of material about the axis of the platen.
| | (1)
Note. The convolutions may be wound spirally (i.e., increasing
in diameter as the convolutions are wound around the axis) or helically
(i.e., having the same diameter but progressing along the axis as
the convolutions are wound around the axis), or be a combination
of both forms of convolutions. | |
| | |
| 662 | Including particular surface characteristic (e.g., translucent,
pigment yielding, corrugated, of varying hardness, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 659. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
properties of the circumferential surface of the platen*.
| | (1)
Note. In this subclass the platen may be translucent, may
include a pigment-yielding surface, may be formed with ridges or
irregularities, or may be formed with different firmness of material
along either its length or periphery, or have other surface characteristics
not otherwise provided for. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 661.1, | for a platen having plural layers of varying hardness. |
|
| | |
| 663 | LOCKING OR INTERLOCKING MECHANISM: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to means
for preventing an operation from occurring or to means for preventing
a normally movable member from moving, or wherein significance is
attributed to means for preventing two mutually exclusive operations from
occurring simultaneously or to means for preventing two mutually
exclusive movable members from moving simultaneously.
| | (1)
Note. The difference between "lock" and "interlock" will
best be illustrated by the following examples. In typing a line of
text, the typewriter carriage* reaches a position, determined
by a margin-stop*, corresponding to the end of a print-line*.
At this position of the carriage, it is desirable to prevent further movement
of the carriage, or movement of any of the key* elements,
or of the space-bar*. A lock means prevents such movement,
but does not prevent a desired carriage return movement. Moreover,
a typist may override a carriage lock by pressing a margin*-release key.
A lock may also be used to prevent movement of typewriter keys,
carriage, or other parts during transport of the typewriter. An
interlock is used to prevent movement of one key while another key
is pressed, or to prevent movement of a key while the carriage is
moving to a tabular position. Stated in different terms, if it
is not desirable for two operations or movements to occur at the
same time, an interlock is used to prevent one while the other is
occurring. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 247+, | for a case-shift* locking means. |
| 286.3, | for a denominational lock in a tabular carriage. |
| 294.2, | for a key lock in a tabular carriage. |
| 589, | for locking mechanism in a typewriter including
tally-strip feeding. |
|
| | |
| 664 | For interlocking plural functions or mechanisms: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 663. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to means
for preventing two mutually exclusive operations from occurring
simultaneously or to means for preventing two mutually exclusive
movable members from moving simultaneously.
| | (1)
Note. The significant aspect of this and indented subclasses
lies in the phrase "mutually exclusive". As discussed
in (1) Note of subclass 663 above, mutually exclusive operations
or movements exist where it would not be desirable, or would result
in jamming or faulty operation, for one to occur simultaneously with
the other. | |
| | |
| 665 | Plural carriage-moving mechanisms (e.g., escapement, tabulation,
etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 664. Subject matter wherein a typewriter is provided with first
means for causing movement of a carriage* in a first mode
of operation and also provided with second means for causing the carriage
to be moved in a second mode of operation, and wherein the typewriter
is also provided with an interlock for preventing one of the means
from operating when the other means is operating. |
| | |
| 666 | Plural keys or key linkages (e.g., for type-face selection,
etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 664. Subject matter wherein a typewriter is provided with at
least two key* elements or at least two sets of lever arrangements
for transmitting movement of a key into movement of a type-head*,
and wherein the typewriter is also provided with an interlock for
preventing one of the keys or lever arrangements from being effective
to operate when the other is operating.
| | (1)
Note. In a typewriter of this subclass when a first key has
been fully depressed to cause operation of a first type-bar* a second
key can be moved to a small extent, but will not cause operation
of a second type-bar; or simultaneous full depression of two keys
is prevented, thereby preventing simultaneous operation of two type-bars.
See subclass 667 for a key-board* lock using an interlock mechanism
so that no key may be moved. |
| | (2)
Note. Also in this subclass, the interlock means may include:
an electrical interlock, an interlock including a plurality of elements
that are displaced to prevent intrusion of a second key lever when
a first key lever has displaced the elements, a flexible strip that
is tautened to prevent a second key lever from being moved when
a first key lever has tautened the strip, and a plate that is shifted by
one key lever to prevent movement of a second key lever, the mechanisms described
being only exemplary of those found herein. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 667, | and see (1) Note above. |
|
| | |
| 667 | Key-board lock using interlock mechanism: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 663. Subject matter wherein a typewriter is provided with an
interlock mechanism that prevents any movement of any key* element
when the lock mechanism is effective.
| | (1)
Note. In this subclass a lock mechanism acts on an interlock
mechanism to cause the interlock mechanism to be effective to prevent
movement of any of the keys. Stated differently, the lock mechanism controls
the interlock mechanism, but the interlock mechanism does not control
the lock mechanism. |
| | (2)
Note. For a discussion of the difference between a "lock" and
an "interlock", see (1) Note of subclass 663. | |
| | |
| 668 | Locking means actuated in response to a condition: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 663. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to means
for preventing an operation from occurring or to means for preventing
a normally movable member from moving, either means being made effective
as a result of a characteristic or state of environment or the occurrence
of a predetermined event in a typewriter. |
| | |
| 669 | Failure of power supply: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 668. Subject matter wherein the preventing means is made effective
as a result of the absence of external power to a typewriter that
requires external power for its operation.
| | (1)
Note. The structure defined locks a mechanism in an electric
typewriter, whereby if a key* has been inadvertently pressed
while power is not applied thereto, that key will not cause operation when
power is reapplied to the typewriter. | |
| | |
| 670 | End-of-page lock (e.g., responsive to preset condition): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 668. Subject matter wherein the preventing means is made effective
when a predetermined state of the typewriter has been reached, which
state corresponds to the termination of a page* of typed
text.
| | (1)
Note. The preset condition that causes locking may be the
passage of the bottom edge of a sheet past a particular point on
the typewriter, the typing of a predetermined number of print-lines* of type,
etc., or any condition that actuates a lock so that no further print-lines
may be typed on that particular page. | |
| | |
| 670.1 | Responsive to end-of-page sensor: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 670. Subject matter wherein a typewriter is provided with means
to detect the termination of a page* of typed text, whereby
the preventing means is made effective.
| | (1)
Note. The sensor can detect the trailing edge of a sheet
of record-medium*, or can detect a hole, mark, or other
indicium in either a sheet or a web of record-medium that corresponds
to the end of a page. | |
| | |
| 670.3 | By cam groove and follower: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 670.2. Subject matter wherein the preventing means includes a channel
that is engaged by a member within the channel, which channel is
formed as a helical or spiral cam and is moved by incremental rotation
of a platen*, whereby the movement of the channel effects
movement of the member to effect stopping of the platen. |
| | |
| 671 | End of maximum typed line: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 668. Subject matter wherein the preventing means is made effective
when the typewriter carriage* that is moving in a character-space* direction arrives
at a predetermined position relative to the typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. In most typewriters, the position is determined by
a margin* regulator (usually the right-hand-margin regulator for
English or other European languages), and the locking means prevents further
carriage movement as well as movement of any of the character*-key* elements.
The locking means may usually be disengaged, however, to permit the
typing of several more characters on the same line. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 342+, | for margin-regulator mechanism. |
|
| | |
| 671.1 | Actuated by space-bar: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 671. Subject matter wherein the preventing means is made effective
by operation of the space-bar* of the typewriter after
the typewriter carriage* has arrived at a predetermined
position relative to the typewriter. |
| | |
| 671.3 | Actuated by paper-finger: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 671.2. Subject matter wherein the universal-bar* is prevented
from moving when a paper-finger* that is mounted to move
with a platen* on a carriage* engages an element
that is stationary relative to the frame of the typewriter. |
| | |
| 671.4 | Interposed component: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 671.2. Subject matter wherein the preventing means includes an
element that is movable into either of two positions, in a first
position the element is between a fixed portion of a typewriter
and the universal-bar* or a member affixed to and movable
with the universal-bar, and in a second position the element is
not between the portion and the universal-bar, whereby when the
element is in the first position the universal-bar is prevented
from moving its full movement in a direction to actuate the function* that would
be actuated if the element were in its second position. |
| | |
| 672 | Escapement lock: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 671. Subject matter wherein the preventing means prevents the
carriage* from moving by holding the carriage escapement
to be incapable of carriage feed.
| | (1)
Note. The term "carriage escapement" is defined
in the definition of subclass 329. | |
| | |
| 672.1 | Type-bar lock: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 671. Subject matter wherein the preventing means includes an
element that prevents a type-bar* from moving. |
| | |
| 672.2 | Key-lever lock (e.g., by hook on key lever): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 671. Subject matter wherein the preventing means includes an
element that prevents a key* lever from moving.
| | (1)
Note. In some typewriters the key lever is prevented from
moving by an element on a typewriter frame that contacts a hooklike
member that is mounted on the key lever. | |
| | |
| 673 | Coin-controlled lock (e.g., responsive to print-lines,
time, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 668. Subject matter wherein the preventing means is made ineffective
by using a token representing money, whereby a typewriter may be
made available for hire.
| | (1)
Note. Usually the typewriter of this subclass is operable
after the insertion of a coin, and operates for a preset number
of print-lines*, or character* symbols, or period
of time, or any countable characteristic, after which the typewriter
is inoperable. | |
| | |
| 674 | For locking carriage in centered position (e.g., with shipping
support): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 663. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to means
for preventing a carriage* from moving away from a position
that is substantially midway of the total distance that the carriage
is capable of moving.
| | (1)
Note. The purpose of a lock of this and indented subclasses
is usually to enable transport of a typewriter without damage to
its movable parts. | |
| | |
| 675 | And disengaging case-shift lock: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 674. Subject matter wherein a typewriter is provided with means
to latch its case-shift* mechanism, and said preventing
means also unlatches said case-shift mechanism. |
| | |
| 678 | For locking key in actuated position (e.g., to remove type-face
from ink pad): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 663. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to means
for preventing return movement of a particular key* element
after that key has been pressed by a typist.
| | (1)
Note. In some typewriters of this subclass the typewriter
is provided with a type-member*-inking block that the type-member
contacts while in a rest position, and said preventing means locks
a key element while the type-member is out of contact with its inking block. | |
| | |
| 679 | MEANS AUXILIARY TO TYPEWRITING FUNCTION: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to structure
that is part of a typewriter to aid a typist in using a typewriter,
or significance is attributed to a device used in conjunction with
a typewriter, which device is connected to, or may be disconnected
from, a typewriter, and which device is used by a typist in the
operation of a typewriter, but which structure or device does not
itself effect the imprint of a character*, a character-space* or word-space*,
or a function* of the typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder
provide for structure that facilitates use of a typewriter for typing,
which structure is not provided for elsewhere in this class (400).
It is emphasized, however, that a patent to be properly placed
herein should claim a subcombination that is in a typewriter rather
than claim a subcombination by itself. | |
| | |
| 680 | Means for collapsing typewriter or support for record-medium
or copy: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 679. Subject matter wherein the structure of a typewriter is
capable of being compacted to occupy a volume smaller than which
it occupies while it is used for typing, or wherein the typewriter is
provided with means for holding or retaining a record-medium* or
a text from which the typist is reading as the typing is done, and
wherein the holding or retaining means is capable of being compacted. |
| | |
| 681 | By tilting typewriter (e.g., via collapsible legs, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 680. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is made ready for
use by pivoting it in one direction, and is compacted by pivoting
it in the opposite direction.
| | (1)
Note. In this subclass the entire typewriter is tilted, including
the key-board*, the carriage*, the type-member* elements,
and all the parts carried by the main frame, or the typewriter is
compacted by moving one or more of the leg portions of the typewriter. | |
| | |
| 683 | By moving carriage relative to frame: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 680. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is compacted by movement
of the carriage* relative to the typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. In some typewriters the carriage is hinged to be pivoted
or folded over with respect to the body of the typewriter. | |
| | |
| 684 | By moving type-bars relative to frame: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 680. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is compacted by movement
of the set of type-bar* elements within the typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. In many typewriters having this means for compacting
the typewriter, the set of type-head* elements are arranged to
lie in a curved line while they are in operative position, the curve
of the line being such that each type-head travels approximately
the same distance from its rest position to the print-point*.
For compacting the typewriter, the type-heads are retracted so
they all lie in substantially a straight line or common plane. | |
| | |
| 685 | Including typewriter built into carrying case: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 680. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is manufactured to
be part of an enclosure for the typewriter, which enclosure also
includes a handle for lifting and holding the enclosure and the typewriter
so enclosed, and wherein the typewriter is compacted by moving component parts
thereof to within the enclosure.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass is not for a case into which a typewriter
may be temporarily positioned for carrying, but rather for a case
that is intended as a permanent part of the typewriter, except that
the case may be temporarily dismantled if necessary for repair or
maintenance. | |
| | |
| 687 | Having nonimpact movement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 686. Subject matter wherein the elements are caused to contact
one another with a motion that is gradual rather than sudden.
| | (1)
Note. The function* of this buffer is to provide
for silent operation and to reduce the degree of wear on the parts due
to impacting of the elements against each other. | |
| | |
| 689 | Means for muffling typewriter noise: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 679. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to elimination
or reduction of the sound produced by a typewriter during normal
use thereof.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 661, | for a platen* having means for muffling
noise produced by a typewriter. |
|
| | |
| 690 | By sound-barrier enclosure for typewriter (e.g., by sound-absorbing
material): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 689. Subject matter wherein a typewriter is provided with means
that substantially surrounds all or part of the typewriter mechanism,
which means absorbs or baffles the noise normally produced by the
typewriter during use thereof, or is provided with means that substantially
soaks up the noise normally produced by a typewriter during use
thereof. |
| | |
| 690.1 | With viewing window (e.g., having reflection eliminator): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 690. Subject matter wherein the surrounding means has a transparent
section therein so that the typist may see any part of the typewriter
or the record-medium.
| | (1)
Note. In some typewriters the transparent section is arranged
to prevent or reduce the possibility of the typist seeing a false
or unwanted image. | |
| | |
| 690.4 | Including means facilitating opening of enclosure: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 690. Subject matter wherein the surrounding means has a section
that provides access to the interior of the surrounding means, and
wherein significance is attributed to said section or to an element
that maintains said section in an access-permitting position or
in an access-preventing position. |
| | |
| 691 | Frame, casing, or support for typewriter: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 679. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to (a)
that part of the structure which supports movable portions of the
typewriter for movement relative thereto, or (b) that part of the
structure which encloses or surrounds the typewriter or a portion
thereof, or (c) that part of the structure that sustains the typewriter
in typing position. |
| | |
| 692 | Having means facilitating interchange of parts: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 691. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is one in which one
or more of the elements thereof may be exchanged one for another,
and wherein said frame structure is particularly arranged to effect
such exchange of typewriter elements. |
| | |
| 693 | Housing structure: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 691. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to that
part of the structure which encloses or surrounds the typewriter
or a portion thereof. |
| | |
| 693.1 | For ink-ribbon spool (e.g., spool cover, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 693. Subject matter wherein the housing structure at least partially
encloses a reel on which a ribbon* of inked* material
is wound.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass provides for that portion of the housing
that covers the ribbon spool and is movable out of the way to provide
access to the ribbon spool. The cover may be pivoted or slidable
or removable. | |
| | |
| 696 | By laser beam or adhesive-surface ribbon or chemical eradicator: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 695. Subject matter wherein the mistake is removed by (a) a laser
means, or (b) a specially prepared tape that has on one surface
thereof a coating to which the ink* of an imprinted character* will adhere,
or (c) a chemical composition which will dissolve or remove the
ink of an imprinted character.
| | (1)
Note. The term "laser" is an acronym for
Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation, and is
defined as "a device that utilizes the natural oscillation
of atoms for amplifying or generating electromagnetic waves in the
visible region of the spectrum". |
| | (2)
Note. The adhesive-surface ribbon" [part
(b) of the definition] is used by temporarily placing it
between the incorrectly imprinted character and the type-face* that
was improperly used, and restriking with the same improper type-face,
thereby causing the incorrectly imprinted character to adhere to
the coating and be stripped from the record-medium*. | |
| | |
| 697 | By overprinting (e.g., with coated material) to cancel
error: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 695. Subject matter wherein a mistake is removed by using a specially
prepared sheet or tape that has on one surface thereof a coating
of a color approximating the color of the record-medium*,
which coating will adhere to the ink* of an imprinted character*,
which sheet or tape is used by temporarily placing it between the
incorrectly imprinted character and the type-face* that
was improperly used, and restriking with the same improper type-face, thereby
causing the incorrectly imprinted character to be covered by the
coating.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 240.1, | for a ribbon* having a field for imprinting
character symbols and a field for overprinting erroneous characters. |
|
| | |
| 697.1 | With drive for ribbon having coating thereon: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 697. Subject matter wherein the specially prepared tape is wound
on a spool and the tape is advanced relative to the record-medium*.
| | (1)
Note. In some typewriters of this subclass the correction
by overprinting is performed by depressing a single key* element
(identified by some term indicating correction), which effects the
following actions: (a) the carriage* is backspaced one
character-space*, (b) the ribbon*, which has an
inking field and a coated field, is shifted so as to move the inking
field out of imprinting position and move the coating field into
imprint position, and (c) the carriage-feed mechanism is made temporarily
ineffective (i.e., "silenced"). Then (a) the
improperly used type-face* will be restruck to coat the
incorrect character* with pigment that is the color of
the record-medium, but the carriage will not be character-spaced,
(b) the ribbon will be reshifted so that the inking field will overlie
the print-point*, and (c) the correct type-face will be
actuated which will imprint the correct character and character-space
on the carriage. | |
| | |
| 698 | With erasing table: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 695. Subject matter wherein a typewriter is provided with a platform
to support the record-medium* while the incorrectly imprinted
character* is being rubbed by an abrasive eraser.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 645.2, | for an erasing plate combined with a sheet holddown
member. |
|
| | |
| 699 | With receptacle for refuse: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 695. Subject matter wherein a typewriter is provided with a container
that serves to collect the material that is worn away from the record-medium* while
an abrasive eraser is rubbed over the surface of the record-medium. |
| | |
| 701 | Means for cleaning, or facilitating cleaning of, type-face: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 679. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
removal of extraneous matter from a type-face*.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass is for a holder for a type-head* or
a type-member* which holder supports the type against movement
while a cleaner is applied to the type. | |
| | |
| 702 | By coating type-face (e.g., via type-face cleaner, brush,
etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 701. Subject matter wherein the extraneous matter is removed
by rubbing a type-face relative to an element that cleans the type-face.
| | (1)
Note. In this subclass the cleaner is usually a liquid that
is usually carried by a ribbon* or sheet which is impacted
by the type-face or is a brush having bristles, past which brush
the type-face* moves. | |
| | |
| 703 | Indicator means: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 679. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a device
used in conjunction with a typewriter, which device helps the typist
to know the skill of the typist, or the condition of the typewriter,
or the location of a portion of the typewriter or the record-medium* relative to
the typewriter.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 15, | for a justification indicator. |
| 249, | for an indicator or ribbon* depletion: |
|
| | |
| 704 | For indicating typist"s skill or needed adjustment: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 703. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a mechanism
for showing the user"s proficiency in manipulating the
various mechanisms and functions of the typewriter being used, or
wherein the device helps the user to know the condition of the typewriter
so that if the typewriter is not operating properly, it can be put
into working condition.
| | (1)
Note. One example of the disclosures found herein is a means
for determining if the type-head* is properly aligned relative
to the print-point* so that if the alignment is incorrect,
the type-head can be adjusted on its type-bar*. | |
| | |
| 705.2 | With word counter: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 705. Subject matter wherein the device shows a user of the typewriter
how many word* groups have been imprinted on a print-line*.
| | (1)
Note. The word counter usually operates by counting the actuations
of the space-bar* as a print-line is formed, and indicating
to the typist a signal or display in accordance with such a count.
To be properly placed into this subclass, a patent should claim
the word counter in combination with other typewriter elements. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 235, | Registers,
subclass 102 for a word counter, per se, for use in a typewriter. |
|
| | |
| 705.3 | By means driven from carriage (e.g., for indicating end
of print-line, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 705. Subject matter wherein the device is moved as a result of
the carriage* being moved along the print-line*.
| | (1)
Note. Included herein are devices such as a calibrated dial
or tape that displays the number of character-space* distances imprinted
or remaining to be imprinted, or a device that indicates a selected
position of the carriage along its path of movement. |
| | (2)
Note. Also in this subclass is an indicator that provides
a signal to the typist when, during movement of the carriage, the
desired end of the print-line, or the beginning of a new print-line
to be typed, is approached. | |
| | |
| 705.4 | Scale for facilitating tabulation: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 705. Subject matter wherein the device is a measuring instrument
calibrated in units corresponding to character-space* distances,
which instrument is used to help a typist set tabular positions
for the carriage*.
| | (1)
Note. The term "tabular" is defined in subclass
283 and further discussed in (2) Note thereto. | |
| | |
| 705.5 | Scale for facilitating centering of print-line: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 705. Subject matter wherein the device is a measuring instrument
calibrated in units corresponding to character-space* distances,
which instrument is used to help a typist to determine the midpoint
of a print-line* relative to the midpoint of a record-medium*.
| | (1)
Note. The purpose of this device is to aid the typist to
center a particular print-line, for example, a heading, a title,
etc., relative to the side edges of a page*. Any print-line
may be so centered, but usually it is the first-appearing print-line of
a page or the first-appearing print-line of a portion of text that
requires a heading to distinguish that portion from other portions
of the text; therefore, the centered print-line may appear anywhere
on a page. | |
| | |
| 706 | For indicating position of line or end-of-page: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 703. Subject matter wherein the device shows the location of
a record-medium* that has been, or is to be, moved in a
line-space* direction, the location being shown relative
to an intended print-point* or a previously imprinted print-line* or
to an intended last print-line expected to appear on a page*. |
| | |
| 706.1 | By scale mounted on paper table: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 706. Subject matter wherein the device is a measuring instrument
calibrated in units corresponding to line-space* distances,
which device is located on a support for a record-medium* sheet. |
| | |
| 707 | By means driven from platen cylinder: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 706. Subject matter wherein the device is moved as a result of
the platen* being rotated incrementally.
| | (1)
Note. Included in this and indented subclasses are devices
such as a calibrated dial, tape, or the like which displays the amount
of incremental rotational movements of the platen*, or
a device that can be set manually to produce a signal when a predetermined
movement of the record-medium* in the line-space* direction
has occurred. | |
| | |
| 707.1 | Drive initiated by detector of record-medium: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 707. Subject matter wherein the device is provided with means
to sense a characteristic of the record-medium* and said
means causes connection of the device with the platen* to
move the device.
| | (1)
Note. Usually the sensor detects the trailing end of a sheet
(i.e., the absence of a sheet that has moved past a particular location).
However, this subclass also provides for a sensor to detect an index
mark, a hole or notch, an area of magnetically oriented particles
on the sheet, or any other indication that a particular point on
the sheet has reached a particular location. | |
| | |
| 707.2 | Including relatively movable pointer and scale (e.g., rotatable
or rectilinearly movable pointer): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 707. Subject matter wherein the device includes two elements,
one of which elements is calibrated in units corresponding to line-space* distances, and
the other of which elements indicates any of the calibrations on
the first-mentioned element, and wherein either of the elements
is moved with respect to the other element to indicate line-space
distances.
| | (1)
Note. The device (i.e., pointer) may move with a turning
or with a straight-line motion. | |
| | |
| 707.3 | Scale rotated by gear drive: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 707.2. Subject matter wherein said calibrated element is moved
with a turning motion and wherein the turning motion is caused by
the incremental rotation of the platen* by way of a drive
train that includes gear wheels. |
| | |
| 707.5 | With line numbering: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 707. Subject matter wherein a typewriter is provided with means
for imprinting successive numeral digits representing successive
numbers for the successive print-lines that are typed, whereby an
indication of the number of lines that have been typed is shown. |
| | |
| 708 | Including detector of record-medium: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 706. Subject matter wherein the device is provided with means
to sense a characteristic of the record-medium* and said
means causes an indication of the location of the record-medium to
be shown to the typist.
| | (1)
Note. Usually the sensor detects the trailing end of a sheet
(i.e., the absence of a sheet that has moved past a particular location).
However, this subclass also provides for a sensor to detect an index
mark, a hole or notch, an area of magnetically oriented particles
on the sheet, or any other indication that a particular point on
the sheet has reached a particular location. | |
| | |
| 708.1 | Having electrical contacts separated by record-medium: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 708. Subject matter wherein said sensing means includes an electrical
circuit having two elements intended to touch one another for completion
of the circuit, which two elements are maintained in a separated
or open position by the record-medium*, whereby when the record-medium
is absent from between the elements, the circuit will be closed.
| | (1)
Note. The platen* itself may include one of the
elements of the circuit, and the absence of the record-medium may
be indicated by a hole in the record-medium at the location of the
electrical element. | |
| | |
| 709.1 | By transparent indicator: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 709. Subject matter wherein said device has the capability of
transmitting light therethrough, whereby a character* on
a record-medium* may be seen through the device. |
| | |
| 709.2 | For indicating print-line alignment:. |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 709. Subject matter wherein said device has an extended straight
edge thereon, whereby a particular print-line* on the record-medium* will be
precisely located with respect to the print-line at which a type-face* will
impact
| | (1)
Note. The indicator of this subclass is used when a previously
typed sheet is reinserted into the typewriter, and permits a newly
typed line to be aligned relative to previously typed lines. | |
| | |
| 711 | Including a light: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 703. Subject matter wherein a typewriter is provided with means
for emitting a visible signal to a typist when a condition of the
typewriter has been reached. |
| | |
| 713 | Attachment for shielding or screening record-medium or
typewriter (e.g., against wind, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 679. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a device
used to cover a portion of the typewriter or the record-medium* or
used to protect a portion of the record-medium.
| | (1)
Note. One of the purposes of the shield or screen is to hide
the typed material from curious or prying eyes looking over the
typist"s shoulder. Another purpose is to protect the typewriter
of the record-medium from the effects of air moving in the vicinity
of the typewriter. | |
| | |
| 714 | For screening key-board: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 713. Subject matter wherein the device covers the key-board* of
a typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. The purpose of the cover is usually to prevent the
typist from seeing the key-board while learning the "touch" system
of typing. | |
| | |
| 715 | Attachment for guiding fingers or hands of typist (e.g.,
hand rest): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 679. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a device
that separates the key* elements of a key-board* into
groups of keys, each group including those keys that are usually
pressed by a particular finger of the typist"s hands during "touch" typing,
or to a device that serves to support the hands or the arms of a typist
during the typing operation. |
| | |
| 716 | Attachment for illuminating or viewing (e.g., prism, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 679. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a device
that casts light on, or reflects or refracts light from, the record-medium* or
a portion of the typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. The purpose of the device is to enable the typist to
see those portions of the typewriter, or of the text being typed, that
may normally be out of sight. A prism (i.e., an optically transparent
body having planar surfaces angularly related to one another) may
be part of the viewing system. | |
| | |
| 717 | Attachment for holding an article (e.g., pencil, eraser,
etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 679. Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a device
that is used to retain an object within sight or reach of the typist,
which object is used by the typist during the typing operation.
| | (1)
Note. The object in this subclass may be a pen or pencil,
or correcting paper, or eraser, etc. | |
| | |
| 718 | Copyholder: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 717. Subject matter wherein the object retained is a text from
which the typist is reading as the typing is done. |
| | |
| 718.1 | Actuated by typewriter (e.g., to simulate line-spacing,
for web copy, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 718. Subject matter wherein the device is provided with structure
that is movable to indicate to the typist that portion of the text
in the holder that the typist is then reading from and typing, which
structure is caused to be moved by a portion of the typewriter.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass provides for a copyholder that moves
the text being copied from a relative to a stationary indicator, or
for a copyholder wherein a movable indicator moves over a stationary
text, but in either event the movement results from actuation of
the line-space* lever. Also found in this subclass is
a pointer or indicator that is actuated by a carriage-feed mechanism
and indicates character* position, and a pointer that is
actuated by a carriage-return mechanism to move a pointer in a line-space
direction. | |
| | |
| 718.2 | With adjustment of line-spacing: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 718.1. Subject matter wherein the text being copied is moved by
the structure in line by line fashion, and wherein the distance
that the text is moved for each line may be changed. |
| | |
| 719 | MISCELLANEOUS: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter not provided for in the previous subclasses.
| | (1)
Note. A patent for this subclass would include a typewriter
or a portion of a typewriter used for a nontyping operation. | |
| | |
CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS
The following subclasses are collections of published disclosures
pertaining to various aspects of the typewriter art, which aspects
do not form appropriate bases for subclasses in the foregoing classification,
(i.e., subclasses superior hereto in the schedule) wherein original copies
of patents are placed in the basis of proximate function of the
apparatus. These subclasses assist a search based on remote function
of the apparatus and may be of further assistance to the searcher,
either as a starting point in searching this class or as an indication of
further related fields of search inside or outside the class. Thus,
there is here provided a second access for retrieval of a limited
number of types of disclosures. Disclosures are placed in these
subclasses for their value as references and as leads to appropriate
main or secondary fields of search, without regard to their original classification
or their claimed subject matter. The disclosures found in the following
subclass are examples, only, of the indicated subject matter, and
in no instance do they represent the entire extent of the prior
art.
| 900 | CHEMICAL-SYMBOL CHARACTER: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is capable of imprinting
a character* that represents a symbol used in chemistry. |
| | |
| 901 | CONTINUOUSLY ROTATING TYPE-HEAD: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with a
type-head that includes a type-set-assemblage*, which type-head
turns continuously and impacts the record-medium* even
as it is turning. |
| | |
| 902 | STEPPING-MOTOR DRIVE FOR WEB FEED: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with an
electric motor that turns in increments and is used to line-space* a
piece of web record-medium*. |
| | |
| 903 | STEPPING-MOTOR DRIVE FOR CARRIAGE FEED: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with an
electric motor that turns in increments and is used to impart character-space
movements to the carriage. |
| | |
| 904 | SUBSCRIPT OR SUPERSCRIPT CHARACTER: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein the typewriter is capable of typing
a character* that is located below the usual print-line* or
above the usual print-line. |
| | |
![[Search a list of Patent Appplications for class 400]](../as.gif)
CLASS 400,